2017 Nissan Titan And XD | Owner's Manual USA

User Manual: 2017-titan

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 590 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2017 Nissan Titan and Titan XD Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information
OM17EA 0A61U0
Table of Contents
2017 Nissan Titan Diesel Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information Supplement

2017 TITAN

OWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2017 NISSAN TITAN A61-D

A61-D

Printing : June 2016 (03)

Publication No.: OM1E 0A60U0

Printed in U.S.A.

OM17EA 0A61U0

CLICK HERE to view the 2017 Nissan Titan Diesel Owner's

Manual and Maintenance Information Supplement

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN

owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with

confidence. It was produced using the latest

techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-

stand the operation and maintenance of your

vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-

ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this

manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

explains details about the warranties cov-

ering your vehicle. The “Maintenance and

schedules” section of this manual explains

details about maintaining and servicing

your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Cus-

tomer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only)

will explain how to resolve any concerns

you may have with your vehicle, and clarify

your rights under your state’s lemon law.

A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best.

When you require any service or have any ques-

tions, they will be glad to assist you with the

extensive resources available to them.

In addition to factory-installed options, your ve-

hicle may also be equipped with additional ac-

cessories installed prior to delivery. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details

concerning the particular accessories with which

you vehicle is equipped. It is important that you

familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings,

cautions and instructions concerning proper use

of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle

and/or accessory. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your vehicle is

equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-

iarity with controls and maintenance require-

ments assisting you in the safe operation of your

vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

●NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

●ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.

●

ALWAYS give your full attention to driving

and avoid using vehicle features or taking

other actions that could distract you.

●

ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-

priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen

children should be seated in the rear seat.

●ALWAYS provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features to

all occupants of the vehicle.

●ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

For descriptions specified for 4-wheel drive

models, a mark is placed at the begin-

ning of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features for

off-road use, failure to operate 4-wheel

drive models correctly may result in loss of

control or a collision. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Driving safety precau-

tions” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIV-

ING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passenger

car because it has a higher center of

gravity for off-road use. As with other

vehicles with features of this type, fail-

ure to operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control or an accident.

For additional information, refer to “On-

pavement and off-road driving

precautions”, “Avoiding collision and

rollover” and “Driving safety precau-

tions” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety, emissions or dura-

bility and may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or per-

formance problems resulting from modi-

fications may not be covered under

NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diag-

nostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the

port during normal driving, for example

remote insurance company monitoring,

remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or

engine reprogramming, may cause inter-

ference or damage to vehicle systems. We

do not recommend or endorse the use of

any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, un-

less specifically approved by NISSAN. The

vehicle warranty may not cover damage

caused by any aftermarket plug-in device

This manual includes information for all features

and equipment available on this model. Features

and equipment in your vehicle may vary depend-

ing on model, trim level, options selected, order,

date of production, region or availability. There-

fore, you may find information about features or

equipment that are not included or installed on

your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in

this manual are those in effect at the time of print-

ing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifi-

cations, performance, design or component sup-

pliers without notice and without obligation. From

time to time, NISSAN may update or revise this

manual to provide Owners with the most accurate

information currently available. Please carefully

read and retain with this manual all revision up-

dates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure you have

access to accurate and up-to-date information re-

garding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle

Owner’s Manuals and any updates can also be

found in the Owner section of the NISSAN website

at https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/

navigation/manualsGuide

. If you have ques-

tions concerning any information in your Owner’s

Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For

contact information, refer to the NISSAN CUS-

TOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s

Manual.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They

are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause death or serious

personal injury. To avoid or reduce the

risk, the procedures must be followed

precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause minor or moder-

ate personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-

cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”

or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-

tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the

vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wear

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-

ies, may contain perchlorate material. The

following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate

Material – special handling may apply, See

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Visteon and Bosch.

APD1005

SiriusXM® services

require a subscription

after trial period and

are sold separately or

as a package. The

satellite service is

available only in the

48 contiguous USA

and DC. SiriusXM®

satellite service is

also available in

Canada; see

www.siriusxm.ca.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form, or by any

means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,

recording or otherwise, without the prior written

permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are

our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN

dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to

provide NISSAN directly with comments or

questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free

number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the

following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to the

top of the instrument panel on the driver’s

side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..............0-2

Exterior front ......................................0-3

Exterior rear.......................................0-4

Passenger compartment ...........................0-5

Instrument panel...................................0-6

Engine compartment check locations . . ..............0-8

Warning and indicator lights .......................0-10

1. Rear seat belts (P. 1-15)

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-45)

3. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-10)

4. Front seat belts with pretensioner(s)

and shoulder height adjuster

(P. 1-15, 1-45)

5. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-45)

6. Occupant classification sensors (weight

sensors) (if so equipped) (P. 1-45)

7. Front seats (P. 1-2)

8. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-45)

9. Rear seats (P. 1-2)

10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P. 1-26)

11. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-26)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2479

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Power windows (P. 2-81)

2. Windshield (P. 8-18)

3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-49)

4. Engine hood (P. 3-21)

5. Front fog lights (if so equipped)

(P. 2-57)

Daytime running lights (if so equipped)

(P. 2-53)

6. Headlight and turn signal switches

(P. 2-53, 2-57)

Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)

Daytime running lights (if so equipped)

(P. 2-53)

7. Tire pressure (P. 8-31)

Flat tire (P. 6-3)

Tire chains (P. 8-31)

8. Mirrors (P. 3-27)

Side view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-16)

9. Door locks (P. 3-5)

NISSAN Intelligent Key® (P. 3-8)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2349

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Antenna (P. 4-83)

2. Cargo lamp (P. 2-58)

3. Rear sliding window (P. 2-81)

4. Bed liner storage bins (if so equipped)

(P. 2-72)

5. Under rail bed lamps (if so equipped)

(P. 2-58)

6. Truck box (P. 3-32)

Tailgate (P. 3-32)

Rearview camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-10, 4-16)

7. Towing (P. 10-31)

8. Rear sonar sensors (if so equipped)

(P. 5-60)

9. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)

10. Fuel-filler cap* (P. 3-22)

Fuel-filler door* (P. 3-22)

Fuel recommendation* (P. 10-2)

11. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)

*: For diesel models, refer to the separate Titan

Diesel Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2416

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Interior lights (P. 2-85)

2. Map lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-85)

Console light (if so equipped) (P. 2-85)

3. Sun visors (P. 3-26)

4. Rearview mirror (P. 3-27)

5. Glove box (P. 2-72)

6. Console box (if so equipped) (P. 2-72)

Cup holders (P. 2-72)

7. Spare tire tools location (P. 6-3)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2480

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Vents (P. 4-32)

2. Turn signal switch (P. 2-57)

Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-49)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(P. 4-82)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

(P. 4-82)

Vehicle information display controls

(P. 2-32)

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-45)

Horn (P. 2-58)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-6)

Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-21)

6. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-40)

7. Shift lever (P. 5-16)

Tow mode switch (P. 2-67)

8. Audio controls (P. 4-46)

9. Center display (P. 4-4)

10. Climate controls (P. 4-33)

11. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-45)

12. Glove box (P. 2-72)

13. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-45)

14. Power outlet (if so equipped) (P. 2-69)

LII2352

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

15. Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-62)

Warning Systems switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-62)

16. Power outlet (P. 2-69)

17. Auxiliary jack (P. 4-46)

USB port (P. 4-46)

18. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

19. Trailer Brake Controller Unit

(if so equipped) (P. 2-68)

20. Climate control seat switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-58)

Heated front seat switches (if so

equipped) (P. 2-60)

21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-63)

Parking sensor switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-67)

22. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-44)

23. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-10)

24. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel

control (P. 3-24)

25. Headlight aiming control

(if so equipped) (P. 2-53)

Power inverter switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-66)

Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-58)

Electronic locking rear differential

(E-Lock) system switch (if so

equipped) (P. 2-65)

Hill descent control system switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-63)

26. Headlight switch (P. 2-53)

Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-57)

Instrument brightness control switches

(P. 2-53)

Trip reset switch (P. 2-6)

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

Cummins 5.0 L engine

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-12)

2. Fuse box (P. 8-20)

3. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-20)

4. Engine coolant reservoir*

5. Fuel filter (Stage 2)*

6. Engine oil filler cap*

7. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)

8. Air cleaner*

9. Battery (P. 8-13)

10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)

11. Radiator cap*

12. Engine oil dipstick*

13. Drive belt location*

14. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-20)

15. Battery (P. 8-13)

*: Refer to the separate Titan Diesel Owner’s

Manual.

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LDI2870

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

VK56VD engine

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-12)

2. Fuse box (P. 8-20)

3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)

4. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)

5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)

6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)

7. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)

8. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-20)

9. Drive belt location (P. 8-15)

10. Radiator cap (P. 8-4)

11. Battery (P. 8-13)

12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LDI3003

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Warning

light

Name Page

4–Wheel Drive

(4WD) warning light

(if so equipped)

2-22

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warn-

ing light

2-23

Automatic Transmis-

sion check warning

light

2-23

Automatic Transmis-

sion oil temperature

warning light

2-23

Automatic Transmis-

sion park warning

light (

model)

2-23

Warning

light

Name Page

Brake warning light 2-24

Charge warning

light

2-24

Diesel Particulate

Filter (DPF) warning

light (if so equipped)

2-25

Door open warning

light (if so equipped)

2-25

Driver seat belt

warning and chime

2-25

Engine oil pressure

warning light

2-25

Low DEF warning

light (if so equipped)

2-25

Warning

light

Name Page

Low fuel warning

light

2-25

Low tire pressure

warning light

2-25

Malfunction warning

light (red) (if so

equipped)

2-27

Master warning light

(if so equipped)

2-27

NISSAN Intelligent

Key® warning light

(if so equipped)

2-27

P position selecting

warning light (if so

equipped)

2-28

Passenger seat belt

warning light

2-28

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Warning

light

Name Page

Supplemental air

bag warning light

2-28

Water in Fuel warn-

ing light (if so

equipped)

2-28

Indicator

light

Name Page

Electronic locking

rear differential (E-

Lock) system ON

indicator light (if so

equipped)

2-29

Engine start opera-

tion indicator (if so

equipped)

2-29

Front fog light indi-

cator light (if so

equipped)

2-29

Indicator

light

Name Page

Front passenger air

bag status light (if

so equipped)

2-29

High beam indicator

light (blue)

2-29

Hill descent control

system ON indicator

light (if so equipped)

2-29

Malfunction Indica-

tor Light (MIL) (yel-

low) (For Gas en-

gines only)

2-30

Security indicator

light

2-30

Side light and head-

light indicator light

(green) (if so

equipped)

2-30

Indicator

light

Name Page

Slip indicator light 2-31

TOW mode ON in-

dicator light

2-31

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

2-31

Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

2-31

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats ............................................1-2

Front manual bench seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ................................1-3

Front manual seat adjustment

(if so equipped for passenger’s seat) .............1-4

Front power seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ................................1-5

Front armrests (if so equipped)...................1-6

Rear armrests ..................................1-7

Flexible seating.................................1-7

Head restraints/Headrests.........................1-10

Adjustable head restraint/headrest

components ..................................1-11

Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

components ..................................1-11

Remove ......................................1-12

Removable (without Dual head restraint/

headrest DVD system only) .....................1-12

Install ........................................1-13

Adjust........................................1-13

Seat belts .......................................1-15

Precautions on seat belt usage..................1-15

Seat belt warning light .........................1-18

Pregnant women ..............................1-18

Injured persons................................1-18

Three-point type seat belt with retractor..........1-18

Seat belt extenders ............................1-23

Seat belt maintenance .........................1-23

Child safety ......................................1-23

Infants........................................1-24

Small children.................................1-24

Larger children ................................1-24

Child restraints ...................................1-26

Precautions on child restraints ..................1-26

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system ..............................1-28

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

LATCH.......................................1-30

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

the seat belts .................................1-32

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH..................................1-35

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts — rear bench seat...........1-38

Booster seats .................................1-42

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..............1-45

Precautions on SRS (with NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System) (if so equipped) ......1-45

Precautions on SRS (if so equipped) ............1-60

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and roof-mounted

curtain side-impact and rollover

supplemental air bag systems...................1-69

Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats) .......1-71

Supplemental air bag warning labels.............1-72

Supplemental air bag warning light ..............1-73

WARNING

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back and

upright in the seat with both feet on the

floor and adjust the seat properly. For

additional information, refer to “Pre-

cautions on seat belt usage” in this

section.

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave

children, people who require the assis-

tance of others or pets unattended in

your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-

ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

●Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation. The seat may move

suddenly and could cause loss of con-

trol of the vehicle.

●The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort. Seat

belts are most effective when the pas-

senger sits well back and straight up in

the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

being injured is increased.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL BENCH SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For

additional information about adjusting the seats,

refer to the steps outlined in this section.

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the

seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean

back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever

up and lean your body forward. Release the lever

to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Pre-

cautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,

the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants

to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in the P (Park) position.

LRS2559 LRS2560

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Front center bench seat adjustment

The front center bench seat folds down by pulling

on the strap. It does not have adjustments in

between the upright and the folded down posi-

tions. It is either in seating position or armrest

position.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped for

passenger’s seat)

Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For

additional information about adjusting the seats,

refer to the steps outlined in this section.

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the

seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean

back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever

up and lean your body forward. Release the lever

to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Pre-

cautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,

the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants

to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in the P (Park) position.

LRS2787 LRS2160 LRS2161

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

(if so equipped)

Operating tips

●The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motor

stops during operation, wait 30 seconds

then reactivate the switch.

●Do not operate the power seat switch for a

long period of time when the engine is off.

This will discharge the battery.

For additional information, refer to “Automatic

drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide

the seat forward or backward to the desired

position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch backward until the de-

sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback

forward again, move the switch forward and

move your body forward. The seatback will move

forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Pre-

cautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,

the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants

to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in P (Park).

LRS2743

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or

down to adjust the angle and height of the seat

cushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides adjustable

lower back support to the driver. Push the switch

forward or backward to adjust the seatback lum-

bar area.

FRONT ARMRESTS (if so equipped)

To use the center armrest on the front bench seat,

pull on the strap in between the front passenger

and center seats and fold it down to the resting

position.

LRS2744 LRS2745 LRS0425

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REAR ARMRESTS

To use the center armrest on the bench seats,

pull on the tab in the center of the seat and fold it

down to the resting position.

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seats when they are

in the fold-down position. In a collision,

people riding in these areas without

proper restraints are more likely to be

seriously injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone

in your vehicle is in a seat and using a

seat belt properly.

●Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

●Do not fold down the rear seats when

occupants are in the rear seat area or

any luggage is on the rear seats.

– Make sure that the seat path is clear

before moving the seat.

– Be careful not to allow hands or feet

to get caught or pinched in the seat.

●Head restraints/headrests should be

adjusted properly as they may provide

significant protection against injury in

an accident. Always replace and adjust

them properly if they have been re-

moved for any reason.

●If the head restraints/headrests are re-

moved for any reason, they should be

securely stored to prevent them from

causing injury to passengers or damage

to the vehicle in case of sudden braking

or an accident.

●When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched posi-

tion. If they are not completely secured,

passengers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

●Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seatbacks.

In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal injury.

LRS2748

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

Folding the rear bench seat up

To fold the rear bench seat up for storage capac-

ity behind the front seats or to remove the jacking

tools from the storage area:

1. Lift the front of the seat cushion up.

2. Fold the bottom of the seat cushion toward

the back of the vehicle until it locks in place.

3. Repeat this process to raise and secure the

seat cushion on the other side of the vehicle

for maximum storage capacity.

To return the rear bench seat to a seating posi-

tion, pull the latch on the bottom of the seat

cushions to release the seat from the locked

position. Make sure to properly push the

seat cushion down into place.

LRS2766 LRS2767 LRS2768

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●When the vehicle is being used to carry

cargo, properly secure all cargo to help

prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do

not place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause personal

injury.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone

in your vehicle is in a seat and using a

seat belt properly. Never ride in the rear

seat unless the seat bottom cushions

are in place.

●When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched posi-

tion. If they are not completely secured,

passengers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

Folding the rear bench seat down

The rear bench seat can be tilted forward to

access the child restraint anchor point locations.

To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strap up 䊊

and tilt the seatback. The child restraint anchor

points 䊊

2can be accessed behind the rear

bench seatback.

WARNING

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seat when it is in the

fold-down position. Use of these areas by

passengers without proper restraints

could result in serious injury or death in an

accident or sudden stop.

WRS0920

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement

the other vehicle safety systems. They may

provide additional protection against in-

jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust-

able head restraints/headrests must be

adjusted properly, as specified in this sec-

tion. Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat. Do not attach anything

to the head restraint/headrest stalks or

remove the head restraint/headrest. Do

not use the seat if the head

restraint/headrest has been removed. If

the head restraint/headrest was removed,

reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position. Failure to fol-

low these instructions can reduce the ef-

fectiveness of the head

restraints/headrests. This may increase

the risk of serious injury or death in a

collision.

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with head restraints/headrests.

䉱Indicates the seating position is equipped with

a head restraint.

䡲Indicates the seating position is equipped with

a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped

with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).

●Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be integrated,

adjustable or non-adjustable.

●Adjustable head restraints/headrests have

multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock

them in a desired adjustment position.

●The non-adjustable head restraints/

headrests have a single locking notch to

secure them to the seat frame.

●Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the head

restraint/headrest so the center of your

ear is approximately level with the center

of the head restraint/headrest.

Front bucket seat

LRS2020

Front bench seat

LRS2633

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– If your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

●If the head restraint/headrest has been re-

moved, ensure that it is reinstalled and

locked in place before riding in that desig-

nated seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD

RESTRAINT/HEADREST

COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

LRS2300 LRS2299

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the head

restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the

highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from

the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in

a secure place so it is not loose in the

vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant uses

the seating position.

REMOVABLE (without Dual head

restraint/headrest DVD system only)

CAUTION

Do not remove head restraint/headrest

from vehicles equipped with Dual head

restraint/headrest DVD system. Removal

may damage the system wiring.

LRS2302 LRS2302

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with

the holes in the seat. Make sure that the

head restraint/headrest is facing the correct

direction. The stalk with the notch (notches)

䊊

1must be installed in the hole with the lock

knob 䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest

before an occupant uses the seating posi-

tion.

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center

is level with the center of your ears. If your ear

position is still higher than the recommended

alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at

the highest position.

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2305 LRS2306

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-

justed and you are sitting upright and well back in

your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances

of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the

severity of injury may be greatly reduced.

NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your

passengers to buckle up every time you drive,

even if your seating position includes a supple-

mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories specify that seat belts be worn at

all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times. Children should be in the rear

seats and in an appropriate restraint.

WARNING

●The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. Serious injury or death can occur if

the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck. The

belt should be away from your face and

neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

●Position the lap belt as low and snug as

possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE

WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could

increase the risk of internal injuries in

an accident.

●Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely

fastened to the proper buckle.

●Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

●Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

●Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

●If the seat belt warning light glows con-

tinuously while the ignition is turned

ON with all doors closed and all seat

belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-

function in the system. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●No changes should be made to the seat

belt system. For example, do not modify

the seat belt, add material, or install

devices that may change the seat belt

routing or tension. Doing so may affect

the operation of the seat belt system.

Modifying or tampering with the seat

belt system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

●Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have ac-

tivated, they cannot be reused and must

be replaced together with the retractor.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

●All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware, should

be inspected after any collision. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. NISSAN recom-

mends that all seat belt assemblies in

use during a collision be replaced un-

less the collision was minor and the

belts show no damage and continue to

operate properly. Seat belt assemblies

not in use during a collision should also

be inspected and replaced if either

damage or improper operation is noted.

●All child restraints and attaching hard-

ware should be inspected after any col-

lision. Always follow the restraint

manufacturer’s inspection instructions

and replacement recommendations.

The child restraints should be replaced

if they are damaged.

SSS0014

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

Both the driver’s and passenger’s front seats are

equipped with a seat belt warning light. The

warning light, located on the instrument panel,

will show the status of the driver and passenger

seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning light

will illuminate for a period of time. If the

seat is occupied and seat belt is latched

within that period of time, the light will go

out.

For additional information, refer to “Warning

lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and

always position the lap belt as low as possible

around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder

belt over your shoulder and across your chest.

Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-

dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific

recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use

seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific

recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times. Children should be in the rear

seats and in an appropriate restraint.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back and

upright in the seat with both feet on the

floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

LRS0786

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat

belt becomes wrapped around a child’s

neck with the ALR mode activated, the

child can be seriously injured or killed if

the seat belt retracts and becomes

tight. This can occur even if the vehicle

is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to

release the child. If the seat belt cannot

be unbuckled or is already unbuckled,

release the child by cutting the seat belt

with a suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2559

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional information,

refer to “Seats” in this section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle 䊊

Auntil

you hear and feel the latch engage.

●The retractor is designed to lock dur-

ing a sudden stop or on impact. A

slow pulling motion permits the seat

belt to move and allows you some

freedom of movement in the seat.

●If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then

smoothly pull the belt out of the re-

tractor.

Power front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2743 LRS2674

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips 䊊

Bas shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack 䊊

C. Be sure

the shoulder belt is routed over your shoul-

der and across your chest.

The front passenger seat, front center seat (if so

equipped), and the rear seating positions’ three-

point seat belts have two modes of operation:

●Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

●Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and

retract to allow the driver and passengers some

freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks

the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly

or during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the

seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat belt

tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode

after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints” in this sec-

tion.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During normal

seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode

should not be activated. If it is activated, it

may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-

sion.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain

that the seatbacks are completely secured

in the latched position. If they are not

completely secured, passengers may be

injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the

buckle 䊊

1. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt

movement by two separate methods:

●When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor

●When the vehicle slows down rapidly

LRS2675 WRS0139

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,

check the operation as follows:

●Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and re-

strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check,

get the system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service, or to

learn more about seat belt operation.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (front

seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-

justed to the position best for you. For additional

information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt

usage” in this section. To adjust, pull out the

adjustment button 䊊

1and move the shoulder belt

anchor to the desired position 䊊

2, so the belt

passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt

should be away from your face and neck, but not

falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment

button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into posi-

tion.

WARNING

●After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the shoul-

der belt anchor up and down to make

sure it is securely fixed in position.

●The shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position best for you.

Failure to do so may reduce the effec-

tiveness of the entire restraint system

and increase the chance or severity of

injury in an accident.

LRS0242

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with

the installed seat belts is available for purchase.

The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)

of length and may be used for either the driver or

front passenger seating position. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assis-

tance with purchasing an extender if an extender

is required.

WARNING

●Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which made the

original equipment seat belts, should

be used with NISSAN seat belts.

●Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use could

result in serious personal injury in the

event of an accident.

●Never use seat belt extenders to install

child restraints. If the child restraint is

not secured properly, the child could be

seriously injured or killed in a collision

or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

●To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.

Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat

belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the

seat belts to retract until they are completely

dry.

●If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder

belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

●Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-

sembly should be replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the seat

belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt

becomes wrapped around a child’s neck

with the ALR mode activated, the child can

be seriously injured or killed if the seat

belt retracts and becomes tight. This can

occur even if the vehicle is parked. Un-

buckle the seat belt to release the child. If

the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is

already unbuckled, release the child by

cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool

(such as a knife or scissors) to release the

seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available from

many other sources, including doctors, teachers,

government traffic safety offices, and community

organizations. Every child is different, so be sure

to learn the best way to transport your child.

CHILD SAFETY

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

●Rear-facing child restraints

●Forward-facing child restraints

●Booster seats

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less

than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing

child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints

are available for children who outgrow rear-

facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.

Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle

lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer

use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-

tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit

them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The lap

belt may not fit over their small hip bones.

In an accident, an improperly fitting seat

belt could cause serious or fatal injury.

Always use appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territo-

ries require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by

using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle

seat belt. For additional information, refer to

“Child restraints” in this section.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear seat.

Studies show that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than in

the front seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-

tem (air bag system) for the front passen-

ger. For additional information, refer to

“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in

this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed

in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-

mends that infants be placed in child restraints

that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child restraint

that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at

least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing

child restraint as long as possible up to the height

or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who

outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-

facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old

should be secured in a forward-facing child re-

straint with a harness. Refer to the manufactur-

er’s instructions for minimum and maximum

weight and height recommendations. NISSAN

recommends that small children be placed in

child restraints that comply with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Ve-

hicle Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and always

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-

lation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing child

restraint with a harness until they reach the maxi-

mum height or weight limit allowed by the child

restraint manufacturer.

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit

of the harness-equipped forward-facing child re-

straint, NISSAN recommends that the child be

placed in a commercially available booster seat to

obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit

properly, the booster seat should raise the child

so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the chest and the top, middle portion of

the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross

the neck or face and should not fall off the shoul-

der. The lap belt should lie snugly across the

lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A

booster seat can only be used in seating posi-

tions that have a three-point type seat belt. The

booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have

a label certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the child can

pass the seat belt fit test below:

●Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?

●Is the child able to sit without slouching?

●Do the child’s knees bend easily over the

front edge of the seat with feet flat on the

floor?

●Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap

belt low and snug across the hips and shoul-

der belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?

●Is the child able to use the properly adjusted

head restraint/headrest?

●Will the child be able to stay in position for

the entire ride?

If you answered no to any of these questions, the

child should remain in a booster seat using a

three-point type seat belt.

LRS2690

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow dif-

ferent guidelines. Check local and state

regulations to confirm your child is using

the correct restraint system before travel-

ing.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat

and do not allow a child in the cargo area.

The child could be seriously injured or

killed in a sudden stop or collision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

●Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– The child restraint must be used and

installed properly. Always follow all

of the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

– Infants and children should never be

held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-

gest adult cannot resist the forces of

a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both a

child and another passenger.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– NISSAN recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Studies show that children are

safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat. If you

must install a forward-facing child

restraint in the front seat, refer to

“Forward-facing child restraint in-

stallation using the seat belts” in this

section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System (if so equipped), never

install a rear-facing child restraint in

the front seat. An inflating air bag

could seriously injure or kill a child. A

rear-facing child restraint must only

be used in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraint

that will fit the child and vehicle.

Some child restraints may not fit

properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchor-

age, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

– Never use the anchor points for adult

seat belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the front

passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should always

be placed in an appropriate child re-

straint while in the vehicle.

●When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, loose objects can injure occupants

or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating sur-

face and buckles before placing a child in

the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child

restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-

tem. Some child restraints include rigid or

webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-

nected to these anchors. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Teth-

ers for CHildren) system” in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for

infants and children of various sizes. When se-

lecting any child restraint, keep the following

points in mind:

●Choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

●If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the child restraint is compatible with

your child. Choose a child restraint that is

designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

●If the combined weight of the child and child

restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), you

may use either the LATCH anchors or the

seat belt to install the child restraint (not both

at the same time).

●If the combined weight of the child and child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint.

●Be sure to follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions for installation.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated. Canadian law requires the

top tether strap on forward-facing child re-

straints be secured to the designated an-

chor point on the vehicle.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with LATCH system compat-

ible child restraints. This system may also be

referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible

system. With this system, you do not have to use

a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint

unless the combined weight of the child and child

restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and child restraint is

greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s

seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to install

child restraints in the rear outboard seating posi-

tions only. Do not attempt to install a child re-

straint in the center position using the LATCH

anchors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use and installation of

child restraints could result in serious in-

jury or death of a child or other passen-

gers in a sudden stop or collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locations

shown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in the

center rear seating position using the

LATCH lower anchors. The child re-

straint will not be secured properly.

LATCH system lower anchor locations

LRS0429

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-

ing your fingers into the lower anchor

area. Feel to make sure there are no

obstructions over the anchors such

as seat belt webbing or seat cushion

material. The child restraint will not

be secured properly if the lower an-

chors are obstructed.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchor-

age, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear

of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is

attached to the seatback to help you locate the

LATCH lower anchors.

LATCH lower anchor location

LRS0748

LATCH lower anchor point locations

LRS2772

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

Installing child restraint LATCH lower

anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two

rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to two anchors located at certain

seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to

secure the child restraint. Check your child re-

straint for a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the in-

structions provided by the child restraint manu-

facturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this manual and

those supplied with the child restraint.

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located under the rear window

behind the rear bench seat.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0662 LRS0393

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint in the rear bench seats using the LATCH

system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-

erly attached to the lower anchors.

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

WRS0801

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0802

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

3. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the LATCH attachment path. The child re-

straint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it

forward and check to see if the LATCH at-

tachment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the restraint

in another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint or try

installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if

applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2

through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used

when installing a child restraint. Failure to

use the ALR mode will result in the child

restraint not being properly secured. The

restraint could tip over or be loose and

cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or

collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0674

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear

seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the front

seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

Rear-facing – step 1

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 2

WRS0761

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt

is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while

pulling up on the seat belt.

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS2395

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS2396

Rear-facing – step 5

WRS0762

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the seat belt path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and check

to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.

If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1

through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint

mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint in the rear bench seats using the

LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

Rear-facing – step 6

LRS2397

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-

erly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. For additional information, refer to “In-

stalling top tether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that require the

use of a top tether strap in seating positions

that do not have a top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child

restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure

to reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information about head

restraint/headrest adjustment, refer to

“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper child restraint fit,

try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

LRS2398

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

LRS2399

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the LATCH attachment path. The child re-

straint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it

forward and check to see if the LATCH at-

tachment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the restraint

in another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint. Not all

child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3

through 6.

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0697

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

䊊

AAnchor points

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchors (rear bench outboarding seating

positions only).

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in

this section for head restraint/headrest ad-

justment, removal and installation informa-

tion.

2. Position the top tether strap over the seat-

back.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point on the back side of the seatback be-

hind the child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS — REAR BENCH

SEAT

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used

when installing a child restraint. Failure to

use the ALR mode will result in the child

restraint not being properly secured. The

restraint could tip over or be loose and

cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or

collision.

Rear bench seat

LRS2769

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the

rear seats:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position. Child

restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and therefore

must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child

restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure

to reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information about head

restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and

installation, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper child restraint fit,

try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point (rear seat installation only). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Installing top

tether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that require the

use of a top tether strap in seating positions

that do not have a top tether anchor.

Forward-facing – step 3

WRS0680

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is

fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while pulling up on the seat

belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0667

Forward-facing – step 5

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0681

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the seat belt path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and check

to see if the seat belt holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten

the seat belt as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again. You

may need to try a different child restraint. Not

all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3

through 8.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode) is canceled.

䊊

AAnchor points

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing the child restraint with seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed. For additional informa-

tion about head restraint/headrest adjust-

Forward-facing – step 8

WRS0698 LRS2769

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

ment, removal and installation, refer to

“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap over the seat-

back.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point on the back side of the seatback be-

hind the child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Position the top tether strap over the seat-

back.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point on the back side of the seatback be-

hind the child restraint.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a booster

seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions out-

lined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used

properly, the risk of a child being injured

or killed in a sudden stop or collision

greatly increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s face

and neck and the lap portion of the

belt does not cross the stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the child’s

arm.

– A booster seat must only be installed

in a seating position that has a

lap/shoulder belt.

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

A. Low back booster seat

B. High back booster seat

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

●Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

●Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle

seatback must be at or above the center of

the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than

the center of the child’s ears, a high back

booster seat should be used.

●If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place the child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the booster seat is compatible with the

child. Always follow all recommended pro-

cedures.

LRS2479 LRS0453 LRS0464

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster

seat installation in the rear seats or the front

passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use the

lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Lock-

ing Retractor (ALR) mode when using a

booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety”, “Child re-

straints” and “Booster seats” sections of this

manual before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the

rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rear-

most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front-facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct

booster seat fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a

secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint/headrest when the

booster seat is removed. For additional

information about head restraint/headrest

adjustment, removal and installation, refer to

⬙Head restraints/headrests⬙in this section.

WRS0699

Front passenger position

LRS0454

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper booster seat fit,

try another seating position or a different

booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the top, middle portion of the child’s

shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt

shown in “Three-point type seat belt with

retractor” in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light (if so equipped) may or

may not illuminate, depending on the size of

the child and the type of booster seat being

used. For additional information, refer to

“Front passenger air bag and status light” in

this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS (with

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System) (if

so equipped)

This SRS section contains important information

concerning the following systems:

●Driver and front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System)

●Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag

●Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bag

●Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag system

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help

cushion the impact force to the head and chest of

the driver and right front passenger in certain

frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the chest area of the driver and right front pas-

senger in certain side impact collisions. The side

air bag is designed to inflate on the side where

the vehicle is impacted.

WRS0475

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS)

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the head of occupants in front and rear outboard

seating positions in certain side impact or rollover

collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags

are designed to inflate on the side where the

vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags

are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a

short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement the crash

protection provided by the seat belts and is not a

substitute for them. Seat belts should always be

correctly worn and the occupant seated a suit-

able distance away from the steering wheel, in-

strument panel and door finishers. For additional

information about instructions and precautions

on seat belt usage, refer to “Seat belts” in this

section.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON or

START position.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

WARNING

●The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact, rear

impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-

tal collision. Always wear your seat

belts to help reduce the risk or severity

of injury in various kinds of accidents.

●The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit or if the front passenger seat

is unoccupied. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

●

The seat belts and the front air bags are

most effective when you are sitting well

back and upright in the seat. The front air

bags inflate with great force. Even with

the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if

you are unrestrained, leaning forward,

sitting sideways or out of position in any

way, you are at greater risk of injury or

death in a crash. You may also receive

serious or fatal injuries from the front air

bag if you are up against it when it in-

flates. Always sit back against the seat-

back and as far away as practical from

the steering wheel or instrument panel.

Always properly use the seat belts.

WRS0031

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●

The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that

detect if the seat belts are fastened. The

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System moni-

tors the severity of a collision and inflates

the air bags as needed. Failure to prop-

erly wear seat belts can increase the risk

or severity of injury in an accident.

●The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) that turns the front pas-

senger air bag OFF under some condi-

tions. This sensor is only used in this

seat. Failure to be properly seated and

wearing the seat belt can increase the

risk or severity of injury in an accident.

For additional information, refer to

“Front passenger air bag and status

light” in this section.

●Keep hands on the outside of the steer-

ing wheel. Placing them inside the

steering wheel rim could increase the

risk that they are injured when the front

air bag inflates.

●The air bag system monitors the sever-

ity of a collision and then inflates the air

bags as needed. Failure to properly

wear seat belts can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

ARS1133

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

WARNING

●Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them in

your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

WARNING

●Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing

child restraint in the front seat. An in-

flating air bag could seriously injure or

kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint

must only be used in the rear seat.

ARS1044 ARS1045 WRS0256

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain

side-impact and rollover supplemental air

bags:

●The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event of

a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower

severity side collision. Always wear

your seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

Do not lean against doors or windows.

WRS0431

Do not lean against doors or windows.

LRS0396

Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0162

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective when

you are sitting well back and upright in

the seat. The side air bag and curtain air

bag inflate with great force. Do not al-

low anyone to place their hand, leg or

face near the side air bag on the side of

the seatback of the front seat or near

the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone

sitting in the front seats or rear out-

board seats to extend their hand out of

the window or lean against the door.

Some examples of dangerous riding

positions are shown in the previous

illustrations. WARNING

●When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front seat.

If the side air bag inflates, you may be

seriously injured. Be especially careful

with children, who should always be

properly restrained. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

●Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with side

air bag inflation.

LRS0421 SSS0159

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bag inflators

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bags

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

4. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules

5. Crash zone sensor

6. Occupant classification sensor (weight sen-

sor)

7. Occupant classification system control unit

8. Seat belt buckle switches

9. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

10. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag modules

11. Satellite sensors

LRS2806

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passen-

ger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System,

please observe the following items.

●Do not allow a passenger in the rear

bench seats to push or pull on the seat-

back pocket.

●Do not place heavy loads heavier than

1 kg (2.2 lb) on the seatback, head re-

straint or in the seatback pocket.

●Do not store luggage behind the seat

that can press into the seatback.

●Do not position the front passenger

seat so it contacts the rear bench seats.

If the front seat does contact the rear

bench seats, the air bag system may

determine a sensor malfunction has oc-

curred and the front passenger air bag

status light may illuminate and the

supplemental air bag warning light may

flash.

●If a forward-facing child restraint is in-

stalled in the front passenger seat, do

not position the front passenger seat so

the child restraint contacts the instru-

ment panel. If the child restraint does

contact the instrument panel, the sys-

tem may determine the seat as occu-

pied and the passenger air bag may

deploy in a collision. Also the front pas-

senger air bag status light may not illu-

minate. For additional information

about installing and using child re-

straints, refer to “Child restraints” in

this section.

●Confirm the operating condition with

the front passenger air bag status light.

●If you notice that the front passenger air

bag status light is not operating as de-

scribed in this section, it is recom-

mended that you take your vehicle to a

NISSAN dealer to check the occupant

classification system.

●Until you have confirmed with your

dealer that your passenger seat occu-

pant classification system is working

properly, position the occupants in the

rear seating positions.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front

passenger seats. All of the information, cau-

tions and warnings in this manual still ap-

ply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is

located in the center of the steering wheel. The

front passenger supplemental front-impact air

bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove

box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in

higher severity frontal collisions, although they

may inflate if the forces in another type of collision

are similar to those of a higher severity frontal

impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal

collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not

always an indication of proper front air bag sys-

tem operation.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors

information from the crash zone sensor and the

Air bag Control Unit (ACU). Inflator operation is

based on the severity of a collision and seat belt

usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the

occupant classification sensor is also monitored.

Based upon the information from the sensor, only

one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending

on the crash severity. Additionally, the front pas-

senger air bag may be automatically turned off

under some conditions, depending on the weight

detected on the front passenger seat and how

the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

is OFF, the front passenger air bag status light

will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the

light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be

off). For additional information, refer to “Front

passenger air bag and status light”in this section.

One front air bag inflating does not indicate im-

proper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, it is recommended that you contact

NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If you are consid-

ering modification of your vehicle due to a disabil-

ity, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact infor-

mation is contained in the front of this Owner’s

Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a

fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the face and

chest of the front occupants. They can help save

lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an

inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions

or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide

restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the driver and

front passenger seated upright as far as practical

away from the steering wheel or instrument

panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to

help protect the front occupants. Because of this,

the force of the front air bag inflating can increase

the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or

is against, the front air bag module during infla-

tion.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF under some condi-

tions. Read this section carefully to learn

how it operates. Proper use of the seat,

seat belt and child restraints is necessary

for most effective protection. Failure to

follow all instructions in this manual con-

cerning the use of seats, seat belts and

child restraints can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

WRS0475

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with an

occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)

that turns the front passenger air bag on or off

depending on the weight applied to the front

passenger seat. The status of the front passen-

ger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front

passenger air bag status light which is

located on the instrument panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ⬙ON⬙

position, the front passenger air bag status light

on the instrument panel illuminates for about

7 seconds and then turns off or remains illumi-

nated depending on the front passenger seat

occupied status. The light operates as follows:

●Unoccupied front passenger’s seat:

The light is OFF and the front passen-

ger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a

crash.

●Front passenger seat occupied by a small

adult, child or child restraint as outlined in

this section: The light illuminates to

indicate that the front passenger air bag is

OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

●Occupied front passenger seat and the pas-

senger meets the conditions as outlined in

this section: The light is OFF to indi-

cate that the front passenger air bag is op-

erational.

In addition to the above, certain objects placed

on the front passenger seat may also cause the

light to operate as described above depending

on their weight.

For additional information related to the normal

operation and troubleshooting of this occupant

classification sensor system, please refer to

“Normal operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this

section.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-

matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated

under some conditions as described below in

accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front

passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a

crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your

vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-

matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to

meet the requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle

is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an

occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For

example, if a child is in the front passenger seat,

the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is de-

signed to turn the front passenger air bag OFF in

accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regulations is

on the seat, its weight and the child’s weight can

be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as out-

lined in this manual should not cause the front

passenger air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,

however if the occupant takes his/her weight off

the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting up-

right, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by

otherwise being out of position), this could cause

the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be

sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt

properly for the most effective protection by the

seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-

dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.

NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child

restraints and booster seats be properly installed

in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant

classification sensor is designed to operate as

described above to turn the front passenger air

bag OFF for specified child restraints as required

by the regulations. Failing to properly secure

child restraints and to use the ALR mode may

allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or

sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being

OFF. For additional information about proper use

and installation, refer to “Child restraints” in this

section.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the

front passenger air bag is designed not to inflate

in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the

seat could result in air bag inflation, because of

the object’s weight detected by the occupant

classification sensor. Other conditions could also

result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is

standing on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants

are seated and restrained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status light, you

can monitor when the front passenger air bag is

automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.

The light will not illuminate when the front pas-

senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front

passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indi-

cating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the

person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat

properly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,

the front passenger air bag status light may or

may not be illuminated, depending on the size of

the child and the type of child restraint being

used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated

(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a

crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat

belt is not being used properly. Make sure that

the child restraint is installed properly, the seat

belt is used properly and the occupant is posi-

tioned properly. If the air bag status light is still not

illuminated, reposition the occupant or child re-

straint in a rear seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light will not

illuminate even though you believe that the child

restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are

properly positioned, the system may be sensing

an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is

OFF). A NISSAN dealer can check that the sys-

tem is OFF by using a special tool. However, until

you have confirmed with a dealer that your air bag

is working properly, reposition the occupant or

child restraint in a rear seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front

passenger air bag status light will take a few

seconds to register a change in the front passen-

ger seat status. For example, if a large adult who

is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the

vehicle, the front passenger air bag status light

will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and

then to OFF. This is normal system operation and

does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air

bag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light , located in the meter and gauges area

of the instrument panel, will blink. Have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification sensor

system to classify the front passenger based on

weight, please follow the precautions and steps

outlined below:

Precautions

●Make sure that there are no objects weigh-

ing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hanging on the seat or

placed in the seatback pocket.

●Make sure that a child restraint or other

object is not pressing against the rear of the

seatback.

●Make sure that a rear passenger is not push-

ing or pulling on the back of the front pas-

senger seat.

●Make sure that the front passenger seat or

seatback is not forced back against an ob-

ject on the seat or floor behind it.

●Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger seat.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”

section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on the

seat cushion with your feet comfortably ex-

tended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the “Seat

belts” section of this manual.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds al-

lowing the system to classify the front pas-

senger before the vehicle is put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by checking the

front passenger air bag status light.

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification sen-

sor system locks the classification during

driving so it is important that you confirm

that the front passenger is properly classi-

fied prior to driving. Also, the occupant

classification sensor system may recalcu-

late the weight of the occupant when the

vehicle comes to a stop (i.e. stop light, stop

sign, etc.), so front passenger seat occu-

pants should continue to remain seated as

outlined above.

Troubleshooting

If you think the front passenger air bag status light

is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with no front passenger and

no objects on the front passenger seat:

This may be due to the following conditions that

may be interfering with the weight sensors:

●An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hang-

ing on the seat or placed in the seatback

pocket.

●A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

●A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger seat.

●Forcing the front seat or seatback against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

●An object placed under the front passenger

seat.

●An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console or between the seat

cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of

the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and

wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the vehicle should

be checked as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

2. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the

front passenger seat:

●Occupant is a small adult — the air bag light

is functioning as intended. The front passen-

ger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then

this may be due to the following conditions that

may be interfering with the weight sensors:

●Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on the

seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably

extended to the floor.

●A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

●A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger seat.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

●Forcing the front seat or seatback against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

●An object placed under the front passenger

seat.

●An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console or between the seat

cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of

the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and

wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person should

be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat

and the vehicle should be checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

3. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or

child restraint occupying the front passen-

ger seat.

This may be due to the following conditions

that may be interfering with the weight sen-

sors:

●Small adult or child is not sitting upright,

leaning against the seatback, and centered

on the seat cushion with his/her feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

●The child restraint is not properly installed,

as outlined in the “Child restraints”section of

this manual.

●An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hang-

ing on the seat or placed in the seatback

pocket.

●A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

●A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger seat.

●Forcing the front seat or seatback against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

●An object placed under the front passenger

seat.

●An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of

the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and

wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult,

child or child restraint should be repositioned in

the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked

as soon as possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag

precautions

WARNING

●Do not place any objects on the steering

wheel pad or on the instrument panel.

Also, do not place any objects between

any occupant and the steering wheel or

instrument panel. Such objects may be-

come dangerous projectiles and cause

injury if the front air bags inflate.

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will be

hot. Do not touch them; you may se-

verely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This is

to prevent accidental inflation of the

supplemental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or front end structure.

This could affect proper operation of

the front air bag system.

●Tampering with the front air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

Tampering includes changes to the

steering wheel and the instrument

panel assembly by placing material

over the steering wheel pad and above

the instrument panel or by installing

additional trim material around the air

bag system.

●Removing or modifying the front pas-

senger seat may affect the function of

the air bag system and result in serious

personal injury.

●Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing mate-

rial on the seat cushion or by installing

additional trim material, such as seat

covers, on the seat that are not specifi-

cally designed to assure proper air bag

operation. Additionally, do not stow any

objects under the front passenger seat

or the seat cushion and seatback. Such

objects may interfere with the proper

operation of the occupant classification

sensor (weight sensor).

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect the

front air bag system. Tampering with

the seat belt system may result in seri-

ous personal injury.

●It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the front air bag. It is also recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for installation of electrical equipment.

The Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be

modified or disconnected. Unauthor-

ized electrical test equipment and prob-

ing devices should not be used on the

air bag system.

●A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified repair

facility. A cracked windshield could af-

fect the function of the supplemental air

bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the front air bag system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS (if so

equipped)

This SRS section contains important information

concerning the following systems:

●Driver and front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag

●Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag

●Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bag

●Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the head and chest of the driver and right front

passenger in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the chest area of the driver and right front pas-

senger in certain side impact collisions. The side

air bag is designed to inflate on the side where

the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the head of occupants in front and rear outboard

seating positions in certain side impact or rollover

collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags

are designed to inflate on the side where the

vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags

are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a

short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement the crash

protection provided by the seat belts and is not a

substitute for them. Seat belts should always be

correctly worn and the occupant seated a suit-

able distance away from the steering wheel, in-

strument panel and door finishers. For additional

information about instructions and precautions

on seat belt usage, refer to “Seat belts” in this

section.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON or

START position.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact, rear

impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-

tal collision. Always wear your seat

belts to help reduce the risk or severity

of injury in various kinds of accidents.

●The seat belts and the front air bags are

most effective when you are sitting well

back and upright in the seat. The front

air bags inflate with great force. If you

are unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-

ting sideways or out of position in any

way, you are at greater risk of injury or

death in a crash. You may also receive

serious or fatal injuries from the front

air bag if you are up against it when it

inflates. Always sit back against the

seatback and as far away as practical

from the steering wheel or instrument

panel. Always properly use the seat

belts.

●The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that

detect if the seat belts are fastened. The

air bag system monitors the severity of

a collision and inflates the air bags as

needed. Failure to properly wear seat

belts can increase the risk or severity of

injury in an accident.

●Keep hands on the outside of the steer-

ing wheel. Placing them inside the

steering wheel rim could increase the

risk that they are injured when the front

air bag inflates.

●The air bag system monitors the sever-

ity of a collision and then inflates the air

bags as needed. Failure to properly

wear seat belts can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

WRS0031

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

WARNING

●Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them in

your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

WARNING

●Even with the air bag system, never in-

stall a rear-facing child restraint in the

front seat. An inflating air bag could

seriously injure or kill a child. A rear-

facing child restraint must only be used

in the rear seat.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain

side-impact and rollover supplemental air

bags:

●The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event of

a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower

severity side collision. Always wear

your seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

ARS1045 WRS0256

Do not lean against doors or windows.

WRS0431

1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective when

you are sitting well back and upright in

the seat. The side air bag and curtain air

bag inflate with great force. Do not al-

low anyone to place their hand, leg or

face near the side air bag on the side of

the seatback of the front seat or near

the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone

sitting in the front seats or rear out-

board seats to extend their hand out of

the window or lean against the door.

Some examples of dangerous riding

positions are shown in the previous

illustrations.

Do not lean against doors or windows.

LRS0396

Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0162

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

WARNING

●When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front seat.

If the side air bag inflates, you may be

seriously injured. Be especially careful

with children, who should always be

properly restrained. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

●Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with side

air bag inflation.

LRS0421 SSS0159

1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Supplemental air bag system

1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bags inflators

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bags

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

4. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules

5. Crash zone sensor

6. Seat belt buckle switches

7. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

8. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag modules

9. Satellite sensors

This vehicle is equipped with supplemental front

air bag system for the driver and right front pas-

senger seats. This system is designed to meet

certification requirements under U.S. regulations.

It is also permitted in Canada. However, all of

the information, cautions and warnings in

this manual still apply and must be fol-

lowed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is

located in the center of the steering wheel. The

front passenger supplemental front-impact air

bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove

LRS2771

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

box. The supplemental front air bags are de-

signed to inflate in higher severity frontal colli-

sions, although they may inflate if the forces in

another type of collision are similar to those of a

higher severity frontal impact. They may not in-

flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage

(or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper

front air bag system operation.

The supplemental air bag system monitors infor-

mation from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag

Control Unit (ACU) and seat belt buckle sensors

that detect if the seat belts are fastened. Inflator

operation is based on the severity of a collision

and whether the seat belts are being used. Only

one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending

on the crash severity and whether the front occu-

pants are belted or unbelted. This does not indi-

cate improper performance of the system. If you

have any questions about the performance of

your air bag system, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information about

the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer to obtain information about the

system. If you are considering modification of

your vehicle due to a disability, you may also

contact NISSAN. Contact information is con-

tained in the beginning of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a

fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the face and

chest of the driver and right front passenger. They

can help save lives and reduce serious injuries.

However, an inflating front air bag may cause

facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags

do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

practical away from the steering wheel or instru-

ment panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in

order to help protect the front occupants. Be-

cause of this, the force of the front air bag inflating

can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is

too close to, or is against, the front air bag module

during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON or START posi-

tion.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

WARNING

●Do not place any objects on the steering

wheel pad or on the instrument panel.

Also, do not place any objects between

any occupant and the steering wheel or

instrument panel. Such objects may be-

come dangerous projectiles and cause

injury if the front air bag inflates.

●Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will be

hot. Do not touch them; you may se-

verely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This is

to prevent accidental inflation of the

supplemental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or front end structure.

This could affect proper operation of

the front air bag system.

1-68 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●If your vehicle has front recovery hooks

as original factory equipment do not

remove or modify them. If it was not

equipped with front recovery hooks do

not install them. Either action could af-

fect proper operation of the front air

bag system resulting in injury or death.

●Tampering with the front air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

Tampering includes changes to the

steering wheel and the instrument

panel assembly by placing material

over the steering wheel pad and above

the instrument panel or by installing

additional trim material around the air

bag system.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect the

front air bag system. Tampering with

the seat belt system may result in seri-

ous personal injury.

●It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the front air bag. It is also recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for installation of electrical equipment.

The Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) wiring should not be modified or

disconnected. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the air bag

system.

●A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified repair

facility. A cracked windshield could af-

fect the function of the supplemental air

bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the front air bag system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-

IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

AND ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN

SIDE-IMPACT AND ROLLOVER

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

The side air bags are located in the outside of the

seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags

are located in the side roof rails. All of the

information, cautions and warnings in this

manual must be followed. The side air bags

and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in

higher severity side collisions, although they may

inflate if the forces in another type of collision are

similar to those of a higher severity impact. They

LRS2094

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69

are designed to inflate on the side where the

vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-

tain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in

certain types of rollover collisions or near roll-

overs. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for

example, during severe off-roading) may cause

the curtain air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper side air bag and curtain air

bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed

by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken

not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-

dition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the chest of

the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to

cushion the impact force to the head of occu-

pants in the front and rear outboard seating po-

sitions. They can help save lives and reduce

serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag

or curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other

injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not

provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and front passenger seated upright as far

as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat

passengers should be seated as far away as

practical from the door finishers and side roof

rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate

quickly in order to help protect the occupants.

Because of this, the force of the side air bag and

curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of

injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against,

these air bag modules during inflation. The side

air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is

over.

The curtain air bags will remain inflated for a short

time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags op-

erate only when the ignition switch is in the

ON or START position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

WARNING

●Do not place any objects near the seat-

back of the front seats. Also, do not

place any objects (an umbrella, bag,

etc.) between the front door finisher

and the front seat. Such objects may

become dangerous projectiles and

cause injury if a side air bag inflates.

●Right after inflation, several side air bag

and curtain air bag system components

will be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems. This is to prevent damage to or

accidental inflation of the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the cur-

tain air bag systems.

1-70 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Tampering with the side air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

For example, do not change the front

seats by placing material near the seat-

backs or by installing additional trim

material, such as seat covers, around

the side air bag.

●It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is

also recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for installation of elec-

trical equipment. The SRS wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or dis-

connected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the side air bag or cur-

tain air bag systems.

*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are

yellow or orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side air bag and

curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to

the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

SEAT BELT WITH

PRETENSIONER(s) (front seats)

WARNING

●The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused

after activation. They must be replaced

together with the retractor and buckle

as a unit.

●If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but pretensioner(s) are not ac-

tivated, be sure to have the preten-

sioner system checked and, if neces-

sary, replaced. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system. This is to pre-

vent damage to or accidental activation

of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with

the pretensioner system may result in

serious personal injury.

●It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the pretensioner system. It is also rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for installation of electrical

equipment. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the pretensioner system.

●If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-

posal procedures could cause personal

injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with the

supplemental air bag system in certain types of

collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor,

the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt

when the vehicle becomes involved in certain

types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat

occupants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat

belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed

to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are

used the same way as conventional seat belts.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limiters

allow the seat belt to release webbing (if neces-

sary) to reduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light is

used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner

system. For additional information, refer to

⬙Supplemental air bag warning light⬙in this sec-

tion. If the operation of the supplemental air bag

warning light indicates there is a malfunction,

have the system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pretensioner system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

1. SRS Air bag warning labels

The warning labels are located on the sur-

face of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-

impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as

shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on

a seat protected by an air bag in front of it.

If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious

injury or death.

WRS0885

1-72 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel, moni-

tors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten-

sioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning light

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-

sioner systems need servicing:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air

bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may

not operate properly. They must be checked and

repaired. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-

sioner systems will not operate in an acci-

dent. To help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle checked as soon

as possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags

and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a

one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is

damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light

remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.

These systems should be repaired and/or re-

placed as soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-

hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be

pointed out to the person performing the mainte-

nance. The ignition switch should always be

placed in the LOCK position when working under

the hood or inside the vehicle.

LRS0100

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-73

WARNING

●Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag

module will not function again and

must be replaced. Additionally, the acti-

vated pretensioner(s) must also be re-

placed. The air bag module and preten-

sioner(s) should be replaced. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. However, the air

bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot

be repaired.

●The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag systems and the pretensioner

system should be inspected if there is

any damage to the front end or side

portion of the vehicle. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

●If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner systems

or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect

disposal procedures could cause per-

sonal injury.

●If there is an impact to your vehicle from

any direction, your occupant classifica-

tion sensor (if so equipped) should be

checked to verify it is still functioning

correctly. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) should be checked

even if no air bags deploy as a result of

the impact. Failure to verify proper oc-

cupant classification sensor (weight

sensor) function may result in an im-

proper air bag deployment resulting in

injury or death.

1-74 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel...................................2-4

Meters and gauges ................................2-6

Speedometer and odometer .....................2-7

Tachometer ....................................2-9

Engine coolant temperature gauge ...............2-9

Fuel gauge ...................................2-10

Auxiliary gauges (if so equipped) ................2-11

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Level

(if so equipped) ...............................2-12

Off-road monitor (if so equipped)................2-13

Trip computer (if so equipped) ..................2-13

Compass (if so equipped) .........................2-18

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders........................................2-21

Checking lights ...............................2-22

Warning lights ................................2-22

Indicator lights ................................2-28

Audible reminders .............................2-31

Vehicle information display (if so equipped) ..........2-32

How to use the vehicle information display .......2-32

Startup display ................................2-33

Settings ......................................2-33

Vehicle information display warnings and

indicators.....................................2-41

Diesel warnings and indicators

(if so equipped) ...............................2-46

Security systems .................................2-47

Vehicle security system.........................2-47

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system .............2-48

Wiper and washer switch .........................2-49

Switch operation ..............................2-49

Rain-sensing auto wiper system

(if so equipped) ...............................2-51

Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster switch

(if so equipped) ..................................2-52

Headlight switch .................................2-53

Headlight control switch........................2-53

Daytime running light system

(if so equipped) ...............................2-56

Instrument brightness control ...................2-56

Turn signal switch ................................2-57

Turn signal ....................................2-57

Lane change signal ............................2-57

Fog light switch (if so equipped) ...................2-57

Horn ............................................2-58

Cargo lamp switch................................2-58

Climate controlled seat switches (if so equipped) ....2-58

Heated seat switches (if so equipped) ..............2-60

Heated rear seat switches (if so equipped) ..........2-61

Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) .......2-62

Warning systems switch (if so equipped)............2-62

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch. . .........2-63

Hill descent control switch (if so equipped)..........2-63

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system

switch (if so equipped) ............................2-65

Power inverter switch (if so equipped) ..............2-66

Parking Sensor (sonar) System OFF Switch

(if so equipped) ..................................2-67

Tow mode switch.................................2-67

E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped)................2-68

Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU)

(if so equipped) ..................................2-68

Power outlets ....................................2-69

12v Outlets . . .................................2-69

120v outlets (if so equipped) ...................2-70

Extended storage switch ..........................2-71

Storage .........................................2-72

Map pockets..................................2-72

Seatback pockets (if so equipped) ..............2-73

Under-seat storage (if so equipped) .............2-74

Console box storage trays (if so equipped) .......2-75

Glove box ....................................2-75

Console box (if so equipped) ...................2-75

Center armrest storage (if so equipped)..........2-76

Under front seat storage bin (if so equipped) .....2-77

Sunglasses holder (if so equipped) ..............2-77

Cup holders ..................................2-78

Grocery hooks (if so equipped) .................2-80

Bed liner storage bins (if so equipped) ...........2-80

Windows ........................................2-81

Power windows ...............................2-81

Rear power window switch (if so equipped) ......2-83

Rear sliding window (if so equipped) ............2-84

Interior lights .....................................2-85

Console light (if so equipped)...................2-86

Map lights (if so equipped) .....................2-86

Personal Lights (if so equipped).................2-86

HomeLink® universal transceiver (if so equipped) ....2-87

Programming HomeLink® ......................2-87

Programming HomeLink® for Canadian

customers and gate openers....................2-89

Operating the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver ...................................2-89

Programming trouble-diagnosis .................2-89

Clearing the programmed information ............2-90

Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button......2-90

If your vehicle is stolen .........................2-90

1. Vents (P. 4-32)

2. Turn signal switch (P. 2-57)

Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-49)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(P. 4-82)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

(P. 4-82)

Vehicle information display controls

(P. 2-32)

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-45)

Horn (P. 2-58)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-6)

Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-21)

6. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-40)

7. Shift lever (P. 5-16)

Tow mode switch (P. 2-67)

8. Audio controls (P. 4-46)

9. Center display (P. 4-4)

10. Climate controls (P. 4-33)

11. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-45)

12. Glove box (P. 2-72)

13. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-45)

14. Power outlet (if so equipped) (P. 2-69)

LII2352

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-4 Instruments and controls

15. Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-62)

Warning Systems switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-62)

16. Power outlet (P. 2-69)

17. Auxiliary jack (P. 4-46)

USB port (P. 4-46)

18. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

19. Trailer Brake Controller Unit

(if so equipped) (P. 2-68)

20. Climate control seat switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-58)

Heated front seat switches

(if so equipped) (P. 2-60)

21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-63)

Parking sensor switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-67)

22. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-44)

23. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-10)

24. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel con-

trol (P. 3-24)

25. Headlight aiming control

(if so equipped) (P. 2-53)

Power inverter switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-66)

Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-58)

Electronic locking rear differential

(E-Lock) system switch (if so

equipped) (P. 2-65)

Hill descent control system switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-63)

26. Headlight switch (P. 2-53)

Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-57)

Instrument brightness control switches

(P. 2-53)

Trip reset switch (P. 2-6)

Instruments and controls 2-5

1. Tachometer

2. Warning and indicator lights

3. Vehicle information display

Odometer

Outside temperature display

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3100

METERS AND GAUGES

2-6 Instruments and controls

1. Tachometer

2. Warning and indicator lights

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Trip computer

Odometer

Outside temperature display

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and

odometer. The speedometer is located on the

right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is

located in the vehicle information display (Type A)

(if so equipped) or the trip computer (Type B) (if

so equipped) to the left of the speedometer and

can be accessed with the vehicle in the ON

position.

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3497

Instruments and controls 2-7

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed. Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer 䊊

1and the twin trip odometer 䊊

are displayed below the vehicle information dis-

play (Type A) (if so equipped) or the trip computer

(Type B) (if so equipped) when the ignition switch

is placed in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-

hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

LIC2255

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3466

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3503

2-8 Instruments and controls

Changing the display

Pushing the TRIP RESET 䊊

3switch on the left

side of the instrument panel changes the display

as follows:

ODO →Trip →Trip →ODO

Resetting the trip odometer

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊

3for about

2 seconds resets the currently displayed trip

odometer to zero.

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-

lutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the engine

into the red zone 䊊

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-

gine speed. Operating the engine in the

red zone may cause serious engine

damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-

ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range 䊊

1when the gauge needle points

within the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

LIC3543 LIC2220

Instruments and controls 2-9

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-

ture near the hot (H) end of the normal

range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease

temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-

mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as

safely possible. If the engine is over-

heated, continued operation of the vehicle

may seriously damage the engine. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “If your ve-

hicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual for

immediate action required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level

in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The low fuel warning light comes on when the

amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-

ters 0 (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

●If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may

come on. Refuel as soon as possible.

After a few driving trips. the light

should turn off. If the light remains on

after a few driving trips, have the vehicle

inspected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

this section.

LIC2222

2-10 Instruments and controls

AUXILIARY GAUGES (if so equipped)

1. Exhaust temperature gauge (if so equipped)

2. Automatic Transmission fluid temperature

gauge

3. Turbo meter (if so equipped)

4. Engine oil pressure gauge

5. Engine oil temperature gauge

6. Voltmeter

Exhaust temperature gauge (if so

equipped)

For additional information, refer to the “Titan Die-

sel Owner’s Manual”.

Automatic Transmission fluid temperature

gauge

This gauge indicates the temperature of the au-

tomatic transmission fluid.

CAUTION

●This gauge is not designed to indicate

low automatic transmission fluid level.

Use the dipstick to check the fluid level.

For additional information, refer to “6-

speed automatic transmission fluid” in

the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

●If the gauge indicates automatic trans-

mission fluid temperature over the nor-

mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as

safely possible. It is recommended that

you have the vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer. Continued operation of

the vehicle may seriously damage the

transmission.

Turbo meter (if so equipped)

For additional information, refer to the “Titan Die-

sel Owner’s Manual”.

Engine oil pressure gauge

The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-

tem oil pressure while the engine is running. The

bar should be in the middle of the gauge when

the engine is running.

LIC3390

Instruments and controls 2-11

CAUTION

●This gauge is not designed to indicate

low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to

check the oil level. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

●If the gauge needle does not move with

the proper amount of engine oil, it is

recommended that you have the vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer. Continued

vehicle operation in such a condition

could cause serious damage to the

engine.

Engine oil temperature gauge

This gauge measures the temperature of the en-

gine oil.

Voltmeter

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the voltmeter indicates the battery volt-

age. When the engine is running, it indicates the

generator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volts drop below

the normal range. If the range is not within the

normal range (11 – 15 volts) while the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging system

is not functioning properly. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF)

LEVEL (if so equipped)

This gauge measures the DEF level remaining in

the vehicle. For additional information, refer to

“Fuel and refueling” in the “Titan Diesel Owner’s

Supplement”.

LIC3479

2-12 Instruments and controls

OFF-ROAD MONITOR (if so

equipped)

The off-road monitor displays the various slopes

of the vehicle.

The Pitch Gauge (left) indicates the angle of the

vehicle position up or down. The value will be

displayed below the gauge while the vehicle

graphic will rotate to indicate condition pointed

up or down.

The Tire Angle (center) indicates the angle of the

tires based on turning of the steering wheel. The

graphic image will show the actual vehicle tire

position while the angle is to be displayed below

as reference.

The Roll Gauge (right) indicates the angle of the

vehicle position left and right. The value will be

displayed below the gauge while the vehicle

graphic will rotate to indicate condition of the

vehicle leaning to the left or right.

TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the modes of the trip computer can be

selected by pressing the buttons on the

steering wheel. The following modes can be se-

lected:

●Range

●Average fuel economy

●Average speed

●Time

●Tire info

●Settings

Range

The range mode provides you with an estimation

of the distance that can be driven before refuel-

ing. The range is constantly being calculated,

based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and

the actual fuel economy which will depend on

driving conditions. Dashes (—) indicate that fuel

remaining volume cannot be read by the fuel

pump and should be refilled as soon as possible.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

LIC3417 LIC3504

Instruments and controls 2-13

NOTE:

When driving uphill or rounding curves, the

fuel in the tank shifts, which may momen-

tarily change the display.

Average fuel economy

The average fuel economy mode shows the av-

erage fuel economy since the last reset. Reset-

ting is done by pressing the ENTER button on the

steering wheel for more than approximately

1 second. The display is updated every 30 sec-

onds. At about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a

reset, the display shows (----).

Average speed

The average speed mode shows the average

vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done

by pressing the ENTER button on the steering

wheel for more than approximately 1 second. The

display is updated every 30 seconds. The first

30 seconds after a reset, the display shows

(----).

LIC3505 LIC3506

2-14 Instruments and controls

Time

The time mode shows the time the vehicle has

been on since the last reset. The displayed time

can be reset by pressing the ENTER button on

the steering wheel for more than approximately

1 second.

Tire info

The tire info mode shows the pressure of each

tire. To see the individual tire pressures, press the

ENTER button when the desired tire is shown.

The tire pressures are displayed as follows:

●FL (Front Left)

●FR (Front Right)

●RL (Rear Left)

●RR (Rear Right)

To return to the main menu selections, scroll to

“EXIT” and press ENTER.

Settings

The settings mode allows the user to change the

trip computer display units and set maintenance

reminders. To select the desired menu item,

press the ENTER button when it is shown. The

menu items are displayed as follows:

●Engine Oil

●Oil Filter

●Rotation

●Other

●Units

LIC3507 LIC3508 LIC3509

Instruments and controls 2-15

To return to the main menu selections, scroll to

“EXIT” and press ENTER.

Engine oil

The engine oil menu item allows the user to set a

maintenance reminder at a specific interval. To

set the reminder, press the ENTER button when

“ENGINE OIL” is shown. Using the but-

tons, set the desired interval to receive a mainte-

nance reminder.

To reset the mileage, press and hold the ENTER

button for approximately 1 second.

To return to the main menu selections, scroll to

“EXIT” and press ENTER.

For additional information, refer to “Maintenance

schedules” in the “Maintenance and schedules”

section of this manual.

Oil filter

The oil filter menu item allows the user to set a

maintenance reminder at a specific interval. To

set the reminder, press the ENTER button when

“OIL FILTER” is shown. Using the but-

tons, set the desired interval to receive a mainte-

nance reminder.

To reset the mileage, press and hold the ENTER

button for approximately 1 second.

To return to the main menu selections, scroll to

“EXIT” and press ENTER.

For additional information, refer to “Maintenance

schedules” in the “Maintenance and schedules”

section of this manual.

Rotation

The rotation menu item allows the user to set a

maintenance reminder at a specific interval. To

set the reminder, press the ENTER button when

“ROTATION” is shown. Using the but-

tons, set the desired interval to receive a mainte-

nance reminder.

To reset the mileage, press and hold the ENTER

button for approximately 1 second.

To return to the main menu selections, scroll to

“EXIT” and press ENTER.

For additional information, refer to “Maintenance

schedules” in the “Maintenance and schedules”

section of this manual.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a

substitute for regular tire checks, includ-

ing tire pressure checks. For additional

information, refer to “Changing wheels

and tires”in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual. Many factors including tire

inflation, alignment, driving habits and

road conditions affect tire wear and when

tires should be replaced. Setting the tire

replacement indicator for a certain driving

distance does not mean your tires will last

that long. Use the tire replacement indica-

tor as a guide only and always perform

regular tire checks. Failure to perform

regular tire checks, including tire pressure

checks could result in tire failure. Serious

vehicle damage could occur and may lead

to a collision, which could result in serious

personal injury or death.

Other

The other menu item allows the user to set a

maintenance reminder at a specific interval to

check various other maintenance items (ie. air

filter, brakes, coolant). To set the reminder, press

the ENTER button when “OTHER” is shown.

Using the buttons, set the desired inter-

val to receive a maintenance reminder.

2-16 Instruments and controls

To reset the mileage, press and hold the ENTER

button for approximately 1 second.

To return to the main menu selections, scroll to

“EXIT” and press ENTER.

For additional information, refer to “Maintenance

schedules” in the “Maintenance and schedules”

section of this manual.

Units

The units menu item allows the user to change

the trip computer units to US or METRIC. To

select the units, press the ENTER button when

desired unit is shown.

To return to the main menu selections, scroll to

“EXIT” and press ENTER. 4WD error

The “4WD ERROR” message appears in the

center of the trip computer when there is a mal-

function with the 4–wheel drive system. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “4–Wheel Drive

(4WD) warning light” in this section.

4WD tires

The “4WD TIRES” message appears in the cen-

ter of the trip computer when there is a large

difference in wheel rotation. If this messages

appears, switch the vehicle into 2WD mode. For

additional information, refer to “Using 4–Wheel

Drive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

LIC3544 LIC3545

Instruments and controls 2-17

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-

dicates the direction of the vehicle’s heading.

With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi-

tion, press the button as described in the

chart below to activate various features of the

automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.

Press and hold

the

button for about:

Feature:

(Press button again for about 1 sec-

ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

5 seconds Compass zone can be changed to

correct false compass readings

9 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

For information about the automatic anti-glare

feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview

mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section of this manual.

Press the button for about 1 second when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to

toggle the compass display 䊊

1on or off. The

display will indicate the direction of the vehicle’s

heading.

N: North

E: East

S: South

W: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by

driving the vehicle in three complete circles at

less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by driving

your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-

pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three

complete circles.

LIC1487

COMPASS (if so equipped)

2-18 Instruments and controls

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geo-

graphical north is known as variance. In some

areas, this difference can sometimes be great

enough to cause false compass readings. Follow

these instructions to set the variance for your

particular location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button for about

11 seconds or the button for about

8 seconds. The current zone number will

appear in the display. Release the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone map.

Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the or the button repeat-

edly to toggle through the zone numbers

until the desired number appears in the dis-

play. Once you have selected a zone num-

ber, the display will show a compass direc-

tion within a few seconds.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

Inaccurate compass direction

The compass display is equipped with automatic

correction function. If the correct direction is not

shown, follow this procedure.

WIC0355

Instruments and controls 2-19

1. With the display turned on, press and hold

the for about 10 seconds. The “C”

icon in the compass display will illuminate.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle

in three complete circles at a maximum

speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles, the display

should return to normal.

CAUTION

●Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,

which are attached to the vehicle by

means of a magnet. They affect the op-

eration of the compass.

●When cleaning the mirror, use a paper

towel or similar material dampened

with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass

cleaner directly on the mirror as it may

cause the liquid cleaner to enter the

mirror housing.

2-20 Instruments and controls

4–Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light

(if so equipped)

Low fuel warning light Front passenger air bag status light

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light

Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (blue)

Automatic Transmission check warning light Malfunction warning light (red) (if so equipped) Hill descent control system ON indicator light

(if so equipped)

Automatic Transmission oil temperature

warning light

Master warning light (if so equipped) Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) (yellow)

(For Gas engines only)

Automatic Transmission park warning light

(model)

NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light

(if so equipped)

Security indicator light

or Brake warning light P position selecting warning light

(if so equipped)

Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

(if so equipped)

Charge warning light Passenger seat belt warning light Slip indicator light

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) warning light

(if so equipped)

Supplemental air bag warning light TOW mode ON indicator light

Door open warning light (if so equipped) Water in Fuel warning light (if so equipped) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Instruments and controls 2-21

Driver seat belt warning light and chime Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-

tem ON indicator light (if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator

light

Engine oil pressure warning light Engine start operation indicator light (if so

equipped)

Low DEF warning light (if so equipped) Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped)

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake,

fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch

in the ON position without starting the engine.

The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:

, ,

The following lights (if so equipped) will come on

briefly and then go off:

or , , or ,

, , , , ,ATP

If any light does not come on or operate in a way

other than described, it may indicate a burned-

out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Some indicators and warnings are also displayed

on the vehicle information display between the

speedometer and tachometer. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Vehicle information display” in

this section.

WARNING LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in this section.

4–Wheel Drive (4WD) warning

light (if so equipped)

The 4WD warning light comes on when the key

switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the

engine is started.

If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly,

the warning light will either remain illuminated or

blink. For additional information, refer to “Using

4–Wheel Drive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

CAUTION

●If the warning light comes on or blinks

during operation, have your vehicle

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Do not drive on dry hard surface roads

in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD

warning light turns on when you are

driving on dry hard surface roads:

– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

2-22 Instruments and controls

– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,

move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position with the brake pedal de-

pressed, and shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

●If the warning light is still on after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service as

soon as possible.

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the ABS warning light illuminates and

then turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera-

tional.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the

engine is running or while driving, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-

tion is turned off. The brake system then operates

normally but without anti-lock assistance. For

additional information, refer to “Brake system” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Automatic Transmission check

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light comes on for about 2 seconds.

If the light comes on at any other time, it may

indicate the automatic transmission system is not

functioning properly. Have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

Automatic Transmission oil

temperature warning light

This light comes on when the automatic transmis-

sion oil temperature is too high. If the light comes

on while driving, reduce the vehicle speed as

soon as safely possible until the light turns off.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation when the A/T

oil temperature warning light is on may

damage the automatic transmission.

Automatic Transmission park

warning light ( model)

WARNING

●If the 4WD mode indicator is OFF or the

ATP warning light is ON, this indicates

that the automatic transmission P

(Park) position will not function and

could result in the vehicle moving unex-

pectedly, causing serious personal in-

jury or property damage. Always set the

parking brake. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Using 4–wheel drive

(4WD)” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

●If the ATP light is ON, this indicates that

the automatic transmission P (Park) po-

sition will not function and the transfer

case is in neutral.

●When parking, always make sure that

the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates

and the parking brake is set. Failure to

engage the transfer position in 2WD, 4H

or 4LO could result in the vehicle mov-

ing unexpectedly, resulting in serious

personal injury or property damage.

Instruments and controls 2-23

●Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4H

or 4LO position again to turn off the ATP

warning light when the shift lever to the

P position and the ATP warning light is

ON. (Before shifting the 4WD switch

into the 4LO position, move the shift

lever to the N position once, shift the

shift lever into P again and make sure

the ATP warning light is OFF.)

This light indicates that the automatic transmis-

sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans-

fer control is not secured in any drive position

while the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the

transmission will disengage and the drive wheels

will not lock.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and

the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light comes on when the parking

brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.

If the light comes on while the engine is running,

with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-

hicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid

as necessary. For additional information, re-

fer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warning system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

WARNING

●Your brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on. Driv-

ing could be dangerous. If you judge it

to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest

service station for repairs. Otherwise,

have your vehicle towed because driv-

ing it could be dangerous.

●Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort and pedal travel.

●If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake

warning light and the ABS warning light illumi-

nate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Have the brake system checked and, if

necessary, repaired. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Avoid

high-speed driving and abrupt braking. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking Sys-

tem (ABS) warning light” in this section.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,

it may indicate the charging system is not func-

tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check

the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,

missing, or if the light remains on, have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-24 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

●Do not ground electrical accessories di-

rectly to the battery terminal. Doing so

will bypass the variable control system

(if so equipped) and the vehicle battery

may not charge completely. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Variable

voltage control system” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

●Do not continue driving if the generator

belt is loose, broken or missing.

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

warning light (if so equipped)

For additional information, refer to the “Titan Die-

sel Owner’s Manual”.

Door open warning light (if so

equipped)

This light comes on when any of the doors are not

closed securely while the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

Driver seat belt warning light

and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten your

seat belt. The light illuminates whenever the igni-

tion switch is placed in the ON position and

remains illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is

fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds for

about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is

securely fastened.

For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in

the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section of this manual.

Engine oil pressure warning

light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the

light flickers or comes on during normal driving,

pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine

immediately, and call a NISSAN dealer or other

authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is not

designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the

dipstick to check the oil level. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause se-

rious damage to the engine almost imme-

diately. Such damage is not covered by

warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it

is safe to do so.

Low DEF warning light (if so

equipped)

For additional information, refer to the “Titan Die-

sel Owner’s Manual”.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel

tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-

nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0

(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel

in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches 0

(Empty).

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS that moni-

tors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low

tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about 1 second

and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

Instruments and controls 2-25

A “Tire Press Low - Add Air” warning also

appears in the vehicle information display.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust the

tire pressure of all four tires to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label located

in the driver’s door opening. The low tire

pressure warning light does not automati-

cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-

justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-

ommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to

activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

The “Tire Press Low - Add Air” warning appears

each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position as long as the low tire pressure warning

light remains illuminated.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in the “Instruments and controls”

section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and

in the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low

tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position. The light will remain on

after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

For additional information, refer to “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●If the light does not illuminate with the

ignition switch placed in the ON posi-

tion, have the vehicle checked as soon

as possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-

rious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could result

in serious personal injury or death.

Check the tire pressure for all four tires.

Adjust the tire pressure to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure show on

the Tire and Loading Information label

located in the driver’s door opening to

turn the low tire pressure warning light

OFF. If the light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pressure,

a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be

malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are

properly inflated, have the vehicle

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-26 Instruments and controls

●Since the spare tire is not equipped with

TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on after

1 minute. Have your tires replaced

and/or TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

●The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

●If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 mph 25 (km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

●Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

Malfunction Warning Light

(red) (if so equipped)

If this warning light illuminates this indicates ei-

ther the coolant temperature is above a critical

threshold or the exhaust temperatures are above

a critical threshold. When illuminated this lamp

indicates the need to stop the engine as soon as

it can be safely done. The Engine must remain

shut down until the engine can be repaired. For

additional information, refer to the “Titan Diesel

Owner’s Manual”.

CAUTION

●Continuing vehicle operation without

proper servicing of the engine control

system could lead to poor driveability,

reduced fuel economy, and damage to

the engine control system, which may

affect the vehicle’s warranty coverage.

●Failure to drain the water from the fuel

filter can cause serious damage to the

engine. It is recommended that you con-

tact a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

Master warning light (if so

equipped)

This light comes on when various vehicle infor-

mation display warnings appear.

●No key warning

●Low fuel warning

●Low windshield-washer fluid warning

●Parking brake release warning

●Door open warning

●Loose fuel cap warning

●Check tire pressure warning

●4WD error (if so equipped)

●Front & rear tire size differences (if so

equipped)

NISSAN Intelligent Key®

warning light (if so equipped)

After the ignition switch is placed in the “ON”

position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds

and then turns off. This light illuminates or blinks

as follows:

●The light blinks in yellow when the door is

closed with the Intelligent Key left outside

the vehicle and the ignition switch in the

“ACC” or “ON” position. Make sure that the

Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

●The light blinks in green when the Intelligent

Key battery is running out of power. Replace

the battery with a new one. For additional

information, refer to “Battery” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

●

The light illuminates in yellow when it warns of

a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system.

Instruments and controls 2-27

If the warning light illuminates in yellow while the

engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start

the engine. If the light comes on while the engine

is running, you can drive the vehicle. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

P position selecting warning

light (if so equipped)

The light blinks red and the warning buzzer

sounds if you are outside of the vehicle with the

Intelligent Key and the engine is off, but the shift

lever is not in the P (Park) position.

When the warning light blinks, place the ignition

switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to

the P (Park) position, then place the ignition

switch in the LOCK position.

Passenger seat belt warning

light

The light reminds you to notify the passenger to

fasten their seat belt. The light illuminates when-

ever the ignition is placed in the ON or START

position and remains illuminated until the passen-

ger’s seat belt is fastened.

The light will remain on for a period of time when

the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) and the

passenger seat belt is unfastened. If the passen-

ger seat belt is fastened, the light will turn off.

For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in

the “Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section of this manual for pre-

cautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning

light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or

START position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then

turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-

sioner seat belt systems need servicing:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental

restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-

tensioner(s) may not function properly. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Supplemental Re-

straint System (SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system” section

of this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-

sioner systems will not operate in an acci-

dent. To help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle checked as soon

as possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Water in Fuel warning light (if

so equipped)

For additional information, refer to the “Titan Die-

sel Owner’s Manual”.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in this section.

2-28 Instruments and controls

Electronic locking rear

differential (E-Lock) system

ON indicator light (if so

equipped)

This light comes on when the electronic locking

rear differential (E-Lock) system clutch is fully

engaged.

The indicator light flashes when the system is first

turned on. When the system fully engages, the

light remains on. If the switch is on and the

indicator light continues to flash, the system is

not engaged.

For additional information, refer to “Electronic

locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch”

in this section and “Electronic locking rear differ-

ential (E-Lock) system” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

Engine start operation

indicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch

is in the ACC or ON position with the shift lever in

the P (Park) position.

Automatic transmission models: This indica-

tor means that the engine will start by pushing the

push-button ignition switch with the brake pedal

depressed.

Front fog light indicator light (if

so equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illuminates when

the front fog lights are ON. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Fog light switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag status

light (if so equipped)

The front passenger air bag status light will be lit

and the passenger front air bag will be OFF

depending on how the front passenger seat is

being used.

For additional information, refer to “Front passen-

ger air bag and status light” in the “Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight high

beams are on and goes out when the low beams

are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes on

when the passing signal is activated.

Hill descent control system

ON indicator light (if so

equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light comes on briefly and then turns

off.

The light comes on when the hill descent control

system is activated.

If the hill descent control switch is on and the

indicator light blinks, the system is not engaged.

You may feel or hear the system working; this is

normal.

If the indicator light does not come on when the

hill descent switch is on, the system may not be

functioning properly. It is recommended that you

have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, refer to “Hill descent

control system on indicator light” in this section

and “Hill descent control system” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-29

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) (yellow) (For Gas

engines only)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate a

potential emission control malfunction.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 sec-

onds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the

engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle

is not ready for an emission control system

inspection/maintenance test. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Readiness for

inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Tech-

nical and consumer information” section of this

manual.

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

●MIL on steady — An emission control system

malfunction has been detected. Check the

fuel-filler cap. If the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning message (if so equipped) is dis-

played in the odometer, and the fuel-filler

cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the

cap and continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a few

driving trips. If the light does not turn

off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle

inspected. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not

need to have your vehicle towed to the

dealer.

●MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been

detected which may damage the emission

control system. To reduce or avoid emission

control system damage:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 mph

(72 km/h);

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration;

– avoid steep uphill grades;

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady.

Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the

dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-

ing the emission control system checked

and repaired as necessary could lead to

poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,

and possible damage to the emission con-

trol system.

Security indicator light

This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is

placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This

function indicates the security system equipped

on the vehicle is operational.

For additional information, refer to “Security sys-

tems” in this section.

Side light and headlight

indicator light (green) (if so

equipped)

The side light and headlight indicator light illumi-

nates when the side light or headlight position is

selected. For additional information, refer to

“Headlight switch” in this section.

2-30 Instruments and controls

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting

that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The

road surface may be slippery.

TOW mode ON indicator light

This light comes on when the tow mode function

is ON.

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal

switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned

on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the VDC OFF

switch is pushed to off. This indicates the VDC

system is not operating.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine and the system will operate normally. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

The VDC light also comes on when you place the

ignition switch in the ON position. The light will

turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is

operational. If the light stays on or comes on

along with the indicator light while you are

driving, have the VDC system checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

While the VDC system is operating, you might

feel a slight vibration or hear the system working

when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this

is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.

When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it

makes a high pitched scraping sound when the

vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake

pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-

tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is

opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-

ing the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buzzer

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if the

Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when

locking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, be

sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent

Key. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-31

The vehicle information display is located to the

left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:

●Vehicle settings

●Trip computer information

●Drive system warnings and settings (if so

equipped)

●Cruise control system information

●Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system (if so

equipped)

●Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system (if so

equipped)

●NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation informa-

tion

●Indicators and warnings

●Tire Pressure information

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE

INFORMATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be navigated

using the ENTER and buttons located on

the steering wheel.

1. ENTER — press to select the vehicle infor-

mation menu items. Additionally, use the

UP/DOWN function to navigate the

menu items

2. — move LEFT/RIGHT to navigate

through the items in the vehicle information

display

LIC2630 LIC3391

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (if

so equipped)

2-32 Instruments and controls

The ENTER button also controls audio functions.

For additional information, refer to “Steering

wheel switch for audio control” in the “Monitor,

climate, audio, phone and voice recognition sys-

tems” section of this manual.

STARTUP DISPLAY

When the vehicle is placed in the ON or ACC (if

so equipped) position, the vehicle information

display may display the following screens:

●Home

●Off Road

●Auxiliary Gauges (if so equipped)

●DEF Level (if so equipped)

●Trip

●Fuel Economy

●Navigation (if so equipped)

●Audio

●Driving Aids (if so equipped)

●Tire Pressures

●Warning Confirmation

●Settings

Warning Confirmation will only display if there are

any warnings present. For additional information,

refer to “Vehicle information display warnings and

indicators” in this section.

To control which items display in the vehicle

information display, refer to “Settings” in this sec-

tion.

SETTINGS

The setting mode allows you to change the infor-

mation displayed in the vehicle information dis-

play:

●Driver Assistance (if so equipped)

●Meter Settings

●Vehicle Settings

●Towing Settings (if so equipped)

●Alarm (if so equipped)

●Maintenance

●Unit

●Language

●Factory Reset

Instruments and controls 2-33

Driver Assistance (if so equipped)

The driver assistance menu allows the user to

change the various driving and parking aids.

Menu item Result

Driving Aids (if so equipped) Displays available driving aids. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert

(RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Blind Spot (BSW) Allows user to turn the blind spot warning system on or off

Parking Aids (if so equipped) Displays available parking aids. For additional information, refer to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual

Moving Object (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Moving Object Detection (MOD) on or off. For additional information, refer to “Moving Object Detection

(MOD)” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.

Sensor (if so equipped) Allows the user to turn the sensors on, off, or front only

Display Allows user to turn the display on or off in the vehicle information display

Volume Allows user to adjust the volume of warning chimes

Range Allows user to set a specific range for the sensors to engage

2-34 Instruments and controls

Meter Settings

The meter settings allow the user to change the

settings for the vehicle information display

Menu item Result

Main Menu Selection Allows user to customize the screens shown in the vehicle information display

Home Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display

Off Road Allows user to turn the off road monitor on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Off

Road Monitor” in this section.

Auxiliary Gauges Allows user to turn the auxiliary gauges on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Auxil-

iary Gauges” in this section.

DEF Level (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the DEF LEVEL meter on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to the

separate “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

4x4–i (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the 4x4–i screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Using

4–wheel drive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Trip Allows user to turn the trip on or off in the vehicle information display

Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the fuel economy on or off in the vehicle information display

Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to the separate

“Navigation Owner’s Manual”.

Audio Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Audio” in

the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual,

Driving Aids (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the driving aids on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Driver

Assistance” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressures screen on or off in the vehicle information display.

TPMS (if so equipped) Allows user to set tire pressure targets

Body Color Allows user to change the color of the vehicle shown in the vehicle information display

ECO Drive Report Allows user to access the ECO drive report

Display Allows user to turn the ECO drive report on or off

View History Allows user to view and reset ECO drive report history

Welcome Effect Allows user to customize the available welcome effects

Instruments and controls 2-35

Vehicle Settings

The vehicle settings allow the user to change the

settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and

other vehicle settings.

Menu item Result

Lighting Displays available lighting features of the vehicle

Welcome Light (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off

Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp feature on or off

Light Sensitivity (if so equipped) Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle

Light Off Delay (if so equipped) Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off

Turn indicator Displays available turn indicator options

3 Flash Pass Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass on or off

Locking Displays available locking options

I-Key Door Lock (if so equipped) Allows user to turn I-key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated

Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the door unlock

operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,

only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again

within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed

once.

Answer Bk. Horn Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once

when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.

Wipers Displays available wiper options

Rain Sensor (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the rain sensor feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Wiper and washer switch” in this

section.

Speed Dependent (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Wiper and washer switch” in

this section.

Memory Seat (ADP) (if so equipped) Displays available memory seat options

2-36 Instruments and controls

Menu item Result

Exit Seat Slide Allows the user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the driver’s seat backward for an

easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the igni-

tion switch in the ACC position, the driver’s seat will move to the previous set position. For additional information, refer to

“Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

Exit Steering Up Allows the user to turn the exit steering up feature on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the steering wheel up-

ward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and plac-

ing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the steering wheel moves to the previous position. For additional information,

refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

Reverse Tilt Mirror (if so equipped) Displays reverse tilt mirror information

Towing Settings (if so equipped) Displays available towing settings options

Trailer light check Allows user to select a mode in which the vehicle will test various lights that could affect a trailer if connected properly. This

feature can also be activated using the NISSAN Intelligent Key®. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent

Key®” and “Towing a trailer” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” and “Technical and consumer information” sec-

tions of this manual.

Alarm

The alarm menu allows the user to set specific

alarms for various items on the vehicle

Menu item Result

Outside Temp. Allows user to turn the outside temp. alarm on or off

Timer Alert Allows user to set the timer alert alarm

Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation alarm on or off

Phone Allows user to turn the phone alarm on or off

Mail Allows user to turn the mail alarm on or off

Instruments and controls 2-37

Maintenance

The maintenance menu allows the user to set

reminders for various vehicle maintenance items

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a

substitute for regular tire checks, includ-

ing tire pressure checks. For additional

information, refer to “Changing wheels

and tires”in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual. Many factors including tire

inflation, alignment, driving habits and

road conditions affect tire wear and when

tires should be replaced. Setting the tire

replacement indicator for a certain driving

distance does not mean your tires will last

that long. Use the tire replacement indica-

tor as a guide only and always perform

regular tire checks. Failure to perform

regular tire checks, including tire pressure

checks could result in tire failure. Serious

vehicle damage could occur and may lead

to a collision, which could result in serious

personal injury or death.

Menu item Result

Maintenance Allows user to cycle through various maintenance items and set reminders to perform maintenance at specific intervals

Oil Control System (if so equipped) Allows user to view the oil control system maintenance interval

Oil Filter (if so equipped) Allows user to set an oil filter reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one

Oil and Filter (if so equipped) Allows user to set an oil and filter reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one

Air Filter Allows user to set an air filter reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one

Tire Allows user to set a tire reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one

Brake Pad Allows user to set a brake pad reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one

Brake Fluid Allows user to set a brake fluid reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one

Battery Allows user to set a battery reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one

Transmission Fluid Allows user to set a transmission fluid reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one

Engine Coolant Allows user to set an engine coolant reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one

DEF Level (if so equipped) Allows user to set a DEF level reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one

Spark Plug (if so equipped) Allows user to set a spark plug reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one

Other Allows user to set a reminder, other than for the maintenance items listed above, at a specific interval or reset the current

one

2-38 Instruments and controls

Unit

The units menu allows the user to change the

units shown in the vehicle information display

Menu item Result

Mileage Displays available mileage display units

Pressure Displays available pressure display units

Temperature Displays available temperature display units

Language

The language menu allows the user to change the

languages displayed in the vehicle information

display.

Menu item Result

Language Displays available languages in which the vehicle information display will be shown

Factory Reset

The factory reset menu allows the user to restore

the vehicle information display settings to factory

status.

Menu item Result

Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can

confirm or deny the reset

Instruments and controls 2-39

LIC3511

2-40 Instruments and controls

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

1. Door Open

2. Release Parking Brake

3. Range XX miles

4. Low Fuel

5. Oil Level Low (For Diesel engines only)

6. Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle (For Diesel

engines only)

7. Oil Level Sensor Fault (For Diesel engines

only)

8. AT (Automatic Transmission) CHECK

9. AT (Automatic Transmission) Error: See

Owner’s Manual

10. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

11. Low Tire Pressure Error — Info

12. Flat Tire

13. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

14. Push brake and start button to drive

15. Remote Engine Start Mode (if so equipped)

16. Brightness indicator

17. Low Outside Temperature

18. Shift to Park

19. Low Fuel Pressure Service Fuel System

20. Low Washer Fluid

21. Cruise control indicator

22. 4WD shift indicators (if so equipped)

23. FRT & RR tire size difference: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

24. Push Ignition to OFF

25. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

26. Key ID Incorrect

27. No Key Detected

28. Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

29. Key Battery Low

30. Power will turn off to save the battery

31. Power turned off to save the battery

32. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights

33. 4WD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

34. Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery

35. Maintenance indicators

36. Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s Manual

(if so equipped)

37. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

38. 4WD MODE SHIFTING (if so equipped)

39. Loose Fuel Cap (if so equipped)

40. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross

Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so

equipped)

41. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

Door Open

This warning illuminates when a door has been

opened.

Release Parking Brake

This warning illuminates in the message area of

the vehicle information display when the parking

brake is set and the vehicle is driven. Press the

brake pedal to release the parking brake.

Range XX miles

This warning illuminates to indicate the approxi-

mate distance remaining before the fuel reaches

0 (Empty).

Instruments and controls 2-41

Low Fuel

This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the

fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is

convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge

reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small re-

serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel

gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).

Oil Level Low (For Diesel engines only)

If the Oil Level Low indicator is displayed, the

engine oil level is low. If the low level reminder is

displayed, check the level using the engine oil

dipstick.

CAUTION

The oil level should be checked regularly

using the engine oil dipstick. Operating

with an insufficient amount of oil can

damage the engine and such damage is

not covered by the warranty.

Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle (For Diesel

engines only)

This warning appears in message area of the

vehicle information display if low oil pressure is

detected. This gauge is not designed to indicate

low oil level. The low oil pressure warning is

not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use

the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional

information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Oil Level Sensor fault (For Diesel engines

only)

This warning appears in message area of the

vehicle information display if the oil level sensor

malfunctions. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer to have this system checked.

AT (Automatic Transmission) CHECK

If the AT Check warning appears while the engine

is running, or while driving, it may indicate that the

AT is not functioning properly and may need

servicing. It is recommended that you have the

system checked, and if necessary repaired by a

NISSAN dealer promptly.

AT (Automatic Transmission) Error: See

Owner’s Manual

If this message appears while the engine is run-

ning, or while driving, it may indicate that the AT is

not functioning properly and may need servicing.

It is recommended that you have the system

checked, and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN

dealer promptly.

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

This warning appears when the low tire pressure

warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire

pressure is detected. The warning appears each

time the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position as long as the low tire pressure warning

light remains illuminated. If this warning appears,

stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of

all four tires to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label. For additional information, refer to

“Low tire pressure warning light” in this section

and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Low Tire Pressure Error — Info

This warning appears when the low tire pressure

warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire

pressure is detected. Press the button for

information about the low tire pressure. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Low tire pressure

warning light” in this section and “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Flat Tire

This warning appears when the low tire pressure

warning light in the meter illuminates and one or

more flat tires are detected while driving.

Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

This warning may appear if the extended storage

switch is not pushed in. When this warning ap-

pears, push in the extended storage switch to

turn off the warning. For additional information,

2-42 Instruments and controls

refer to “Extended storage switch” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

Push brake and start button to drive

This indicator appears when the shift lever is in

the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will start by

pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal

depressed. You can start the engine from any

position of the ignition switch.

Remote Engine Start Mode (if so

equipped)

This warning appears in the vehicle information

display when the vehicle has been started using

the remote start function. To start the vehicle,

apply the brake and place the ignition switch in

the ON position.

Brightness indicator

This indicator appears when the vehicle informa-

tion display screen brightness is being adjusted.

Low Outside Temperature

This warning appears if the outside temperature

is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be

changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For

additional information, refer to “Settings” in this

section.

Shift to Park

This warning illuminates when the ignition switch

is in the ACC or OFF position and the shift lever

is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a chime

sounds when the ignition switch is in the ACC or

OFF position.

If this warning illuminates, move the shift lever to

the P (Park) position and start the engine.

Low Fuel Pressure Service Fuel System

This warning appears when the fuel pressure is

low. Check the fuel level and refuel if needed. If

the warning remains illuminated, have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional

information, refer to “Diesel fuel system” in the

“Introduction” of the “Titan Diesel Owner’s

Manual”.

CAUTION

Since the fuel pump is lubricated by the

fuel itself, prolonged driving with the low

fuel levels may cause progressive damage

to the fuel pump. This may cause the pump

to fail.

Low Washer Fluid

This warning illuminates when the windshield-

washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-

washer fluid as necessary. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Windshield-washer fluid” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Cruise control indicator

This indicator shows the cruise control system

status.

For additional information, refer to “Cruise con-

trol” in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

4WD shift indicators (if so equipped)

These indicators show which 4WD mode is se-

lected. For additional information, refer to “Using

4–wheel drive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

FRT & RR tire size difference: See Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped)

This warning may appear if there is a large differ-

ence between the diameters of the front and rear

wheels. Pull off the road in a safe area, with the

engine idling. Check that all the tire sizes are the

same, that the tire pressure is correct and that the

tires are not excessively worn. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Technical and consumer information” of this

manual.

Instruments and controls 2-43

Push Ignition to OFF

After the Push ignition to OFF warning illumi-

nates, the warning will illuminate if the ignition

switch is placed in the ACC position when the

shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition

switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK

position.

Headlight System Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the LED headlights

are not functioning properly.

If this warning appears, have your system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Key ID Incorrect

This warning appears when the ignition switch is

placed from the OFF position and the Intelligent

Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot

start the engine with an unregistered key.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

No Key Detected

This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is

left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in

the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is

inside the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual (if

so equipped)

After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds

and then turns off.

The Key System Error message warns of a mal-

function with the Intelligent Key system. If the light

comes on while the engine is stopped, it may be

impossible to start the engine.

If the light comes on while the engine is running,

you can drive the vehicle. However in these

cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair as

soon as possible.

Key Battery Low

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key

battery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery

with a new one. For additional information, refer

to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

Power will turn off to save the battery

This message appears in the vehicle information

display after a period of time if the ignition switch

is in the ACC or the ON position and if the vehicle

is in P (Park). For additional information, refer to

“Push-button ignition switch positions” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Power turned off to save the battery

This warning appears after the ignition switch is

automatically turned off to save the battery.

Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights

This warning appears when the headlights are

left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle.

Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO

position. For additional information, refer to

“Headlight” in this section.

4WD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when the 4-wheel drive

system is not functioning properly while the en-

gine is running.

2-44 Instruments and controls

This warning appears when the 4–wheel drive

system has failed. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery

This warning appears when the battery is low and

needs to be charged.

Maintenance indicators

When engine oil service is due, one or more of

these icons will appear automatically to remind

you. For additional information, refer to “Engine

oil” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

These will also appear when the user-set remind-

ers are met. For additional information, refer to

“Vehicle information display” in this section.

Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

This warning illuminates when there is an error

with the system. For additional information, refer

to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears when there is an error with

your TPMS. If this warning comes on, have the

system checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

4WD MODE SHIFTING (if so equipped)

This message appears when the vehicle is shift-

ing into 4WD. For additional information, refer to

“Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Loose Fuel Cap (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is

not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been

refueled. For additional information, refer to

“Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross

Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so

equipped)

This indicator shows when the BSW and RCTA

systems are engaged.

For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot

Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert

(RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when one or more of the

following systems (if so equipped) is not func-

tioning properly:

●Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

●Rear Cross Traffic alert (RCTA)

If one or more of these warning appears, have the

system checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-45

DIESEL WARNINGS AND

INDICATORS (if so equipped)

These warning and indicators apply to the diesel-

only models. For additional information, refer to

the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual.”

LIC3482

2-46 Instruments and controls

Your vehicle has two types of security systems:

●Vehicle security system

●NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors

or hood when the system is armed. It is not,

however, a motion detection-type system that

activates when a vehicle is moved or when a

vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or

exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-

ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,

and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be

aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,

well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, such

as component locks, identification markers, and

tracking systems, are available at auto supply

stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer

may also offer such equipment. Check with your

insurance company to see if you may be eligible

for discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors

can be locked with the key, power door lock

switch (if the door is opened, locked and

then closed), or with the key fob.

Key fob operation:

●Push the button on the key fob.

All doors lock. The hazard lights flash

twice and the horn beeps once to indicate

all doors are locked.

●When the button is pushed with

all doors locked, the hazard lights flash

twice and the horn beeps once as a re-

minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Silencing the

horn beep feature” (vehicles without naviga-

tion system) in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

4. Confirm that the indicator light comes

on. The light stays on for about

30 seconds. The vehicle security system is

now pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the

vehicle security system automatically shifts

into the armed phase. The light begins

to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the

30-second pre-arm time period, the door is

unlocked by the key or the key fob, or the

ignition switch is placed to ACC or ON, the

system will not arm.

●If the key is turned slowly when locking

the door, the system may not arm. Fur-

thermore, if the key is turned beyond

the vertical position toward the unlock

position to remove the key, the system

may be disarmed when the key is re-

moved. If the indicator light fails to

glow for a period of time, unlock the

door once and lock it again.

LIC0359

SECURITY SYSTEMS

Instruments and controls 2-47

●Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will

arm with all doors closed and locked

with the ignition switch in the OFF po-

sition.

●The lockable bedside storage compart-

ment (if so equipped) is not protected

by the vehicle security system.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following

alarm:

●The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

●The alarm automatically turns off after a pe-

riod of time. However, the alarm reactivates if

the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm

can be shut off by unlocking the driver’s door

with the key or by pressing the button

on the key fob.

The alarm is activated by:

●Opening a door without using the key or key

fob (even if the door is unlocked by using the

inside lock knob or the power door lock

switch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s

door with the key or by pressing the button

on the key fob.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of a

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automatic payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following pro-

cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ON

position for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-

ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-

rate key ring to avoid interference from other

devices.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

2-48 Instruments and controls

Security indicator light

For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This light

blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in

the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light blinks

when the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK

position with the key removed from the ignition

switch.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Im-

mobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-

functioning, the light will remain on while the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-

gine will not start, seek service for the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as

soon as possible. Please bring all regis-

tered keys that you have. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

SWITCH OPERATION

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the windshield and

obscure your vision which may lead to an

accident. Warm the windshield with the

defroster before you wash the windshield.

LIC0474

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3445

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-49

CAUTION

●Do not operate the washer continuously

for more than 30 seconds.

●Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with windshield-washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based windshield-

washer fluid concentrates may perma-

nently stain the grille if spilled while

filling the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir.

●Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufactur-

er’s recommended levels before pour-

ing the fluid into the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

NOTE:

If the windshield wiper operation is inter-

rupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop

moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,

turn the wiper switch to the OFF position

and remove the snow or ice that is on and

around the wiper arms. In approximately

1 minute, turn the switch on again to oper-

ate the wiper.

The windshield wiper and washer operates when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Rotate the end of the lever to operate the wiper at

the following speed:

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

can be adjusted by turning the knob toward

䊊

A(Slower) or 䊊

B(Faster). Also, the inter-

mittent operation speed varies in accor-

dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,

when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-

tent operation speed will be faster.)

䊊

2Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

䊊

3High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-

tion

Rotate the lever the opposite direction 䊊

4to have

one sweep operation (MIST) of the wiper.

Press the button on the end of the lever 䊊

5to

operate the washer. The wiper will also operate

several times.

NOTE:

The Speed Dependent feature may be dis-

abled. For additional information, refer to

“Vehicle information display” in this sec-

tion.

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3035

2-50 Instruments and controls

RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

CAUTION

●Do not touch the rain sensor and

around it when the wiper switch is in the

AUTO position and the ignition switch is

in the ON position. The wipers may op-

erate unexpectedly and cause an injury

or may damage a wiper.

●The rain-sensing auto wipers are in-

tended for use during rain. If the switch

is left in the AUTO position, the wipers

may operate unexpectedly when dirt,

fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck

on or around the sensor. The wipers

may also operate when exhaust gas or

moisture affect the rain sensor.

●When the windshield glass is coated

with water repellent, the speed of the

rain-sensing auto wipers may be higher

even though the amount of the rainfall

is small.

●Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto

wiper system when you use a car wash.

●The rain-sensing auto wipers may not

operate if rain does not hit the rain

sensor even if it is raining.

●Using Genuine NISSAN wiper blades is

recommended for proper operation of

the rain-sensing auto wiper system. For

additional information, refer to “Wind-

shield wiper blades” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

The rain-sensing auto wiper system can auto-

matically turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper

speed depending on the rainfall and the vehicle

speed by using the rain sensor located on the

upper part of the windshield.

To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system, rotate

the lever to the AUTO position 䊊

1. The wiper will

sweep once while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted

by turning the knob toward the front 䊊

B(High) or

toward the rear 䊊

A(Low).

– High — High sensitive operation

– Low — Low sensitive operation

To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system off,

rotate the lever to the OFF position, or rotate the

lever to the LO or HI position.

NOTE:

The Rain Sensor feature may be disabled.

For additional information, refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in this section.

LIC3446

Instruments and controls 2-51

To defrost the rear window glass and/or outside

mirrors, start the engine and push the rear

window/outside mirror defroster switch on. The

indicator light on the switch will illuminate. Push

the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The defroster automatically turns off after ap-

proximately 15 minutes.

NOTE:

If the rear power window (if so equipped) is

open while the defroster switch is on, the

rear window defroster will automatically

shut off. The heated outside mirrors (if so

equipped) will remain on. The rear window

defroster will automatically turn on when

the rear power window is fully closed if the

switch is on.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or dam-

age the rear window defroster.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2325

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3542

REAR WINDOW AND/OR OUTSIDE

MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH (if so

equipped)

2-52 Instruments and controls

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

䊊

1Rotate the switch to the position, and

the front parking, tail, license plate, and in-

strument panel lights will come on.

䊊

2Rotate the switch to the position, and

the headlights will come on and all the other

lights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3379

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2049

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-53

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights to be

set so they turn on and off automatically. The

autolight system can:

●Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,

license plate and instrument panel lights au-

tomatically when it is dark.

●Turn off all the lights when it is light.

●Keep all the lights on for a period of time after

you place the ignition switch in the OFF

position and all doors are closed.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and the time

delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted.

For additional information, refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in this section.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-

tion 䊊

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the

headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position and a door is opened and left open, the

headlights remain on for a period of time. If an-

other door is opened while the headlights are on,

then the timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to

the OFF, ,or position.

Be sure you do not put anything on top of

the autolight sensor 䊊

1located on the top

side of the instrument panel. The autolight

sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov-

ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is

dark out and the headlights will illuminate.

If this occurs while parked with the engine

off and the ignition switch placed in the ON

position, your vehicle’s battery could be-

come discharged.

LIC3380 LIC3487

2-54 Instruments and controls

Headlight beam select

䊊

1To select the high beam function, ensure the

low beams are on using the headlight control

switch, then push the lever forward. The high

beam lights come on and the blue

indicator light illuminates.

䊊

2Pull the lever back to return to the low beam.

䊊

3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the

headlight high beams on and off. The low

beams need not be engaged for this func-

tion.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position

while the headlight switch is in the

or position, the headlights will turn off after

a period of time.

After the headlights automatically turn off with the

headlight switch in the or position,

the headlights will illuminate again if the headlight

switch is moved to the OFF position and then

turned to the or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-

tomatically turns off the headlights after a

period of time, you should turn the head-

light switch to the OFF position when the

engine is not running to avoid discharging

the vehicle battery.

Manual headlight aiming control (if so

equipped)

Depending on the number of occupants in the

vehicle and the load it is carrying, the headlight

axis may be higher than desired. If the vehicle is

traveling on a hilly road, the headlights may di-

rectly hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle ahead

or the windshield of the oncoming vehicle. The

light axis can be lowered with the operation of the

switch.

The larger the number designated on the switch,

the lower the axis.

When traveling without a heavy load or on a flat

road, select position 0.

LIC3060 LIC2230

Instruments and controls 2-55

Select the switch position by referring to the

following sample.

Vehicle Load Switch

Position

Driver only or Driver/front pas-

senger 0

Driver/front seat passenger/rear

seat passengers 1

Driver/front seat passenger/rear

seat passengers/cargo or driver/

cargo/no trailer

Fully loaded/no trailer 3

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

The LED portion of the headlights (if so

equipped), or the lights in the fog light area,

automatically illuminate at 100% intensity when

the engine is started and the parking brake re-

leased. The daytime running lights operate with

the headlight switch in the OFF position. When

you turn the headlight switch to the posi-

tion for full illumination the LED lights (if so

equipped) switch from daytime running lights to

the park function.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine is

started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-

nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when

the parking brake is released. The daytime run-

ning lights remain on while the engine is running.

It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch

ON for interior controls and switches to illumi-

nate, as those remain off while the switch is in the

OFF position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system is

active, tail lights on your vehicle are not

on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your

headlights. Failure to do so could cause

an accident injuring yourself and others. INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

Press the “+”button to increase the brightness of

instrument panel lights.

Press the “-”button to decrease the brightness of

instrument panel lights.

LIC3176

2-56 Instruments and controls

TURN SIGNAL

䊊

1Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com-

pleted, the turn signal cancels automatically.

LANE CHANGE SIGNAL

䊊

2Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does not

latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever

until the lane change is completed.

Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does not

latch, and release the lever. The turn signal

will automatically flash three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane

change based on road and traffic conditions.

For additional information on disabling the 3 flash

pass turn indicator, refer to “How to use the

vehicle information display” in “Vehicle informa-

tion display” in this section.

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch

to the position, then push the fog light

switch 䊊

1on.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch

in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-

lights must be on, then push the fog light switch

on.

To turn the fog lights off, push the fog light switch

again.

The headlights must be on and the low beams

selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog

lights automatically turn off when the high beam

headlights are selected.

LIC3061 LIC2197

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-57

To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on the

steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system. Tam-

pering with the supplemental front air bag

system may result in serious personal

injury.

To turn on the cargo lamp and the under rail bed

lamps (if so equipped) push the switch down to

the ON position. The tailgate lights (if so

equipped) will also illuminate when the cargo

lamp switch is in the ON position.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the

climate controlled seats if you or the oc-

cupants cannot monitor seat tempera-

tures or have an inability to feel pain in

those body parts in contact with the seat.

Use of the climate controlled seats by

such people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

●The battery could run down if the cli-

mate control seat is operated while the

engine is not running.

●Do not use the climate control seat for

extended periods or when no one is

using the seat.

●Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-

ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat

may become overheated.

●Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

objects. This may result in damage to

the climate controlled seat.

●Any liquid spilled on the seat should be

removed immediately with a dry cloth

LIC2051 LIC0616

HORN CARGO LAMP SWITCH CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT

SWITCHES (if so equipped)

2-58 Instruments and controls

●The climate controlled seat has an air

filter. Do not operate the climate con-

trolled seat without an air filter. This

may result in damage to the system.

●When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-

lar materials.

●If any malfunctions are found or the

climate controlled seat does not oper-

ate, turn the switch off and have the

system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

The climate controlled seat warms up or cools

down the front seat by blowing warm or cool air

from under the surface of the seat. The climate

control switch is located on the center console.

The climate controlled seat can be operated as

follows:

1. Start the engine.

2. Turn the control knob 䊊

Ato the heat side 䊊

or the cool side 䊊

2. The indicator light 䊊

Bon

the control knob will illuminate.

3. Adjust the desired amount of air using the

control knob. The climate controlled seat

blower remains on low speed for approxi-

mately 60 seconds after turning the switch

on or selecting the desired temperature.

4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed or

cooled, or before you leave the vehicle, be

sure to turn the control knob to the Off

(center) position. The indicator light 䊊

Bon

the control knob goes off with the switch in

the off (center) position.

To check the air filter for the climate controlled

seat, it is recommended that you contact a

NISSAN dealer.

SIC4334

Instruments and controls 2-59

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the

seat heater if you or the occupants cannot

monitor elevated seat temperatures or

have an inability to feel pain in body parts

that contact the seat. Use of the seat

heater by such people could result in seri-

ous injury.

CAUTION

●Do not use the seat heater for extended

periods or when no one is using the

seat.

●Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-

ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat

may become overheated.

●Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

object. This may result in damage to the

heater.

●Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with a

dry cloth.

●When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-

lar materials.

●If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the

switch off and have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

●The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as

desired, depending on the temperature. The

indicator light in the switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch

off.

LIC3037

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so

equipped)

2-60 Instruments and controls

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the

seat heater if you or the occupants cannot

monitor elevated seat temperatures or

have an inability to feel pain in body parts

that contact the seat. Use of the seat

heater by such people could result in seri-

ous injury.

CAUTION

●The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

●Do not use the seat heater for extended

periods or when no one is using the

seat.

●Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-

ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat

may become overheated.

●Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

object. This may result in damage to the

heater.

●Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with a

dry cloth.

●When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-

lar materials.

●If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the

switch off and have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

The rear seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

The switches are located on the rear of the front

center console and can be operated indepen-

dently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as

desired. The indicator light in the switch will

illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

When the seat is warmed or before you leave

the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

LIC3037

HEATED REAR SEAT SWITCHES (if so

equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-61

The heated steering wheel system is designed to

operate only when the surface temperature of the

steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm

the steering wheel after the engine starts. The

indicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is

below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the

steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a

temperature above 68°F (20°C). The indicator

light will remain on as long as the system is on.

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering

wheel system off manually. The indicator light will

go off. The switch will turn off automatically

30 minutes after activation, once this happens

the switch will need to be pressed again to restart

the cycle.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steering

wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch

is turned on, the system will not heat the

steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

The warning systems switch is used to turn on

and off the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system

that is activated using the settings menu on the

vehicle information display.

When the warning systems switch is turned off,

the indicator 䊊

1on the switch is off. The indicator

will also be off if the warning system is deacti-

vated using the settings menu.

LIC0421 LSD2208

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH

(if so equipped)

WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so

equipped)

2-62 Instruments and controls

The BSW system will turn on the BSW/RCTA

indicator light, located next to the outside mirrors,

if the radar detects a vehicle in the detection

zone. If the turn signal is activated in the direction

of the detected vehicle, a chime sounds twice

and the BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash. For

additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warn-

ing (BSW)” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC sys-

tem on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the engine output to reduce

wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced

even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If

maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck

vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine to turn on the system. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

WARNING

●Never rely solely on the hill descent

control system to control vehicle speed

when driving on steep downhill grades.

Always drive carefully when using the

hill descent control system and deceler-

ate the vehicle speed by depressing the

brake pedal if necessary. Be especially

careful when driving on frozen, muddy

or extremely steep downhill roads. Fail-

ure to control vehicle speed may result

in a loss of control of the vehicle and

possible serious injury or death.

LIC3344 LIC3447

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (if

so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-63

●The hill descent control may not control

the vehicle speed on a hill under all load

or road conditions. Always be prepared

to depress the brake pedal to control

vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re-

sult in a collision or serious personal

injury.

CAUTION

When the hill descent control system op-

erates continuously for a long time, the

temperature of the brake pads may in-

crease and the hill descent control system

may be temporarily disabled (the indicator

light will blink). If the indicator light does

not come on continuously after blinking,

stop using the system.

The hill descent control system is designed to

reduce driver workload when going down steep

hills. The hill descent control system helps to

control vehicle speed so the driver can concen-

trate on steering the vehicle.

To activate the hill descent control system:

●activate the 4H or 4LO switch,

●the transmission shift lever must be in for-

ward or reverse gear,

●the hill descent control system switch must

be ON.

The vehicle speed must be kept below 15 mph

(25 km/h).

The hill descent control indicator light will come

on when the system is activated. Also, the

stop/tail lights illuminate while the hill descent

control system applies the brakes to control ve-

hicle speed.

You may hear a noise from under the hood or feel

a vibration from the actuator when it is operating.

This is normal and indicates the HDC system is

working properly.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed

while the hill descent control system is on, the

system will stop operating temporarily. As soon

as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the

hill descent control system begins to function

again if the hill descent control operating condi-

tions are fulfilled.

The hill descent control indicator light blinks if the

switch is on and all conditions for system activa-

tion are not met or if the system becomes disen-

gaged for any reason.

To turn off the hill descent control system, push

the switch to the OFF position.

For additional information, refer to “Hill descent

control system on indicator light” in this section

and “Hill descent control system” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

2-64 Instruments and controls

The E-Lock system can help provide added trac-

tion if the vehicle is stuck or becoming stuck.

To activate the E-Lock system:

●the 4WD switch must be in the 4LO position

(4-wheel drive vehicles),

●the vehicle must be stopped or moving at

4 mph (7 km/h) or less, and

●the E-Lock system switch must be turned

ON.

When the E-Lock system switch is turned ON,

the indicator light will flash until the system en-

gages. However, if all operation conditions listed

above are not met or the system becomes disen-

gaged, the indicator light will continue to flash.

The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabled

and the ABS light illuminates when the E-Lock

system is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system is disabled and the VDC light

illuminates when the E-Lock system is ON.

For additional information, refer to “Electronic

locking rear differential (E-Lock) system” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual for

further explanation and system limitations.

WARNING

●Never leave the E-Lock system ON when

driving on paved or hard-surfaced

roads. Turning the vehicle may result in

the rear wheels slipping and result in an

accident and personal injury. After us-

ing the E-Lock system to free the ve-

hicle, turn the system OFF.

●Use the rear differential lock only in an

emergency when it is not possible to

free a stuck vehicle even using 4LO.

Never use the E-Lock system on a slip-

pery road surface such as snow or ice

surface. Using the E-Lock system when

driving in these road conditions may

cause unexpected movement of the ve-

hicle during engine braking, accelerat-

ing or turning, which may result in an

accident and serious personal injury.

●Observe the above warnings. Other-

wise, loss of normal steering control

may result. This may result in an acci-

dent and serious personal injury.

CAUTION

●After using the E-Lock system, or during

normal driving, turn the switch OFF to

prevent possible damage to driveline

components from extended use.

●When the E-Lock system is in operation,

turning the vehicle becomes difficult.

This can be dangerous, especially at

high speeds. Doing so could damage

drivetrain components.

LIC3157

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR

DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM

SWITCH (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-65

●Do not operate the E-Lock system when

the vehicle is turning or when one side

wheel is rotating. Otherwise, the power

train system parts could be damaged.

●The E-Lock system operates only when

the engine is running.

●In 4H mode, the E-Lock system does not

operate when the E-Lock system switch

is turned to the ON position. (The

E-Lock system indicator light will flash.)

●Avoid quick starts while the E-Lock sys-

tem is in operation. Otherwise the

power train system parts could be

damaged.

●Observe the above cautions. Otherwise,

loss of normal steering may result.

To use the outlets for devices that require 120v

power, place the ignition in the ON position and

push the power inverter switch.

The 400W or 150W on the switch will illuminate

according to the mode selected. Only the 150W

is available when the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position and the vehicle is being driven.

For additional information, refer to “120v outlets”

in this section of the manual regarding using

devices that require the power inverter switch

activated.

CAUTION

●Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

●Do not attempt to use this while driving.

●Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory, doing so

could significantly drain the battery of

your vehicle.

LIC2075

POWER INVERTER SWITCH (if so

equipped)

2-66 Instruments and controls

The parking sensor (sonar) system OFF switch

on the instrument panel allows the driver to turn

the parking sensor (sonar) system, Moving Ob-

ject Detection (MOD), and Rear Cross Traffic

Alert (RCTA) system on and off. To turn the

systems on and off, the ignition switch must be in

the ON position.

The indicator light on the switch will illuminate

when the systems are turned on.

If the indicator light flashes when the parking

sensor (sonar), MOD, or RCTA systems are not

turned off, it may indicate a malfunction in one or

more of these systems.

The parking sensor (sonar), MOD, or RCTA sys-

tems will be turned on automatically under the

following conditions:

●When the ignition switch is switched from

the OFF position to the ON position.

●When the shift lever is shifted into the R

(Reverse) position.

●When the vehicle speed increases to 6 mph

(10 km/h) and decreases.

The automatic turning on function can be turned

on and off for these systems in the vehicle infor-

mation display (if so equipped). For additional

information, refer to “Settings” in the “Instrument

and controls” section of this manual.

For additional information, refer to “Front and rear

sonar system” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert

(RCTA)” in the “Starting and Driving” section of

this manual, or the “Moving object detection

(MOD)” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone

and voice recognition systems” section of this

manual.

Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavy

trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehicle

in the tow mode with no trailer/load or light

trailer/light load will not cause any damage. How-

ever, fuel economy may be reduced, and the

transmission/engine driving characteristics may

feel unusual.

Push the tow mode switch to activate tow mode.

The TOW indicator light illuminates when tow

mode is selected. Push the tow mode switch

again to turn tow mode off.

Tow mode is automatically canceled when the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

LIC3596 LIC3381

PARKING SENSOR (sonar) SYSTEM

OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

TOW MODE SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-67

For additional information, refer to “Tow mode” in

the “Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

The E-call (SOS) system switch is used in com-

bination with a NissanConnect

Services sub-

scription to call for assistance in case of an

emergency.

Pushing the switch will (with a paid subscription)

reach a Response Specialist that will provide

assistance based on the situation described by

the vehicle’s occupant. For additional informa-

tion, or to enroll your vehicle, refer to

www.NissanUSA.com/connect or call

855–426–6628.

The TBCU on the instrument panel allows the

driver to adjust the braking force applied to the

trailer brakes.

For additional information, refer to “Towing a

trailer” in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

LIC3376 LIC3382

E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (if so

equipped)

TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER UNIT

(TBCU) (if so equipped)

2-68 Instruments and controls

12V OUTLETS

The power outlets are for powering electrical

accessories such as cellular telephones.

The power outlets located on the instrument

panel and inside the center armrest (if so

equipped) are powered only when the ignition

switch is placed in the ACC or ON position.

Open the cap to use a power outlet.

CAUTION

●The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

●Only certain power outlets are designed

for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do

not use any other power outlet for an

accessory lighter. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for addi-

tional information.

●Do not use with accessories that exceed

a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do

not use double adapters or more than

one electrical accessory.

●Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

●Avoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner, headlights, or rear window

defroster (if so equipped) is on.

●Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperature

fuse may open.

●When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquid to contact the outlet.

Instrument panel

LIC3383

Inside center console (if so equipped)

LIC3385

POWER OUTLETS

Instruments and controls 2-69

120V OUTLETS (if so equipped)

Before Drive (idling) (Park) When shifting out of Park When shifting back to

(idling) (Park)

Switch Reset

Options What is plugged IN Indicator Inverter

Status

Indicator Inverter

Status

Indicator Inverter

Status

Indicator Inverter

Status

Nothing plugged but switch is on 150 and 400 ON 150 ON 150 and 400 ON NOT

NECESSARY NOT

NECESSARY

Device<150W 150 and 400 ON 150 ON 150 and 400 ON NOT

NECESSARY NOT

NECESSARY

150W>device<400W 150 and 400 ON OFF OFF ON ON 150 and 400 ON

Device>400W 150 and 400 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF** OFF**

** OFF means that the inverter system cannot be reset until a device that is within the specified range of operation is plugged in. Therefore, the switch indicators and inverter would re-

main OFF. There may be a very short period of time where the switch indicators are on, but once the inverter reaches it’s peak saturation point (temp and power level). it will shut off

both the inverter and the switch indicators.

In truck box (if so equipped)

LIC0617

Center console (if so equipped)

LIC3384

2-70 Instruments and controls

Do not use the outlet located in the truck box with

accessories that exceed 120 volt. Do not use

double adapters or more than one electrical ac-

cessory. When the dual wall bed liner is installed

(if so equipped), the power outlet is still acces-

sible through the access door in the bed liner.

CAUTION

●Operation of the 120 volt system with

the ignition in the ON position and the

engine not running (idle) will drain the

battery charge. This could lead to a

dead battery or no start condition.

●The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

●Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

●Do not use double adaptors or more

than one electrical accessory.

●Avoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner, headlights or rear window

defroster is on.

●Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperature

fuse may open.

●When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquid to contact the outlet.

The extended storage switch is used when ship-

ping the vehicle. It is located in the fuse panel

inside the glove box. To reach it, open the glove

box 䊊

1on the instrument panel, then open the

fuse panel cover 䊊

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

ensure the extended storage switch is ON by

pushing it fully in place, as shown.

LIC3502

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-71

MAP POCKETS

Pulled position

LIC3266

Pushed position

LIC3268

Front door shown (others similar)

LIC3397

STORAGE

2-72 Instruments and controls

SEATBACK POCKETS (if so

equipped)

The seatback pocket(s) may be located on the

back of the driver’s and/or passenger’s seat,

there may be one or two pockets equipped. The

pockets can be used to store maps.

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passen-

ger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System,

please observe the following items:

●Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket or head restraint/headrest.

●Do not place heavy loads heavier than

2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

Center console (passenger’s side shown,

driver’s similar)

LIC3388 LIC0575

Instruments and controls 2-73

UNDER-SEAT STORAGE (if so

equipped)

To access the storage bin, lift the bench seat

toward the rear of the vehicle, then lift the cover

the same direction. The cover may be locked 䊊

if so equipped.

CAUTION

To avoid damaging the tray under the seat,

cargo in the trays should not exceed

20 pounds (9.08kg).

To adjust the divider 䊊

1, pull it straight up and

reposition it to the desired location, sliding it

straight down.

Both sides of the storage bin, under the rear seat

on the driver’s and passenger’s sides, operate

similarly. They can be accessed simultaneously

or independently of each other.

Further, to create a flat floor space for storage,

rather than access the storage bin, lift the bench

seat as before, then lift the tab 䊊

2and rotate the

bin cover toward the front of the vehicle. Use the

tab as a leg to support the cover as the new floor

space.

Cargo can be secured to the extended floor with

bungee cords. Secure the bungee cords to the

loops in the extended floor.

CAUTION

●To avoid damaging the extended floor,

the weight secured should not exceed

247 lbs (112 kg).

●To avoid damaging the bungee hook

loops, do not exceed 35 lbs (16 kg) of

force to any given loop.

Rear seat (driver’s side shown)

LIC3407 LIC3408

2-74 Instruments and controls

CONSOLE BOX STORAGE TRAYS

(if so equipped)

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle.

Use the master key to lock or unlock the glove box

lock. The valet key cannot be used to lock or

unlock the glove box lock.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to

help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX (if so equipped)

WARNING

The center console box should not be

used while driving so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

LIC3406 LIC3386 LIC3399

Instruments and controls 2-75

CENTER ARMREST STORAGE (if so

equipped)

To access the center armrest storage area, lower

the center armrest and lift the lid.

CAUTION

The center armrest storage should not be

used while driving so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

LIC3400 LIC0621

2-76 Instruments and controls

UNDER FRONT SEAT STORAGE BIN

(if so equipped)

To access the storage bin, lift the center of the

front bench seat toward the front of the vehicle.

CAUTION

●To avoid damaging the tray under the

seat, cargo in the tray should not ex-

ceed 20 pounds (9.08kg).

●The cushion storage bin should not be

used while driving so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

SUNGLASSES HOLDER (if so

equipped)

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

WARNING

●Keep the sunglasses holder closed

while driving to avoid obstructing the

driver’s view and to help prevent an

accident.

CAUTION

●Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct

sunlight. The heat may damage the

sunglasses.

●Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

Bench seat (center)

LIC3437 LIC3387

Instruments and controls 2-77

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

●Avoid abrupt starting and braking when

the cup holder is being used to prevent

spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it

can scald you or your passenger.

●Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

Front — Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3401

Front — Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3512

Armrest (if so equipped)

LIC0622

2-78 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

●Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in

the vehicle and possibly injure people

during sudden braking or an accident.

●Do not use bottle holder for open liquid

containers.

2nd row (rear of front console)

(if so equipped)

LIC3402

2nd row bench (if so equipped)

LIC0556

Bottle holder

LIC3396

Instruments and controls 2-79

GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)

The grocery hooks allow for standard size plastic

grocery bags to hang side by side.

To access the grocery hooks, fold up the rear

bench seat. For additional information, refer to

“Folding the rear bench seat” in the “Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than

18 lbs (8 kg) to a single grocery hook.

BED LINER STORAGE BINS (if so

equipped)

To open the bed liner storage bins on the top of

the wheel wells, unlock the bin and lift the lid

toward the inside of the truck bed.

To close, replace the lid and lock the bin.

To open the bed liner storage bins on the tail gate

end of the bed liner, lift the tab away from the

truck bed, pull the lid up and away from the truck.

LIC3389 LIC3449 LIC3450

2-80 Instruments and controls

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

●Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while

it is in motion and before closing the

windows. Use the window lock switch to

prevent unexpected use of the power

windows.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assistance

of others or pets unattended in your

vehicle. Additionally, the temperature

inside a closed vehicle on a warm day

can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position, or for a

period of time after the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s

door is opened during this period of time, the

power to the windows is canceled.

1. Left rear passenger window switch

2. Driver side automatic window switch

3. Window lock button

4. Front passenger side automatic window

switch

5. Right rear passenger window switch

Driver’s side power window switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped with

switches to open or close the front and rear

passenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch and hold it

down. To close a window, pull the switch and

hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function

at any time, simply release the switch.

LIC3404

WINDOWS

Instruments and controls 2-81

Front passenger’s power window

switch

The passenger’s window switch operates only

the corresponding passenger’s window. To open

the window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊

To close the window, pull the switch up 䊊

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or close

only the corresponding windows. To open the

window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊

1.To

close the window, pull the switch up 䊊

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock switch is depressed, only

the driver’s side window can be opened or

closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock

function.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automatic

operation, press the window switch down to the

second detent and release it; it need not be held.

The window automatically opens all the way. To

stop the window, lift the switch up while the

window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automatic

operation, pull the switch up to the second detent

and release it; it need not be held. To stop the

window, press the switch down while the window

is closing.

WIC0260 WIC0261 LIC0410

2-82 Instruments and controls

Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be activated when

a window is closed by automatic operation.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto-reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window oc-

curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the window.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,

or jump started, the power window auto-reverse

function may not operate properly. If this occurs,

please contact the dealer to re-initialize the

power window auto-reverse system.

If the control unit detects something caught in a

window equipped with automatic operation, as it

is closing, the window will be immediately low-

ered.

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH

(if so equipped)

WARNING

●You must ensure all occupants and ob-

jects are free of the rear window area

prior to and during operation. Failure to

do so may result in injury and/or dam-

age to the rear window system.

●The rear window is not designed to

carry long items through it.

●Do not place objects through the

opened rear window. Do not use the

rear window as a cargo area pass-

through. This may result in damage to

the rear window system, or personal

injury.

WARNING

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assistance

of others or pets unattended in your

vehicle. Additionally, the temperature

inside a closed vehicle on a warm day

can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

To open the rear power window, push in and hold

the switch.

To close the rear power window, pull out and hold

the switch.

To stop the opening or closing function at any

time, simply release the switch.

LIC3448

Instruments and controls 2-83

NOTE:

If the rear power window is opened while

the defroster switch is on, the rear window

defroster (if so equipped) will automati-

cally shut off. The heated outside mirrors (if

so equipped) will remain on. The rear win-

dow defroster will automatically turn on

when the rear power window is fully closed

if the switch is on.

REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if so

equipped)

WARNING

●You must ensure all occupants and ob-

jects are free of the rear window area

prior to and during operation. Failure to

do so may result in injury and/or dam-

age to the rear window system.

●The rear window is not designed to

carry long items through it.

●Do not place objects through the

opened rear window. Do not use the

rear window as a cargo area pass-

through. This may result in damage to

the rear window system, or personal

injury.

Squeeze the handles of the lever 䊊

1, then slide

the window open 䊊

LIC3488

2-84 Instruments and controls

The interior light has a three-position switch and

operates regardless of ignition switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position 䊊

1, the

interior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-

tion. The lights will go off after a period of time

unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

When the switch is in the DOOR or normal

operation position 䊊

2, the interior lights, puddle

lights (if so equipped), and cargo light will stay on

for a period of time when:

●The doors are unlocked by the key fob, a key

or the power door lock switch while all doors

are closed and the ignition switch is in the

OFF position.

●The driver’s door is opened and then closed

while the key is removed from the ignition

switch.

●The key is removed from the ignition switch

while all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the timer is activated

when:

●The driver’s door is locked by the key fob, a

key, or the power door lock switch.

●The ignition switch is turned ON.

When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊

3, the

interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door

position. The puddle lights (if so equipped) and

cargo light come on when any front or rear pas-

senger door is opened.

The lights will turn off automatically after a period

of time while doors are open to prevent the bat-

tery from becoming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

LIC0792

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Instruments and controls 2-85

CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)

The console light will turn on whenever the park-

ing lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be adjusted

with the illumination brightness control.

MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)

To turn the map lights on, push the switches. To

turn them off, push the switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped)

To turn the rear personal lights on, push the

switch. To turn them off, push the switch again.

LIC3405 LIC0790

Rear personal lights

LIC0790

2-86 Instruments and controls

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides

a convenient way to consolidate the functions of

up to three individual hand-held transmitters into

one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

●Will operate most Radio Frequency devices

such as garage doors, gates, home and of-

fice lighting, entry door locks and security

systems.

●Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the vehi-

cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-

nected, HomeLink® will retain all program-

ming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver is programmed, retain the original

transmitter for future programming proce-

dures (Example: new vehicle purchases).

Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons

should be erased for security purposes. For

additional information, refer to “Program-

ming HomeLink®” in this section.

WARNING

●Do not use the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and re-

verse features as required by federal

safety standards. (These standards be-

came effective for opener models

manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-

rage door opener which cannot detect

an object in the path of a closing garage

door and then automatically stop and

reverse, does not meet current federal

safety standards. Using a garage door

opener without these features in-

creases the risk of serious injury or

death.

●During the programming procedure

your garage door or security gate will

open and close (if the transmitter is

within range). Make sure that people or

objects are clear of the garage door,

gate, etc. that you are programming.

●Your vehicle’s engine should be turned

off while programming the HomeLink®

Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

If you have any questions or are having difficulty

programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to

the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion when programming HomeLink®. It is

also recommended that a new battery be

placed in the hand-held transmitter of the

device being programmed to HomeLink®

for quicker programming and accurate

transmission of the radio frequency.

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-87

1. Position the end of your hand-held transmit-

ter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from the

HomeLink® surface, keeping the

HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

1in view.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and

hold the desired HomeLink® button and

hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT re-

lease until the HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the

indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons

may be released. (The rapid flashing indi-

cates successful programming.)

NOTE:

Some devices may require you to replace

Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in

“Programming HomeLink® for Canadian

customers and gate openers” in this sec-

tion.

3. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button and observe the indica-

tor light.

●If the indicator light 䊊

1is

solid/continuous, programming is

complete and your device should acti-

vate when the HomeLink® button is

pressed and released.

●If the indicator light 䊊

1blinks rapidly for

2 seconds and then turns to a

solid/continuous light, continue

with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device.

A second person may make the following

steps easier. Use a ladder or other device.

Do not stand on your vehicle to perform

the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage door

opener motor in the garage, locate the

“learn” or “smart” button (the name and color

of the button may vary by manufacturer but it

is usually located near where the hanging

antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there

is difficulty locating the button, reference the

garage door opener’s manual.

Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button.

LIC2365 LIC2366

2-88 Instruments and controls

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and

hold the trained HomeLink® button for

2 seconds and release. Repeat the

“press/hold/release” sequence up to three

times to complete the training process.

HomeLink® should now activate your rolling

code equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are having diffi-

culty programming your HomeLink® but-

tons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND

GATE OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmit-

ter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several

seconds of transmission – which may not be long

enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal

during training. Similar to this Canadian law,

some U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim-

eout” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties

training a gate operator or garage door opener

by using the “Training” procedures, replace

“Programming HomeLink®” Step 2 with the fol-

lowing:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,

etc., unplug the device during the “cycling”

process to prevent possible damage to the

garage door opener components.

For additional information, refer to “Program-

ming HomeLink®” step 1 in this section.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and

hold the desired HomeLink® button and the

hand-held transmitter button. During train-

ing, your hand-held transmitter may auto-

matically stop transmitting. Continue to

press and hold the desired HomeLink® but-

ton while you press and re-press (“cycle”)

your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds

until the frequency signal has been learned.

The HomeLink® indicator light will flash

slowly and then rapidly after several seconds

upon successful training. DO NOT release

until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes

slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator

light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be

released. The rapid flashing indicates suc-

cessful training.

Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®”

step 3 to complete.

If the device was unplugged during the pro-

gramming procedure, remember to plug it

back in when programming is completed.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after it is

programmed, can be used to activate the pro-

grammed device. To operate, simply press and

release the appropriate programmed

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The

amber indicator light will illuminate while the sig-

nal is being transmitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the

device may also be used at any time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the

hand-held transmitter information:

●replace the hand-held transmitter batteries

with new batteries.

●position the hand-held transmitter with its

battery area facing away from the

HomeLink® surface.

●press and hold both the HomeLink® and

hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-

ruption.

Instruments and controls 2-89

●position the hand-held transmitter 1 -

3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the

HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in

that position for up to 15 seconds. If

HomeLink® is not programmed within that

time, try holding the transmitter in another

position – keeping the indicator light in view

at all times.

If you have any questions or are having difficulty

programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to

the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

The following procedure clears the programmed

information from both buttons. Individual buttons

cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons

can be reprogrammed. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Reprogramming a single

HomeLink® button” in this section.

To clear all programming:

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink®

buttons until the indicator light begins to

flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not

hold for longer than 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the programming mode

and can be programmed at any time beginning

with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINK® BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver button, complete the following:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® but-

ton. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after

20 seconds. Without releasing the

HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink®

at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515

(except Mexico).

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button

has now been reprogrammed. The new device

can be activated by pushing the HomeLink®

button that was just programmed. This procedure

will not affect any other programmed HomeLink®

buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the

codes of any non-rolling code device that has

been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the

Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-

facturer or dealer of those devices for additional

information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink® Univer-

sal Transceiver with your new transmitter

information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

2-90 Instruments and controls

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

Instruments and controls 2-91

MEMO

2-92 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys.............................................3-2

NISSAN Intelligent Key® . .......................3-2

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys .........3-4

Doors ............................................3-5

Locking with key................................3-5

Locking with inside lock knob ....................3-6

Locking with power door lock switch . . . ..........3-7

Automatic door locks ...........................3-7

Child safety rear door lock.......................3-7

NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...........................3-8

Operating range................................3-9

Door locks/unlocks precaution ...................3-9

NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation .............3-10

How to use the remote keyless entry

function ......................................3-13

Warning signals ...............................3-17

Troubleshooting guide .........................3-17

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ...............3-19

Remote engine start operating range . . . .........3-19

Remote starting the vehicle .....................3-19

Extending engine run time ......................3-20

Canceling a remote start .......................3-20

Conditions the remote start will not work .........3-20

Hood ...........................................3-21

Fuel-filler door ...................................3-22

Diesel fuel engines ............................3-22

Gasoline fuel engines ..........................3-22

Steering wheel ...................................3-24

Manual operation (if so equipped) ...............3-24

Automatic operation (if so equipped).............3-25

Sun visors .......................................3-26

Vanity mirrors (if so equipped)...................3-26

Card holder (driver’s side only)..................3-27

Mirrors ..........................................3-27

Manual anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ...............................3-27

Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ...............................3-27

Outside mirrors ...............................3-28

Truck box ........................................3-32

Tailgate.......................................3-32

Tie down hooks ...............................3-36

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) ..........3-36

Memory storage function .......................3-37

Entry/exit function .............................3-38

System operation..............................3-38

1. Master key

2. Transponder chip

3. Key number plate

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe place

(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose

your keys, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key

number. NISSAN does not record key numbers

so it is very important to keep track of your key

number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all your keys. If you still have a key, it can be

duplicated without knowing the key number.

1. Intelligent Key (two sets)

2. Mechanical key

3. Key number plate (one plate)

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent

Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-

ligent Key system components and NISSAN Ve-

hicle Immobilizer System components.

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2130

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD0350

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-

tered and used with one vehicle. The new keys

must be registered prior to the use with the

Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Im-

mobilizer System of your vehicle. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service. Since the registration process requires

erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo-

nents when registering new keys, be sure to take

all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN

dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe place

(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose

your keys, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key

number. NISSAN does not record key numbers

so it is very important to keep track of your key

number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated

without knowing the key number.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelligent

Key:

●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

●Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

●Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 60°C (140°F).

●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-

gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the

unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate

the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing

procedure, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

Type C (if so equipped)

LPD2279

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock

knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into

the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to

the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the

driver’s door or tailgate.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installed

in the Intelligent Key slot.

For additional information, refer to “Doors” or

“Tailgate” in this section.

Valet hand-off

When you have to leave a key with a valet, give

them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-

chanical key with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box and tailgate from being

opened during valet hand-off, follow the proce-

dures below:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-

gent Key.

2. Lock the glove box and tailgate with the

mechanical key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and

keep the mechanical key with you.

For additional information, refer to “Storage” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual and “Tailgate” in this section.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the Intelli-

gent Keys which are registered to the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your

vehicle.

The mechanical key can be used for all the locks.

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can

be duplicated without knowing the key number.

As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System keys can be used with one vehicle. You

should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer for

registration. This is because the registration pro-

cess will erase the memory of all key codes

previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System. After the registration pro-

cess, these components will only recognize keys

coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem during registration. Any key that is not given

to the dealer at the time of registration will no

longer be able to start your vehicle.

SPA1951

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system key,

which contains an electrical transponder,

to come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect system function.

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors cannot be opened

using the inside or outside door handles. The

doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

●Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assistance

of others or pets unattended in your

vehicle. Additionally, the temperature

inside a closed vehicle on a warm day

can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

LOCKING WITH KEY

To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as

shown.

Manual

To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the

vehicle 䊊

1. To unlock, turn the key toward the rear

䊊

Driver’s side

WPD0311

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Power

The power door lock system allows you to lock or

unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front 䊊

1of the vehicle

locks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊

2of the

vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,

returning the key to neutral 䊊

3(where the key can

only be removed and inserted) and turning it

toward the rear again 䊊

4within 5 seconds un-

locks all doors.

Opening and closing windows

The driver’s door key operation allows you to

open and close windows equipped with auto-

matic operation at the same time.

●To open the windows, turn the driver’s door

key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second after the door is unlocked.

●To close the windows, turn the driver’s door

key toward the front of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second after the door is locked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

NOTE:

When the window lock button on the door

trim is pressed the key will not operate the

window open or close function.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK

KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position 䊊

1, then close the

door.

To unlock the door without the key, move the

inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊

Driver’s side

LPD0240

Inside lock

LPD2092

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the door

lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to

the lock position 䊊

1. When locking the door this

way, be certain not to leave the key inside the

vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the

door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s

side) to the unlock position 䊊

Lockout protection

With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle, if all

doors are closed, a chime will sound after the last

door is closed and all doors will unlock automati-

cally.

These functions help to prevent the Intelligent

Key from being accidentally locked inside the

vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

●All doors lock automatically when the vehicle

speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).

●All doors unlock automatically when the ig-

nition is placed in the OFF position. CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors

from being opened accidentally, especially when

small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on the

edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position 䊊

2, the

door can be opened from the outside or the

inside.

When the lever is in the LOCK position 䊊

the door can be opened only from the out-

side.

WPD0381 LPD2433

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pressed.

The FAA advises the radio waves may

affect aircraft navigation and communi-

cation systems. Do not operate the In-

telligent Key while on an airplane. Make

sure the buttons are not operated unin-

tentionally when the unit is stored for a

flight.

●Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the

door locks using the remote control function or

pushing the request switch on the vehicle without

taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The

operating environment and/or conditions may af-

fect the Intelligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you when operating the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is capable of receiving and

transmitting radio waves. The Intelligent Key sys-

tem transmits weak radio waves from various

distances. Environmental conditions may inter-

fere with the operation of the Intelligent Key sys-

tem under the following operating conditions:

●When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, such as

a TV tower, power station and broadcasting

station.

●When in possession of wireless equipment,

such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, or a

CB radio.

●When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or

covered by metallic materials.

●When any type of radio wave remote control

is used nearby.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed near an

electric appliance such as a personal com-

puter.

●When the vehicle is parked near a parking

meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions

before using the Intelligent Key function or use

the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending

on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is

approximately two years. If the battery is dis-

charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, a yellow

indicator illuminates with the message “Warning,

Key ID Incorrect” in the vehicle information dis-

play. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display warnings and indicators” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

Since the Intelligent Key is capable of receiving

radio waves, if the key is left near equipment

which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-

nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-

tery life may become shorter.

For additional information, refer to “Battery re-

placement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-

tered and used with one vehicle. For information

about the purchase and use of additional Intelli-

gent Keys, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range from the request switch 䊊

1(if so

equipped).

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or

strong radio waves are present near the operat-

ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range

becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may

not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)

from each request switch 䊊

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,

handle or rear bumper, the request switches may

not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even someone

who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the

request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

●Do not push the door handle request switch

with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as

illustrated. The close distance to the door

handle will cause the Intelligent Key system

to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-

gent Key is outside the vehicle.

●After locking with the door handle request

switch, verify the doors are securely locked

by testing them.

LPD2338 WPD0375

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

●To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left

inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you and then lock the

doors.

●Do not pull the door handle before pushing

the door handle request switch. The door

will be unlocked but will not open. Release

the door handle once and pull it again to

open the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking

the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you

can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door

handle request switch within the range of opera-

tion.

Locking doors

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position,

place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion and make sure you carry the Intelligent

Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push the door handle request switch (if so

equipped) while carrying the Intelligent Key

with you.

4. All doors will lock.

5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice, the

outside buzzer sounds twice, and the front

and tail lights will turn on for 10 seconds.

LPD2382 LPD2383

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

●Request switches (if so equipped) for

all doors can be deactivated when the

“I-Key Door Lock” setting is switched

to OFF in the Vehicle Settings of the

vehicle information display. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle in-

formation display” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

●Doors lock with the door handle re-

quest switch 䊊

1while the ignition

switch is not in the LOCK position.

●Doors do not lock by pushing the door

handle request switch while any door is

open. However, doors lock with the

mechanical key even if any door is

open.

●Doors do not lock with the door handle

request switch with the Intelligent Key

inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to

warn you. However, when an Intelligent

Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be

locked with another Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

●After locking the doors using the re-

quest switch (if so equipped), make

sure that the doors have been securely

locked by operating the door handles.

●When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure to have the

Intelligent Key in your possession be-

fore operating the request switch to

prevent the Intelligent Key from being

left in the vehicle.

●The request switch is operational only

when the Intelligent Key has been de-

tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-

dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection

is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When any door is open, the doors are locked,

and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the

vehicle and all the doors are closed; a chime will

sound and the lock will automatically unlock.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-

gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-

ating the request switch to lock the door.

Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or

your other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not function

under the following conditions:

●When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the instrument panel.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the glove box or a storage bin.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the door pockets.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side or near metallic materials.

LPD2384

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch (if so

equipped).

3. The door will unlock and the hazard indicator

lights flash once, the outside buzzer sounds

once, and the front and tail lights will turn on

for 30 seconds.

4. Push the door handle request switch again

within one minute, the outside buzzer

sounds once and the remaining doors un-

lock.

NOTE:

●If Selective Unlock is turned OFF in the

Vehicle Settings, all doors will unlock

upon the first request switch 䊊

1press.

●The request switch can be deactivated

when the “I-Key Door Lock” is switched

to OFF in the Vehicle Settings of the

vehicle information display. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle in-

formation display” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the

doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning

the door handle to its original position will unlock

the door. If the door does not unlock after return-

ing the door handle, push the door handle re-

quest switch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within

one minute after pushing the request switch.

●Opening any door.

●Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a period of

time when a door is unlocked and the room light

switch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waiting

by performing one of the following operations:

●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion.

●Locking the doors with the remote control.

●Switching the room light switch to the OFF

position.

●Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF

position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle

information display. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls”section of this

manual.

LPD2383 LPD2384

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE

KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can operate all

door locks using the remote keyless function of

the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function

can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away

from the vehicle. The operating distance de-

pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-

tion under the following conditions:

●When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range.

●When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-

gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in

the vehicle.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice, the

horn beeps once, and the front and tail lights

will turn on for 10 seconds.

5. All doors will be locked.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-

gent Key, be sure that the doors have been

securely locked by operating the door

handles.

LPD2257

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Unlocking doors

1. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

2. The driver’s door will unlock and the hazard

indicator light flash once, and the front and

tail lights will turn on for 30 seconds.

3. Press the button again within one

minute, the outside buzzer sounds once and

the remaining doors unlock.

NOTE:

If Selective Unlock is turned off in the Ve-

hicle Settings, all doors will unlock upon

the first press of the Intelligent Key

remote. For additional information, refer to

“Vehicle information display” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this

manual.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within

one minute after pressing the button:

●Opening any doors.

●Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light illuminates for a period of time

when a door is unlocked and the room light

switch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting by

performing one of the following operations:

●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion.

●Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.

●Switching the room light switch to the OFF

position.

●Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF

position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle

information display. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls”section of this

manual.

Opening windows

The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously

open windows equipped with automatic opera-

tion.

●To open the windows, press and hold

the button on the Intelligent Key for

longer than 3 seconds.

The door windows will lower while holding down

the button on the Intelligent Key.

NOTE:

The windows will stop lowering at the time

the button is released.

The door windows cannot be closed by

using the Intelligent Key.

LPD2258

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the panic alarm to call attention

by pressing and holding the button on the

Intelligent Key for longer than 1 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a

period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

●It has run for a period of time, or

●Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

●The request switch (if so equipped) on the

driver’s door is pushed and the Intelligent

Key is in range of the door handle.

Trailer light check (if so equipped)

This functionality allows the customer to confirm

trailer light operation, without the need of a sec-

ond person to press the brake pedal or activate

each turn signal light. The trailer light check can

be performed by the Intelligent Key or through the

Vehicle Settings in the vehicle information dis-

play. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

To activate the trailer light check function with

your Intelligent Key, perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

WPD0374 LPD2257

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

2. Press and release the LOCK but-

ton.

3. Within 2 seconds, press and hold

the LOCK button again for at least

2 seconds, until the horn beeps once and

the park lights turn on.

The following events will occur:

●The left turn signal light on the vehicle and

the trailer will flash for 5 seconds.

●The right turn signal light on the vehicle and

the trailer will flash for 5 seconds.

●The brake lights on the vehicle and the trailer

will turn ON for 5 seconds.

NOTE:

If the ignition switch is in the OFF position,

the park lights will turn off after the events

above occur. If ignition switch is in the ON

position, lights will stay on for 45 seconds

after trailer light check. If the trailer lights

do not work properly, check the connec-

tions and bulbs. If the vehicle lights do not

turn on, check the bulbs. If the trailer light

check routine fails to start, ensure the fol-

lowing vehicle conditions:

●The vehicle is NOT moving, 0 mph (0 km/h)

●Brake switch is NOT depressed

●Left or right flasher is OFF

●Trailer light check configuration is NOT dis-

abled and available in the meter towing set-

tings

●The hazard switch is NOT turned ON

●The shift position is fully in P (Park) position

●Vehicle is within Remote Keyless Entry

range

Answer back horn feature

If desired, the answer back horn feature can be

deactivated using the Intelligent Key. When it is

deactivated and the LOCK button is

pushed, the hazard indicator lights flash twice.

When the UNLOCK button is pushed, nei-

ther the hazard indicator lights nor the horn op-

erates.

LPD2259

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

If you change the answer back horn and

light flash feature with the Intelligent Key,

the vehicle information display screen will

show the current mode after the ignition

switch has been cycled from the OFF to the

ON position. The vehicle information dis-

play screen can also be used to change the

answer back horn mode.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard indicator lights will flash three times to

confirm that the answer back horn feature has

been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds once

more.

The hazard indicator lights will flash once and the

horn will sound once to confirm that the horn

beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-

lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-

pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent

Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being

stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and

outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in

the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is

displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the

Intelligent Key.

For additional information, refer to “Troubleshoot-

ing guide” in this section and “Vehicle information

display” in the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are

programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent

Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle

system may respond differently than expected.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch to stop

the engine

The red “Shift to Park” warning appears on

the vehicle information display and the in-

side warning chime sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

When shifting the shift lever to the P (Park)

position

The Push ignition to OFF warning appears

in the display. The ignition switch is in the ACC position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

When opening the driver’s door to get out

of the vehicle

The door open warning appears on the dis-

play and the inside warning chime sounds

continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position. Place the ignition switch in the ON position

or close the driver’s door.

When closing the door after getting out of

the vehicle

The yellow “No Key Detected” warning ap-

pears on the vehicle information display, the

outside chime sounds three times and the

inside warning chime sounds for approxi-

mately three seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not detected inside of

the vehicle.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The red “Shift to Park” warning appears on

the vehicle information display and the in-

side and outside chimes sound

continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF

position and the shift lever is not in the P

(Park) position.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When closing the door with the inside lock

knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximately

three seconds and all the doors unlock. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle request

switch or the LOCK button on the Intelli-

gent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approximately

three seconds. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition switch to start

the engine

The Intelligent Key battery indicator appears

on the display. The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one. For

additional information, refer to “Battery re-

placement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

The yellow “Key ID Incorrect” warning ap-

pears on the vehicle information display.

The Intelligent Key is not detected inside of

the vehicle.

Carry the registered Intelligent Key with

you.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The button will be on the NISSAN Intelli-

gent Key® if the vehicle has remote engine start.

This feature allows the engine to start from out-

side the vehicle.

The following features may be affected when the

remote start feature is used:

●Vehicles with manual or automatic climate

control systems will default to the last used

heating or cooling mode. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Remote engine start

logic” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone

and voice recognition systems” section of

this manual.

Laws in some local communities may restrict the

use of remote starters. For example, some laws

require a person using remote start to have the

vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any

requirements.

Other conditions may affect the function of the

Remote Engine Start feature. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Conditions the remote start will

not work” in this section.

Other conditions can affect the performance of

the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional in-

formation, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in

this section.

REMOTE ENGINE START

OPERATING RANGE

CAUTION

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or other strong radio wave

sources are present near the operating

location, the Intelligent Key operating

range becomes narrower, and the Intelli-

gent Key may not function properly.

The remote engine start function can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within the speci-

fied operating range from the vehicle.

The remote engine start operating range is ap-

proximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE

To use the remote start feature to start the engine

perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the LOCK button to lock all

doors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the

remote start button until the turn signal lights

flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the vehicle

is not within view press and hold the

remote start button for at least 2 seconds.

The following events will occur when the engine

starts:

●The parking lights will turn on and remain on

as long as the engine is running.

●The doors will be locked and the climate

control system may come on.

●The engine will continue to run for 10 min-

utes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for

an additional 10 minutes. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Extending engine run

time” in this section.

Depress and hold the brake then press the push-

button ignition switch to the ON position before

driving. For additional information, refer to “Driv-

ing the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

LPD2293

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so

equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME

The remote start feature can be extended one

time by performing the steps listed in “Remote

starting the vehicle” in this section. Run time will

be calculated as follows:

●The first 10 minute run time will start when

the remote start function is performed.

●The second 10 minutes will start immedi-

ately when the remote start function is per-

formed again. For example, if the engine has

been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes

are added, the engine will run for a total of

15 minutes.

●Extending engine run time will bring you to

the two remote start limit.

A maximum of two remote starts, or a single start

with an extension, are allowed between ignition

cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled to the

ON position and then back to the OFF position

before the remote start procedure can be used

again.

CANCELING A REMOTE START

To cancel a remote start, perform one of the

following:

●Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and

press until the parking lights turn off.

●Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

●Cycle the ignition switch ON and then OFF.

●The extended engine run time has expired.

●The first 10 minute timer has expired.

●The engine hood has been opened.

●The shift lever is moved out of park.

●The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the

vehicle.

●The ignition switch is pushed without an

Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

●The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelli-

gent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is

not depressed.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE START

WILL NOT WORK

The remote start will not operate if any of the

following conditions are present:

●“Remote Engine Start” is turned off in the

“Locking” section of the Vehicle Settings

menu.

●The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition.

●The hood is not securely closed.

●The hazard warning lights are on.

●The engine is still running. The engine must

be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 sec-

onds if the engine goes from running to off.

This is not applicable when extending en-

gine run time.

●The remote start button is not pressed

and held for at least 2 seconds.

●The remote start button is not pressed

and held within 5 seconds of pressing the

lock button.

●The brake is pressed.

●The doors are not closed and locked.

●The Intelligent Key warning message ap-

pears in the vehicle information display.

●The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the

vehicle.

●Two remote vehicle starts, or a single remote

start with an extension, have already been

used.

●The vehicle is not in P (Park).

●There is a detected registered key already

inside of the vehicle.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

●The remote start function has been switched

to the OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the

vehicle information display. For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle information dis-

play” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

The remote engine start may display a warning or

indicator in the vehicle information display. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle informa-

tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊

1located

below the driver side instrument panel. The

hood will spring up slightly.

2. Push the lever at the front of the hood to the

side 䊊

2as illustrated with your fingertips and

raise the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make

sure it locks into place.

WARNING

●Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving. Fail-

ure to do so could cause the hood to fly

open and result in an accident.

●If you see steam or smoke coming from

the engine compartment, to avoid injury

do not open the hood.

LPD0244

HOOD

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

DIESEL FUEL ENGINES

For additional information, refer to the separate

Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

GASOLINE FUEL ENGINES

WARNING

●Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seriously

injured if it is misused or mishandled.

Always stop the engine and do not

smoke or allow open flames or sparks

near the vehicle when refueling.

●Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling may

cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel

spray and possibly a fire.

●Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a

built-in safety valve needed for proper

operation of the fuel system and emis-

sion control system. An incorrect cap

can result in a serious malfunction and

possible injury. It could also cause

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to come on.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body to

attempt to start your vehicle.

●Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable fuel

containers:

– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

LPD2434

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are fill-

ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-

tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. For additional information, re-

fer to “Fuel recommendation” in the

“Technical and consumer information”

section of this manual.

●The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap-

pear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly

tightened. It may take a few driving trips

for the message to be displayed. Failure

to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly

after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning ap-

pears may cause the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

●Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

If the light illuminates because

the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,

tighten or install the cap and continue

to drive the vehicle. The light

should turn off after a few driving trips.

If the light does not turn off after a

few driving trips, have the vehicle in-

spected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

●If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to

remove.

2. Loop the tether strap around the hook 䊊

while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-

filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a

single click is heard.

LPD2435

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the

vehicle information display when the fuel-filler

cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has

been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for

the message to be displayed. To turn off the

warning, perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as pre-

viously described as soon as possible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until clicks are

heard.

WARNING

●Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

●Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for

proper steering operation and comfort.

The driver’s air bag inflates with great

force. If you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-

tion in any way, you are at greater risk of

injury or death in a crash. You may also

receive serious or fatal injuries from the

air bag if you are up against it when it

inflates. Always sit back against the

seatback and as far away as practical

from the steering wheel. Always use the

seat belts.

MANUAL OPERATION (if so

equipped)

Tilt and telescopic operation

Pull the lock lever 䊊

1down:

●Adjust the steering wheel up or down in

direction 䊊

2to the desired position.

●Adjust the steering wheel forward or back-

ward in direction 䊊

3to the desired position.

Push the lock lever 䊊

1up firmly to lock the

steering wheel in place.

LPD2387 LPD2395

STEERING WHEEL

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so

equipped)

Tilt and telescopic operation

To adjust the steering wheel move the switch 䊊

in the following directions:

●Adjust the steering wheel up or down in

direction 䊊

2to the desired tilt position.

●Adjust the steering wheel forward or back-

ward in direction 䊊

3to the desired tele-

scopic position.

CAUTION

For vehicles with automatic drive posi-

tioner: Failure to reset the tilt and tele-

scoping functions of the steering wheel,

after the vehicle’s battery has been dis-

charged, may prevent the steering wheel

position from being adjusted.

For vehicles with automatic drive positioner: Both

the tilt and telescopic steering operation must be

reset after the vehicle’s battery has been dis-

charged in order to prevent the tilt and telescopic

operation from locking in one position. When the

battery has been recharged or replaced, perform

the following:

●For tilt operation: Adjust the switch 䊊

1so

the steering wheel moves to the highest

position 䊊

2that can be reached.

●For telescopic operation: Adjust the switch

䊊

1so the steering wheel moves to the most

forward and backward position 䊊

3that can

be reached.

Performing these operations resets the range of

the steering wheel’s tilt and telescopic function.

Entry/Exit function (if so equipped)

The automatic drive positioner system will make

the steering wheel move up automatically when

the driver’s door is opened and the ignition

switch is in the LOCK position. This lets the driver

get into and out of the seat more easily. The

steering wheel moves back into position when

the driver’s door is closed and the ignition switch

is pushed.

For additional information, refer to “Automatic

drive positioner” in this section.

WPD0366

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

1. To block glare from the front, swing down 䊊

the sun visor.

2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun

visor from the center mount and swing the

visor to the side 䊊

3. To extend the sun visor, slide 䊊

3in or out as

needed.

CAUTION

●Do not store the sun visor before return-

ing the extension to its original

position.

●Do not pull the extension sun visor

forcedly downward. VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor

down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity

mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the

mirror cover is open.

WPD0344

LPD2289

SUN VISORS

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CARD HOLDER (driver’s side only)

To access the card holder, slide card in the card

holder. Do not view information while operating

the vehicle.

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW

MIRROR (if so equipped)

Use the night position 䊊

1to reduce glare from

the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position 䊊

2when driving in daylight

hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-

cally dims during night time conditions and ac-

cording to the intensity of the headlights of the

vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare

feature is activated when the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

The indicator light 䊊

2will illuminate when the

automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensors

䊊

1or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.

Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the

sensors, resulting in improper operation.

LPD2436 WPD0126

MIRRORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

Type A (if so equipped)

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press

the O button. The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,

press the | button. The indicator light will turn

on.

For additional information, refer to the

“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this manual.

Type B (if so equipped)

●To turn off the anti-glare feature, press

the button. The indicator light will turn

off.

●To turn on the anti-glare feature, press

the button again. The indicator light

will turn on.

For additional information about the compass

and compass features 䊊

3, refer to “Compass” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

For additional information, refer to the

“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this manual.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

●Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

You could lose control of your vehicle

and cause an accident.

Type A - Without compass (if so equipped)

LPD0469

Type B - With compass (if so equipped)

LPD2419

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Manual control type (if so equipped)

The outside mirror can be moved in any direction

for a better rear view.

Electric control type (if so equipped)

The outside mirror remote control will operate

only when the ignition switch is placed in the

ACC or ON position.

Rotate the control lever to select the right or left

mirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position by

moving the control lever.

Trailer tow mirrors (if so equipped)

WARNING

Objects viewed in the convex portion of

the trailer tow mirror are closer than they

appear. Be careful when changing lanes or

turning. Using only the convex mirror

could cause an accident. Use the other

mirrors or glance over your shoulder to

properly judge distances to other objects.

Use the outside mirror remote control to adjust

the top portion of the trailer tow mirror.

WPD0170 LPD0346 LPD2474

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

The lower portion of the trailer tow mirror can be

moved manually in any direction for a better rear

view.

Pull the trailer tow mirror outward to extend it to

the desired position for better visibility while tow-

ing a trailer.

WARNING

Do not extend or retract mirrors while driv-

ing. You may lose control of your vehicle

and cause an accident.

CAUTION

Driving in tight spaces with mirrors ex-

tended may cause damage to the vehicle.

Power folding outside mirrors (if so

equipped)

CAUTION

Do not manually fold the power folding

mirrors. Manually folding the mirrors can

damage the mirrors.

Press the switch to open or close the mirrors.

If one of the mirrors are manually operated or

bumped, the mirror body can become loose at

the pivot point. To correct electronic mirror op-

eration, cycle the mirrors by pushing the

“CLOSE” switch until completely closed, then

push the “OPEN” switch until the mirrors are in

the open position.

LPD0268 LPD0417

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Manual folding outside mirrors (if so

equipped)

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so

equipped)

The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both out-

side mirror surfaces downward to provide better

rear visibility close to the vehicle when the mirror

control switch is in either the L or R position.

The mirrors automatically return to their original

position when you shift out of R (Reverse).

The outside mirror surfaces will return to their

original position when one of the following con-

ditions has occurred:

●The shift lever is moved to any position other

than R (Reverse).

●The outside mirror control switch is set to the

neutral or center position.

●The ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

NOTE:

If the outside mirror control switch is in the

“center” position, the mirror surface will

NOT turn downward when the shift lever is

moved to R (Reverse).

For additional information, refer to “Automatic

drive positioner” in this section.

Automatic anti-glare outside mirror (if

so equipped)

The outside mirror will automatically dim during

nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the

headlights of trailing vehicles. The automatic anti-

glare feature operates only when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position.

The automatic anti-glare feature will be on when

starting the vehicle. The indicator light on the

automatic anti-glare rearview mirror will illuminate

when the automatic anti-glare feature is operat-

ing.

To turn off the anti-glare feature, press the

button on the rearview mirror. The indicator light

will turn off.

To turn on the anti-glare feature again, press

the button on the rearview mirror. The in-

dicator light will turn on.

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD0259

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD0269

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

For information on the automatic anti-glare rear-

view mirror, see “Automatic anti-glare rearview

mirror” in this section.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,

defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Rear window and

outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

TAILGATE

Opening the tailgate

Pull the tailgate handle upward and lower the

tailgate. The support cables hold the tailgate

open.

When closing the tailgate, make sure the latches

are securely locked.

Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate

down, unless equipped with NISSAN’s Bed

Extender (accessory) or equivalent in the

extended position.

For additional information on proper truck box

loading, refer to “Vehicle loading information” in

the “Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

WARNING

●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seat when it is in the

folded position. Use of these areas by

passengers without proper restraints

could result in serious injury or death in

an accident or sudden stop.

●It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area inside a vehicle. In a colli-

sion, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

LPD2334

TRUCK BOX

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Disconnecting the rear camera (if so

equipped)

Before removing the tailgate disconnect the rear

camera by performing the following:

1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera

connector bracket 䊊

1located on the rear

sill.

2. Remove the connector bracket 䊊

2from the

sill by pressing the locking tab inward, in the

direction shown, while pulling the bracket

apart.

3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness 䊊

by pressing inward on the locking tab, in the

direction shown, while pulling the connec-

tors apart. Hold the connector firmly to pre-

vent the connector in the chassis harness

from falling into the sill.

4. Use the supplied chassis plug and bracket

and connect them to the chassis wiring har-

ness to avoid contamination to the terminals

which will lead to malfunction of the rear

camera.

5. Insert the bracket back into the sill.

6. Take the tailgate plug from the glove box and

connect it to the tailgate wiring harness to

avoid contamination which will lead to mal-

function of the rear camera.

7. Remove the tailgate. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Removing the tailgate” in this

section.

LPD2097

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

Removing the tailgate

1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear

camera (if so equipped). For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Disconnecting the rear

camera” in this section.

2. Release the tailgate support cables.

CAUTION

●The tailgate is heavy. Two people

should remove or install it. Be careful

not to drop it during removal.

●After releasing the support cables, do

not let the tailgate rest on the bumper.

3. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle.

4. Pull the tailgate out from the left side hinge.

5. Slide the tailgate out of the right side hinge.

Installing the tailgate

1. Insert the tailgate into the right side hinge.

2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and

insert into the left side hinge.

3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 45 degree

angle and attach the tailgate support cables.

4. For vehicles with rear camera: Be sure the

tailgate harness is not hanging below the

tailgate and keep the tailgate open. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Connecting the

rear camera” in this section before closing

the tailgate.

5. For vehicles without rear camera: Close the

tailgate securely.

LPD0271

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Connecting the rear camera (if so

equipped)

Before closing the tailgate reconnect the rear

camera by performing the following:

1. After attaching the rear tailgate to the truck,

keep the tailgate open and check that the

tailgate harness is not hanging below the

tailgate.

2. Remove the connector bracket 䊊

2from the

sill by pressing the locking tab inward, in the

direction shown, while pulling the bracket

apart.

3. Disconnect the chassis plug and bracket

from the chassis wiring harness 䊊

3. Keep

the connector and bracket in a safe place

such as the glove box.

4. Disconnect the tailgate plug from the tail-

gate wiring harness. Keep the tailgate plug

in a safe place such as the glove box.

5. Connect the tailgate wiring harness to the

chassis wiring harness.

6. Securely fix the rear camera connector

bracket 䊊

1to the rear sill.

7. Close the tailgate securely.

Locking the tailgate

To unlock the tailgate, turn the key toward the

passenger side of the vehicle 䊊

1. To lock, turn the

key toward the driver side 䊊

LPD2097 LPD2388

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

TIE DOWN HOOKS

For your convenience, tie down hooks are placed

at each corner of the truck box. These may be

used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck

box.

●The weight of the cargo load must be evenly

distributed over the rear axles.

●All cargo should be securely fastened with

ropes or straps to prevent it from shifting or

sliding within the vehicle.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause personal

injury.

The automatic drive positioner system has two

features:

●Memory storage function

●Entry/exit function

LPD2393

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if

so equipped)

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering column,

and outside mirrors (if so equipped) can be stored

in the automatic drive positioner memory. Follow

these procedures to use the memory system.

1. Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position

(the vehicle should be stopped while setting

the memory).

Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column, and

outside mirrors (if so equipped) to the desired

positions by manually operating each adjust-

ing switch. For additional information, refer to

“Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of this

manual, and “Steering wheel” and “Outside

mirrors” in this section.

3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,

push the memory switch (1 or 2).

4. The indicator light for the pushed memory

switch will come ON and stay ON for ap-

proximately 5 seconds.

5. The chime will sound if the memory has been

stored.

NOTE:

If a NEW memory position is stored in the

same memory switch, the previous memory

position will be overwritten by the new

stored position.

Confirming memory storage

Push the SET switch.

●If a memory position has not been stored in

the switch (1 or 2) the indicator light for the

respective switch will come ON for approxi-

mately 0.5 seconds.

●If a memory position has been stored in the

switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light for the

respective switch will stay ON for approxi-

mately 5 seconds.

Linking a key fob to a stored memory

position

Each key fob can be linked to a stored memory

position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-

ing procedure.

1. Follow steps 1-3 in the “Memory Storage

Function” section for storing the memory

position.

2. The indicator light for the pushed memory

switch will come ON. While the indicator

light is ON for 5 seconds, press the

button on the key fob. The indicator light of

the linked memory switch will blink. After the

indicator light goes off, the key fob is linked

to that memory setting.

Once it is linked, when the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF position, pressing the

button on the key fob will move the driver’s seat,

steering wheel and outside mirrors to the linked

memory switch position.

NOTE:

If a NEW memory position is stored in the

linked memory switch, then the key fob will

link the NEW position and overwrites the

previous position.

LPD2302

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s seat

and automatic operation steering column will au-

tomatically move when the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position. This allows the driver to get into

and out of the driver’s seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward and the

steering column will move up:

●When the driver’s door is opened with the

ignition switch placed in the OFF position.

●When the ignition switch is changed from

ACC to OFF with the driver’s door open.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return to

the previous position:

●When the ignition switch is changed from

ACC or ON while the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-

celed through the vehicle settings in the vehicle

information display by performing the following:

●Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to OFF.

●Switch the Exit Steering UP from ON to

OFF.

Restarting the entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the stored memory positions will be lost

and some of the functions will be restricted:

1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h).

2. Open and close the driver’s door more than

two times with the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The entry/exit function should now work properly.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will not

work or will stop operating under the following

conditions:

●When the vehicle speed is above 0 mph

(0 km/h) or 4 mph (7km/h) for some limited

functions such as linking a key fob to the

meter when the power source is turned on

from off or during the Exit function.

●When any of the memory switches are

pushed while the automatic drive positioner

is operating.

●When the adjusting switch for the driver’s

seat and steering column is turned on while

the automatic drive positioner is operating.

●When the seat has already been moved to

the memorized position.

●When no seat position is stored in the

memory switch.

●When the shift lever is moved from P (Park)

to any other position.

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MEMO

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems

Control panel buttons — color screen with

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..................4-4

How to use the touch-screen . . ..................4-5

How to use the BACK button ..............4-7

How to use the [ ] button ..................4-7

button...................................4-9

How to use the CAMERA button .................4-9

RearView Monitor (if so equipped)..................4-10

RearView Monitor system operation .............4-11

How to read the displayed lines .................4-11

Difference between predicted and actual

distances .....................................4-12

Adjusting the screen ...........................4-14

RearView Monitor system limitations .............4-14

System maintenance...........................4-15

Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) .............4-16

Around View® Monitor system operation.........4-17

Difference between predicted and actual

distances .....................................4-20

How to park with predicted course lines..........4-22

How to switch the display ......................4-23

Adjusting the screen ...........................4-24

Around View® Monitor system limitations ........4-25

System maintenance...........................4-27

Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so equipped) ....4-28

MOD system operation.........................4-29

Turning MOD on and off........................4-30

MOD system limitations ........................4-31

System maintenance...........................4-32

Vents ...........................................4-32

Heater and air conditioner (manual)

(if so equipped) ..................................4-33

Controls......................................4-34

Heater operation ..............................4-35

Air conditioner operation .......................4-37

Air flow charts.................................4-38

Heater and Air Conditioner (automatic)

(if so equipped) ..................................4-42

Automatic operation ...........................4-43

Manual operation ..............................4-44

Operating tips.................................4-45

Servicing air conditioner...........................4-45

Audio system ....................................4-46

Radio ........................................4-46

FM radio reception ............................4-46

AM radio reception ............................4-46

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) .........4-47

Audio operation precautions ....................4-47

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player

(if so equipped) ...............................4-54

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player (Type A) (if so equipped) .................4-58

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player (Type B) (if so equipped) .................4-64

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port

(models without Navigation System)

(if so equipped) ...............................4-70

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port

(models with Navigation System)

(if so equipped) ...............................4-72

iPod®* player operation without Navigation

System (if so equipped) ........................4-74

iPod®* player operation with Navigation

System (if so equipped) ........................4-76

Bluetooth® streaming audio without

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..............4-79

Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation

System (if so equipped) ........................4-80

CD care and cleaning ..........................4-81

Steering wheel switch for audio control ..........4-82

Antenna ......................................4-83

NissanConnect

Mobile Apps (if so equipped) .....4-84

Registering with NissanConnect

Mobile

Apps. ........................................4-84

Connect Phone ...............................4-84

Application Download..........................4-84

NissanConnect

Services (if so equipped) . ........4-85

Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) ...................4-85

Requirements .................................4-85

Siri® Activation ...............................4-86

Operating Siri® Eyes Free......................4-86

Changing Siri® Eyes Free Settings

(models with navigation system).................4-87

Troubleshooting guide .........................4-87

NISSAN Mobile Entertainment System (MES)

(if so equipped) ..................................4-89

Front panel buttons ............................4-90

Front panel buttons operation ...................4-92

Wireless Headphone Operation.................4-92

Remote control operation.......................4-94

Remote Control Buttons .......................4-95

General operating instructions ..................4-98

How to use the DVD OSD Menu ................4-99

How to use the Monitor OSD Menu ............4-104

Playing a CD.................................4-105

Playing Audio Files ...........................4-106

Playing Image Files ...........................4-108

Playing Video Files............................4-109

Charging a USB Device .......................4-110

Connecting an External Auxiliary A/V Source

— Input......................................4-110

Connecting an External A/V Monitor —

Output ......................................4-110

Selecting Monitor A or B as the Source .........4-111

Troubleshooting Guide ........................4-111

Specifications................................4-112

FCC Notice..................................4-112

FCC Warning ................................4-113

ITE Notice ...................................4-113

WEEE Notice ................................4-113

Macrovision Notice ...........................4-114

Dolby Digital .................................4-114

Car phone or CB radio ...........................4-114

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without

Navigation System (if so equipped) ................4-115

Regulatory Information ........................4-117

Using the system .............................4-117

Control buttons ..............................4-119

Connecting procedure ........................4-119

Voice commands .............................4-121

Making a call. ................................4-122

Receiving a call ..............................4-123

During a call .................................4-123

Ending a call .................................4-123

Text messaging (if so equipped) ................4-123

Bluetooth® settings ..........................4-125

Manual control . . .............................4-126

Troubleshooting guide ........................4-127

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with

Navigation System (if so equipped) ................4-128

Regulatory Information ........................4-129

Voice commands .............................4-130

Connecting Procedure ........................4-130

Vehicle phonebook ...........................4-131

Making a call. ................................4-131

Receiving a call ..............................4-131

During a call .................................4-131

Ending a call .................................4-131

Text messaging (if so equipped) ................4-132

Bluetooth® settings ..........................4-134

Phone settings ...............................4-135

Troubleshooting guide ........................4-136

NISSAN Voice Recognition System

(if so equipped) .................................4-137

Using the system .............................4-137

System features ..............................4-138

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

voice commands .............................4-139

Navigation System voice commands ............4-140

Audio system voice commands.................4-140

Information voice commands...................4-140

My Apps Voice Commands ....................4-140

Help voice commands ........................4-141

Troubleshooting guide ........................4-141

WARNING

●Positioning of the heating or air condi-

tioning controls and display controls

should not be done while driving in or-

der that full attention may be given to

the driving operation.

●Do not disassemble or modify this sys-

tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,

fire, or electrical shock.

●Do not use this system if you notice any

abnormality, such as a frozen screen or

lack of sound. Continued use of the

system may result in accident, fire or

electric shock.

●In case you notice any foreign object in

the system hardware, spill liquid on it,

or notice smoke or smell coming from it,

stop using the system immediately. Ig-

noring such conditions may lead to ac-

cidents, fire or electrical shock. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for servicing.

1. POWER button/VOLUME control knob

2. Display screen

3. ENTER/AUDIO button / TUNE-SCROLL

knob

4. BACK button

5. button

6. (brightness control) button

7. button**

8. MAP button*

LHA3904

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —

COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

9. CAMERA button

10. NAV button*

* For additional information regarding the Naviga-

tion system control buttons, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

** For additional information regarding the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System control

button, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System with Navigation System” in this section.

When you use this system, make sure the engine

is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will discharge the battery, and the

engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a

key shown only on the display. These keys can be

selected by touching the screen.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-

SCREEN

CAUTION

●The glass display screen may break if it

is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the

glass screen breaks, do not touch it.

Doing so could result in an injury.

●To clean the display, never use a rough

cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any

kind of solvent or paper towel with a

chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or deteriorate the panel.

●Do not splash any liquid such as water

or car fragrance on the display. Contact

with liquid will cause the system to

malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-

not be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not available

while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-

ate the navigation system.

WARNING

●ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving.

●Avoid using vehicle features that could

distract you. If distracted, you could

lose control of your vehicle and cause

an accident.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Touch-screen operation

Menu Item Result

Selecting the item Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Press the

BACK button to return to the previous screen.

Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one item at a time.

Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.

Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.

123/ABC Changes the available character set to numbers.

Space Inserts a space.

Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the characters.

OK Completes the character input.

LHA3712

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Touch-screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft

cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a

small amount of neutral detergent with a soft

cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-

tergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the

screen.

HOW TO USE THE BACK

BUTTON

Press the BACK button to return to the

previous screen.

HOW TO USE THE [ ] BUTTON

For additional information about the “SiriusXM

Travel Link”, and “Traffic” features, refer to the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

For additional information about the “My Apps”

key, refer to “NissanConnect

Mobile Apps” in

this section.

For additional information about the “Voice Com-

mands” key, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition

System” in this section.

To select and/or adjust several functions, fea-

tures and modes that are available for your ve-

hicle:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the desired item.

LHA3711 LHA3712

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

Menu item Result

Audio For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.

Phone & Bluetooth For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.

System Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear.

Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.

Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the display.

Display Mode Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are suited for the respec-

tive times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.

Scroll Direction Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.

Clock /Date Touch this key to adjust the time.

Time Format The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.

Date Format Select from five possible formats for displaying the day, month, and year.

Clock Mode Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows you to set the clock

using the “Set Clock Manually” key. “Time Zone” will be selected from the option below.

Set Clock /

Date Manually

Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down. “Clock Mode” must

be set to manual for this option to be available.

Daylight Sav-

ings Time

Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.

Time Zone Choose the applicable time zone from the list.

Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.

NissanConnect Services Set-

tings (if so equipped)

Touch this key to connect to NissanConnect

Service.

Camera Settings Touch this key to change the camera settings.

Display Mode Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).

Brightness Adjust touch-screen brightness using the TUNE-SCROLL knob/ ENTER button.

Contrast Adjust touch-screen contrast using the TUNE-SCROLL knob/ ENTER button.

Color Adjust touch-screen color using the TUNE-SCROLL knob/ ENTER button.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu item Result

Temperature Unit Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).

Touchscreen Click Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on the screen is touched.

System Beeps Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up message appears on the

screen or a button on the unit (such as the button) is pressed and held for 2 seconds.

Return to Factory Settings/

Clear Memory

Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

Software Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.

Minimize Voice Feedback Touch this key to turn ON or OFF to control the voice feedback.

System Software Version Touch this key to display software version information.

Traffic Touch this key to display traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Navigation For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

SXM Touch this key to start SiriusXM® radio. For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.

BUTTON

To change the display brightness, press

the button and use the TUNE-SCROLL

knob / ENTER-AUDIO button to adjust the

brightness. Pressing the button again will change

the display to day or night display mode.

If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the

display will return to the previous display.

Press and hold the button for more than

2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the button

again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE THE CAMERA

BUTTON

For additional information, refer to “RearView

Monitor” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

1. CAMERA button WARNING

●Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Rear-

View Monitor system could result in se-

rious injury or death.

●RearView Monitor is a convenience fea-

ture and is not a substitute for proper

backing. Always turn and look out the

windows and check mirrors to be sure

that it is safe to move before operating

the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

LHA4092

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so

equipped)

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in showing large stationary ob-

jects directly behind the vehicle, to help

avoid damaging the vehicle.

●The distance guide line and the vehicle

width line should be used as a reference

only when the vehicle is on a level

paved surface. The distance viewed on

the monitor is for reference only and

may be different than the actual dis-

tance between the vehicle and dis-

played objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the

camera.

The RearView Monitor system automatically

shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift

lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position.

While in R (Reverse), pressing the CAMERA

button will cycle through guideline options. The

radio can still be heard while the RearView Moni-

tor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor

system uses a camera located just above the

vehicle’s license plate 䊊

1on the tailgate.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position, move

the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to

operate the RearView Monitor.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width

and distances to objects with reference to the

vehicle body line 䊊

Aare displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

●Red line 䊊

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

●Yellow line 䊊

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

●Green line 䊊

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

●Green line 䊊

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

LHA3671 LHA3907

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Center guide lines (if so equipped) 䊊

Indicates the vehicle’s center to improve trailer

hitching guidance.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTED AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their locations on

the ground are for approximate reference only.

Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or project-

ing objects will be actually located at distances

different from those displayed in the monitor rela-

tive to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you

are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to

view the positioning of objects behind the ve-

hicle.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-

tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is further than it

appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is closer than it

appears on the monitor.

LHA3672 LHA3673

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up near a projecting object

The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object in

the display. However, the vehicle may hit the

object if it projects over the actual backing up

course.

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the position

䊊

Bin the display. However, the position 䊊

Cis

actually at the same distance as the position 䊊

The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

the position 䊊

Aif the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

LHA3912 LHA3674

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

The procedure for adjusting the display settings

of the screen differs depending on the type of

screen present on the vehicle.

1. Firmly apply the brake and place the shift

lever in R (Reverse).

2. Press the button on the control panel.

3. The screen will display the Night settings.

4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the

setting up or down.

5. Press the button again to access the

Auto settings.

6. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the

setting up or down.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings of

the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is

moving. Make sure the parking brake is

firmly applied.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

●The system cannot completely elimi-

nate blind spots and may not show ev-

ery object.

●Underneath the bumper and the corner

areas of the bumper cannot be viewed

on the RearView Monitor because of its

monitoring range limitation. The system

will not show small objects below the

bumper, and may not show objects

close to the bumper or on the ground.

●Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-

tor differ from actual distance because

a wide-angle lens is used.

●Objects in the RearView Monitor will

appear visually opposite compared to

when viewed in the rearview and out-

side mirrors.

●Use the displayed lines as a reference.

The lines are highly affected by the

number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle

position, road conditions and road

grade.

●Make sure that the tailgate is securely

closed when backing up.

●Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is in-

stalled on the tailgate.

●When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing wa-

ter condensation on the lens, a mal-

function, fire or an electric shock.

●Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-

function or cause damage resulting in a

fire or an electric shock.

LHA4296

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The following are operating limitations and do not

represent a system malfunction:

●When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not clearly display ob-

jects.

●When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

●Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the

screen. This is due to strong reflected light

from the bumper.

●The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light.

●The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-

tor may differ somewhat from the actual

color of objects.

●Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a

dark environment.

●There may be a delay when switching be-

tween views.

●If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the cam-

era, RearView Monitor may not display ob-

jects clearly. Clean the camera.

●Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off

any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a

dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

●Do not damage the camera as the moni-

tor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera

䊊

1, the RearView Monitor may not display ob-

jects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a

cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

LHA3671

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

1. CAMERA button

LHA4092

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR (if so

equipped)

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

●Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for the proper use of the

Around View® Monitor system could

result in serious injury or death.

●The Around View® Monitor is a conve-

nience feature and is not a substitute

for proper vehicle operation because it

has areas where objects cannot be

viewed. The four corners of the vehicle

in particular, are areas where objects do

not always appear in the bird’s-eye,

front, or rear views. Always check your

surroundings to be sure that it is safe to

move before operating the vehicle. Al-

ways operate the vehicle slowly.

●The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other

maneuvers.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the

camera.

The Around View® Monitor system is designed

as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot

parking or parallel parking.

The monitor displays various views of the position

of the vehicle in a split screen format. Not all

views are available at all times.

Available views:

●Front View

An approximately 150–degree view of the

front of the vehicle.

●Rear View

An approximately 150–degree view of the

rear of the vehicle.

●Bird’s-Eye View

The surrounding views of the vehicle from

above.

●Front-Side View

The view around and ahead of the front

passenger’s side wheel.

To display the multiple views, the Around View®

Monitor system uses cameras located in the front

grille, on the vehicle’s outside mirrors and one on

the tailgate 䊊

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR

SYSTEM OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position, move

the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to

operate the Around View® Monitor.

When the camera is first activated with the bird’s-

eye view in the display, a red icon (if so equipped)

will flash on the screen. This indicates that the

sonar system (if so equipped) is activated. For

additional information on the front and rear sonar

LHA3909

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

system (if so equipped), refer to “Front and rear

sonar system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

The screen displayed on the Around View®

Monitor will automatically return to the previous

screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has

been pressed with the shift lever in a position

other than the R (Reverse) position.

Available views

WARNING

●The distance guide lines and the vehicle

width lines should be used as a refer-

ence only when the vehicle is on a

paved, level surface. The apparent dis-

tance viewed on the monitor may be

different than the actual distance be-

tween the vehicle and displayed

objects.

●Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-

eye view as a reference. The lines and

the bird’s-eye view are greatly affected

by the number of occupants, cargo, fuel

level, vehicle position, road condition

and road grade.

●If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

and the bird’s-eye view may be dis-

played incorrectly.

●When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-

jects viewed in the monitor are further

than they appear. When driving the ve-

hicle down a hill, objects viewed in the

monitor are closer than they appear.

●Objects in the rear view will appear vi-

sually opposite compared to when

viewed in the monitor and outside

mirrors.

●Use the mirrors or actually look to prop-

erly judge distances to other objects.

●On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the

predicted course lines and the actual

course line.

●The vehicle width and predicted course

lines are wider than the actual width

and course.

●The displayed lines will appear slightly

off to the right, because the rearview

camera is not installed in the rear center

of the vehicle.

Front and rear view

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate ve-

hicle width and distance to objects with refer-

ence to the vehicle body line 䊊

Aare displayed on

the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:

●Red line 䊊

1: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

●Yellow line 䊊

2: approximately 3 ft (1 m)

●Green line 䊊

3: approximately 7 ft (2 m)

●Green line 䊊

4: approximately 10 ft (3 m)

Front view

SAA1840

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the approximate vehicle width when

backing up.

Predicted course lines 䊊

Indicate the predicted course when operating the

vehicle. The predicted course lines will be dis-

played on the monitor when the steering wheel is

turned. The predicted course lines will move de-

pending on how much the steering wheel is

turned and will not be displayed while the steer-

ing wheel is in the straight-ahead position.

Center guide lines 䊊

Indicates the vehicle’s center to improve trailer

hitching guidance.

The front view will not be displayed when the

vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front view

and the steering wheel turns about 90 de-

grees or less from the straight-ahead posi-

tion, both the right and left predicted

course lines 䊊

6are displayed. When the

steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or

more, a line is displayed only on the oppo-

site side of the turn. Bird’s-eye view

The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of

the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle po-

sition and the predicted course to a parking

space.

The vehicle icon 䊊

1shows the position of the

vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between

objects viewed in the bird’s-eye view may differ

somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover 䊊

2are

indicated in black.

Rear view

LHA3920 LHA3802

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

The non-viewable area 䊊

2is highlighted in yellow

for several seconds after the bird’s-eye view is

displayed. It will be shown only the first time after

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The driver can check the approximate direction

and angle of the tire on the display by the tire icon

䊊

3when driving the vehicle forward or backward.

WARNING

●Objects in the bird’s-eye view will ap-

pear further than the actual distance.

●Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,

may be misaligned or not displayed at

the seam of the views.

●Objects that are above the camera can-

not be displayed.

●The view of the bird’s-eye view may be

misaligned when the camera position

alters.

●A line on the ground may be misaligned

and is not seen as being straight at the

seam of the views. The misalignment

will increase as the line proceeds away

from the vehicle.

●Tire angle display does not indicate the

actual tire angle.

Front-side view

Guiding lines

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width

and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on

the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line 䊊

1shows the front part

of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line 䊊

2shows the approxi-

mate vehicle width including the outside mirrors.

The extensions 䊊

3of both the front 䊊

1and side

䊊

2lines are shown with a green dotted line.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTED AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their locations on

the ground are for approximate reference only.

Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or project-

ing objects will be actually located at distances

different from those displayed in the monitor rela-

tive to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you

are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to

view the positioning of objects behind the ve-

hicle.

LHA2652

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-

tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is further than it

appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is closer than it

appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting object

The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object in

the display. However, the vehicle may hit the

object if it projects over the actual backing up

course.

LHA3672 LHA3673 LHA3912

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the position

䊊

Bin the display. However, the position 䊊

Cis

actually at the same distance as the position 䊊

The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

the position 䊊

Aif the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

WARNING

●If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

●On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the

predicted course line and the actual

course line.

●If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted course

lines may be displayed incorrectly. If

this occurs, please perform the follow-

ing procedures:

– Turn the steering wheel from lock to

lock while the engine is running.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road

for more than 5 minutes.

●When the steering wheel is turned with

the ignition switch in the ACC position,

the predicted course lines may be dis-

played incorrectly.

●There is the possibility that when the

vehicle mirrors are extended for towing,

the mirrors may be shown in the bird’s-

eye view and front side view.

LHA3674

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe

before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on

the screen 䊊

Awhen the shift lever is moved

to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predicted course

lines 䊊

Benter the parking space 䊊

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the

vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Dparallel to the

parking space 䊊

Cwhile referring to the pre-

dicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position and apply the parking brake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press

the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the

R (Reverse) position to operate the Around

View® Monitor.

The Around View® Monitor displays different

split screen views depending on the position of

the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to

switch between the available views.

If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the

available views are:

●Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen

●Rear view/front-side view split screen

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the

available views are:

●Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen

●Front view/front-side view split screen

LHA3910 LHA3911

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position, the

only available view is front view/front-side view

split screen.

The display will switch from the Around View®

Monitor screen when:

●The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and

the vehicle speed increases above approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h)

●A different screen is selected.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. Firmly apply brake and place the shift lever in

R (Reverse).

2. Press the button on the control panel.

3. The screen will display the Night settings.

4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the

setting up or down.

5. Press the button again to access the

Auto settings.

6. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the

setting up or down.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings of

the Around View® Monitor while the ve-

hicle is moving. Make sure the parking

brake is firmly applied.

LHA4295

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR

SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

Around View® Monitor. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these sys-

tem limitations could result in serious in-

jury or death.

●Do not use the Around View® Monitor

with the outside mirrors in the stored

position, and make sure that the tail-

gate is securely closed when operating

the vehicle using the Around View®

Monitor.

●The apparent distance between objects

viewed on the Around View® Monitor

differs from the actual distance.

●The cameras are installed on the front

grille, the outside mirrors and above the

rear license plate. Do not put anything

on the vehicle that covers the cameras.

●When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the cameras. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing wa-

ter condensation on the lens, a mal-

function, fire or an electric shock.

●Do not strike the cameras. They are

precision instruments. Doing so could

cause a malfunction or cause damage

resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

There are some areas where the system will not

show objects and the system does not warn of

moving objects. When in the front or rear view

display, an object below the bumper or on the

ground may not be viewed 䊊

1. When in the

bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the seam 䊊

2of

the camera viewing areas will not appear in the

monitor.

The following are operating limitations and do not

represent a system malfunction:

●There may be a delay when switching be-

tween views.

●When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not display objects

clearly.

●When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

●The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light.

●The colors of objects on the Around View®

Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual

color of objects.

LHA3807

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

●Objects on the Around View® Monitor may

not be clear and the color of the object may

differ in a dark environment.

●There may be differences in sharpness be-

tween each camera view of the bird’s-eye

view.

●Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off

any wax with a clean cloth that has been

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

System temporarily unavailable

When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,

there are abnormal conditions in the Around

View® Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving

operation but it is recommended that the system

be inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the screen,

the camera image may be receiving temporary

electronic disturbances from surrounding de-

vices. This will not hinder normal driving opera-

tion but it is recommended that the system be

inspected by a NISSAN dealer if it occurs fre-

quently.

LHA3591 LHA3592

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

●Do not damage the cameras as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the

cameras 䊊

1, the Around View® Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wip-

ing with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild

cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3909

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

1. CAMERA button

LHA4092

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)

(if so equipped)

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

●Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Moving

Object Detection system could result in

serious injury or death.

●The MOD system is not a substitute for

proper vehicle operation and is not de-

signed to prevent contact with objects

surrounding the vehicle. When maneu-

vering, always use the outside mirrors

and rearview mirror and turn and check

the surroundings to ensure it is safe to

maneuver.

●The system is deactivated at speeds

above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated

at lower speeds.

●The MOD system is not designed to

detect surrounding stationary objects.

The MOD system can inform the driver of moving

objects near the vehicle when backing out of

garages, maneuvering in parking lots and in other

such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects by

using image processing technology on the image

shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION

The MOD system will turn on automatically under

the following conditions:

●When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position.

●When vehicle speed decreases below ap-

proximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the camera

screen is displayed.

The MOD system operates in the following con-

ditions when the camera view is displayed:

●When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position and the vehicle is stopped,

the MOD system detects moving objects in

the bird’s-eye view. The MOD system will

not operate if the outside mirrors are moving

in or out, in the stowed position, or if either

front door is opened.

●When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) posi-

tion and the vehicle speed is below approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD system

detects moving objects in the front view.

Front and bird’s-eye views

LHA4190

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

●When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position and the vehicle speed is below ap-

proximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD sys-

tem detects moving objects in the rear view.

The MOD system will not operate if the

tailgate is open.

The MOD system does not detect moving ob-

jects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not

displayed on the screen when in this view.

When the MOD system detects moving objects

near the vehicle, a chime will be heard and a

yellow frame will be displayed on the view where

the objects are detected. While the MOD system

continues to detect moving objects, the yellow

frame continues to be displayed.

NOTE:

While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is

beeping, the MOD system will not chime.

In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame 䊊

1is

displayed on each camera image (front, rear,

right, left) depending on where moving objects

are detected.

The yellow frame 䊊

2is displayed on each view in

the front view and rear view modes.

A blue MOD icon 䊊

3is displayed in the view

where the MOD system is operative. A gray MOD

icon is displayed in the view where the MOD

system is not operative.

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD icon 䊊

is not displayed.

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF

Some vehicles include the option to allow the

MOD system to be turned on or off in the vehicle

information display.

Rear and bird’s-eye views

LHA4200

Rear and front-side views

LHA4201

Rear-wide view

LHA4242

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

To turn the MOD system on or off:

1. Using buttons on the steering

wheel to select “Settings”.

2. Select “Driver Assistance” and press the

ENTER button.

3. Select “Parking Aids”.

4. Toggle ON or OFF “Moving Object” using

the ENTER button.

MOD can also be turned on or off by using the

Parking Sensor (sonar) System OFF Switch. For

additional information, refer to “Parking Sensor

(sonar) System OFF Switch” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in

accordance with these system limitations

could result in serious injury or death.

●Do not use the MOD system when tow-

ing a trailer. The system may not func-

tion properly.

●Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume or open vehicle window)

will interfere with the chime sound, and

it may not be heard.

●The MOD system performance will be

limited according to environmental con-

ditions and surrounding objects such

as:

– When there is low contrast between

background and the moving objects.

– When there is a blinking source of

light.

– When strong light such as another

vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is

present.

– When camera orientation is not in its

usual position, such as when a mirror

is folded.

– When there is dirt, water drops or

snow on the camera lens.

– When the position of the moving ob-

jects in the display is not changed.

●The MOD system might detect flowing

water droplets on the camera lens,

white smoke from the muffler, moving

shadows, etc.

●The MOD system may not function

properly depending on the speed, direc-

tion, distance or shape of the moving

objects.

●If your vehicle sustains damage to the

parts where the camera is installed,

leaving it misaligned or bent, the sens-

ing zone may be altered and the MOD

system may not detect objects properly.

●When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not display

objects clearly. This is not a

malfunction.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

●Do not damage the camera as the moni-

tor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the

cameras 䊊

1, the MOD system may not operate

properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and

then wiping with a dry cloth.

Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s and pas-

senger’s side vents 䊊

1, center vents 䊊

2, and rear

passengers’ vents (if so equipped) 䊊

3by moving

the vent slide and/or vent assemblies.

LHA3909 LHA3772

VENTS

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

●The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior

air to become stale and the windows to

fog up.

NOTE:

●Odors from inside and outside the vehicle

can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor

can enter the passenger compartment

through the vents.

●When parking, set the heater and air condi-

tioner controls to turn off air recirculation to

allow fresh air into the passenger compart-

ment. This should help reduce odors inside

the vehicle.

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(manual) (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

CONTROLS

1. Fan speed control / system OFF dial /

air conditioning (A/C) button

2. Air flow control buttons

3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C button

4. Air recirculation button

5. Outside mirror (if so equipped) de-

froster switch

6. Front windshield defrost button

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off,

and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

The air flow control buttons allow you to select

the air flow outlets.

MAX A/C — Air flows from center and side

vents with maximum cooling

(air conditioning).

— Air flows from center and side

vents.

— Air flows from center and side

vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot

outlets.

— Air flows from defroster out-

lets and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defroster

outlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjust

the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the

temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase

the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

LHA4127

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Air recirculation button

ON position (Indicator light on)

Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the ON position when:

●driving on a dusty road.

●to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-

senger compartment.

●for maximum cooling when using the air con-

ditioner.

OFF position (Indicator light off)

In OFF mode, the recirculation indicator will turn

on closing off the fresh air. If outside air is desired

in off mode, press the recirculation button until

the indicator turns off. In OFF mode, the mode

buttons can be selected to change the air vent

distribution (if recirculation is off).

If fogging occurs, press the front wind-

shield defrost button.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to

the desired position and press the button

to turn on the air conditioner. To turn off the air

conditioner, press the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-

ates only when the engine is running.

Outside mirror (if so equipped)

defroster switch

For additional information, refer to “Rear window

and / or outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster

switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot

outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost

outlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF position

for normal heating. The indicator light on

the button will go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side and

center vents.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.

The indicator light on the button will

go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to

defrost/defog the windows.

1. Press the defrost/defog button .

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

●To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-

dows, turn the fan control dial to the

highest setting and the temperature control

to the full HOT position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

●When the position is selected, the air

conditioner automatically turns on if the out-

side temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).

This dehumidifies the air which helps defog

the windshield. The mode automati-

cally turns off, allowing outside air to be

drawn into the passenger compartment to

further improve the defogging performance.

Under this condition, the indicator light on

the A/C button indicator will not turn on if the

user had selected the A/C off. Turning off the

air conditioning via the A/C button is not

allowed In this mode. If the A/C button indi-

cator was on when entering this mode, and

the A/C button is selected in this mode, the

A/C button indicator will turn off, but the A/C

compressor will still be automatically en-

abled. The recirculation button indicator will

not illuminate if the button is pressed in this

mode.

Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side

and center vents and to the front and rear floor

outlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.

The indicator light on the button will

go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-

shield.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

●When the position is selected, the air

conditioner automatically turns on if the out-

side temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). If

the air flow control button is selected

for more than 1 minute, the air conditioning

system will continue to operate until

the fan control dial is turned to OFF,

the vehicle is shut off, or the A/C button is

used to turn off the compressor even if the

air flow control dial is turned to a position

other than the position. This dehu-

midifies the air which helps defog the wind-

shield. Under this condition, the indicator

light on the A/C button indicator will not turn

on if the user had selected A/C off. Turning

off the air conditioning via the A/C button is

not allowed in this mode. If the A/C button

indicator was on when entering this mode,

and the A/C button is selected in this mode,

the A/C compressor will still be automati-

cally enabled. It is recommended that

mode be turned off for maximum defogging.

The recirculation button can be selected in

this mode to block outside odors. However,

for maximum defogging in this mode, it is

recommended to turn recirculation off when

possible.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades

and air inlet in front of the windshield. This

improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to

the desired position, and press the button

to activate the air conditioner. When the air con-

ditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying func-

tions are added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-

ates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

4. Press the button.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

cold position.

●For quick cooling when the outside tem-

perature is high, press the button to

the ON position. Be sure to return the

to the OFF position for normal cooling. The

indicator light on the button will go off.

You may also select MAX A/C for quick

cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.

The indicator light on the button will

go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

4. Press the button on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows and

dehumidify the air.

1. Press the front defroster button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

When the or positions are se-

lected, the air conditioner automatically turns on if

the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).

The air conditioning system will continue to op-

erate until the fan control dial is turned to

OFF, the air conditioner is turned OFF, or the

vehicle is shut off, even if a position other than

the air flow control button is selected.

Under this condition, the indicator light on the

A/C button indicator will not turn off if the user

had selected A/C off. Turning off the air condi-

tioning via the A/C button is not allowed in this

mode. If the A/C button indicator was on when

entering this mode, and the A/C button is se-

lected in this mode, the A/C button indicator will

turn off, but the A/C compressor will still be

automatically enabled. This dehumidifies the air

which helps defog the windshield. The

mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air

to be drawn into the passenger compartment to

further improve the defogging performance.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

Operating tips

●Keep the windows closed while the air con-

ditioner is in operation.

●After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 min-

utes with the windows open to vent hot air

from the passenger compartment. Then,

close the windows. This allows the air con-

ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

●The air conditioning system should be

operated for approximately 10 minutes

at least once a month. This helps pre-

vent damage to the system due to lack

of lubrication.

●A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air

is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

●If the engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates engine coolant tem-

perature over the normal range, turn

the air conditioner off. For additional

information, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The following charts show the button and dial

positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,

cooling or defrosting. For additional information

on heating and cooling, refer to “Heater and air

conditioner (manual)” in this section. The air

recirculation ( ) button should always

be in the OFF position for heating and

defrosting.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4135 LHA4029

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

LHA4027 LHA4136

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4028

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

1. Front (defroster) button

2. Temperature control dial (driver’s side)/

AUTO button

3. Display screen

4. Temperature control dial (passenger’s

side)/DUAL button

5. Fresh air intake button

6. Air recirculation button

7. A/C (air conditioner) button

8. MODE (manual air flow control) button

9. (fan speed control) buttons

10. ON-OFF button

11. Rear window and/or outside mir-

ror (if so equipped) defroster switch

WARNING

●The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior

air to become stale and the windows to

fog up.

NOTE:

●Odors from inside and outside the vehicle

can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor

can enter the passenger compartment

through the vents.

LHA3575

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(automatic) (if so equipped)

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●When parking, set the heater and air condi-

tioner controls to turn off air recirculation to

allow fresh air into the passenger compart-

ment. This should help reduce odors inside

the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling or heating (auto)

This mode may be normally used all year round as

the system automatically works to keep a con-

stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan

speed are also controlled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right

to set the desired temperature. Driver and

passenger temperatures can be set inde-

pendently. Press DUAL to activate dual cli-

mate control functions. Turn the passenger’s

side temperature control dial to the left or

right to set the desired passenger’s tem-

perature.

●Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F

(24°C) for normal operation.

●The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off

are also controlled automatically. The A/C

button indicator will remain in the last user

setting. Under this condition, the indicator

light on the A/C button indicator will not turn

on if the user had not selected the A/C

button off. Turning off the air conditioning via

the A/C button is not allowed in this mode. If

the A/C button indicator was on when enter-

ing this mode, and the A/C button is se-

lected in this mode, the A/C button indicator

will turn off, but the A/C compressor will still

be automatically enabled (see air flow con-

trol).

To turn off the compressor, turn off auto

mode, then turn the A/C on then off until the

A/C button indicator is not lit.

●A visible mist may be seen coming from the

vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

Heating (A/C OFF)

The air conditioner does not activate. When you

need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

●The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

●Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Otherwise, the sys-

tem may not work properly.

●Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Press the defroster control button to

turn the system on. The indicator light in the

button will illuminate.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right

to set the desired temperature.

●To quickly remove ice from the outside of the

windows, turn the manual fan control to the

maximum position.

●As soon as possible after the windshield is

clean, press the AUTO button to return to

the auto mode.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

●When the control is activated, the air

conditioner will automatically be turned on at

outside temperatures above 36°F (2°C).

This dehumidifies the air which helps defog

the windshield. Under this condition, the in-

dicator light on the A/C button indicator will

not turn on if the user had selected A/C off.

Turning off the air condition via the A/C

button is not allowed in this mode. If the A/C

button indicator was on when entering this

mode, and the A/C button is selected in this

mode, the A/C compressor will still be auto-

matically enabled. The air recirculation mode

automatically turns off, allowing outside air

to be drawn into the passenger compart-

ment to further improve the defogging per-

formance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Press the fan speed control buttons to

manually control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to return to automatic

control of the fan speed.

When adjusting the manual fan from auto mode,

the outlet direction (floor, floor/defrost, vent, bi-

level) will still automatically change. To fix the

outlet to a manual mode, select the desired air

flow location using the MODE button.

Air recirculation

Press the air recirculation button to recir-

culate interior air inside the vehicle. Press the

AUTO button to return to automatic mode.

The air recirculation button will not be activated

when the air conditioner is in , mode.

In Floor/Defrost mode, the recirculation button

can be selected to block outside odors. How-

ever, for maximum defogging in this mode, it is

recommended to turn recirculation off when pos-

sible.

Fresh air intake

Press the fresh air intake button to draw

outside air into the passenger compartment.

Air flow control

Press the MODE button to manually control air

flow and select the air outlet. Press the to

control the front defrost:

— Air flows from center and side

vents.

— Air flows from center and side

vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

— Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system off

Press the ON-OFF button.

Rear window and / or outside mirror (if

so equipped) defroster switch

For additional information, refer to “Rear window

and / or outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster

switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

Remote engine start logic (if so

equipped)

Vehicles equipped with automatic climate con-

trols and remote start function may go into auto-

matic heating or cooling mode when remote start

is activated depending on outside and cabin tem-

peratures. Automatic temperature depends on

outside and cabin temperatures. During this pe-

riod, the climate control display and buttons will

be inoperable until the ignition switch is turned

on.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

OPERATING TIPS

●When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flow

from the foot outlets may not operate for a

maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is

not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-

ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets

will operate normally.

The sunload sensor 䊊

1, located on the top center

of the instrument panel, helps the system main-

tain a constant temperature. Do not put anything

on or around this sensor.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-

hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with

the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s

ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-

quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-

tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants

will cause severe damage to your air conditioner

system. For additional information, refer to “Air

conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommen-

dations” in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

to service your “environmentally friendly” air con-

ditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains refrig-

erant under high pressure. To avoid per-

sonal injury, any air conditioner service

should be done only by an experienced

technician with proper equipment.

LHA4126

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

RADIO

With the ignition is placed in the ACC or ON

position, press the or POWER button to

turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the

engine not running, the ignition should be placed

in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-

ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality

normally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle

may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-

dio reception. These circuits are designed to

extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-

ity of that reception.

However, there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even

when the finest equipment is used. These char-

acteristics are completely normal in a given re-

ception area and do not indicate any malfunction

in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-

cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,

signal distance and interference from other ve-

hicles can work against ideal reception. De-

scribed below are some of the factors that can

affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-

vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-

nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi

(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM

having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-

nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM

station reception even if the FM station is within

25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is

directly related to the distance between the

transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-

of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-

acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect

off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position

(usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter), static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the

treble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected

signals reach the receiver at the same time. The

signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-

mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-

ject to interference as they travel from transmitter

to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

AUDIO SYSTEM

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so

equipped)

When the satellite radio is used for the first time

or the battery has been replaced, the satellite

radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-

function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite

radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or

large building for satellite radio to receive all of

the necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO

SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is

selected unless optional satellite receiver and

antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite

Radio service subscription is active. Satellite ra-

dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if

cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio

signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite

antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can

affect satellite radio performance. Remove the

ice to restore satellite radio reception. AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

●Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD

and/or CD player.

●Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or CD

player.

●Only one CD can be loaded into the CD

player at a time.

●Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc

or packaging.

●During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the hu-

midity. If this occurs, remove the CD

and dehumidify or ventilate the player

completely.

●The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

●The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high or low.

Decrease/increase the temperature

before use.

LHA0099

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

●Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

●CDs that are in poor condition or are

dirty, scratched or covered with finger-

prints may not work properly.

●The following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

●Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

●Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

●Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

●Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion:

●3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

●CDs that are not round

●CDs with a paper label

●CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

●This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capability to

record or burn CDs.

●If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC

●Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

●Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT

This is an error due to excessive tem-

perature inside the player. Remove the

CD by pressing the EJECT button. After

a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD

can be played when the temperature of

the player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-

tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)

CD).

Compact disc with MP3 or WMA

Terms

●MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well-known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the

file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with

virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3

compression removes the redundant and

irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the

human ear doesn’t hear.

●WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a

compressed audio format created by Micro-

soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

●Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is called

a multisession.

●ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, encoding bit

rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-

mation is displayed on the Artist/song title

line on the display.

* Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-

tered trademarks and trademarks in the United

States of America and other countries of Micro-

soft Corporation of the USA.

Playback order

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA

files is as illustrated.

●The names of folders not containing MP3 or

WMA files are not shown in the display.

●If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

●The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software.

Therefore, the files might not play in the

desired order.

Playback order chart

WHA1078

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

Specification chart

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),

05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for

folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long time

before the music starts

playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the

specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate

files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to the

next song when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there

will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back in

the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

Connection Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.

USB devices should be purchased separately as

necessary.

This system cannot be used to format USB de-

vices. To format a USB device, use a personal

computer.

In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the front

seats plays only sound without images for regu-

latory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.

This system supports various USB memory de-

vices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some

USB devices may not be supported by this sys-

tem.

●Partitioned USB devices may not play cor-

rectly.

●Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear

properly in the display. Using English lan-

guage characters with a USB device is rec-

ommended.

General notes for USB use

●Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner

information regarding the proper use and

care of the device.

Notes for iPod® use

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

●Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause

a checkmark to be displayed on and off

(flickering). Always make sure that the

iPod® is connected properly.

●An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain

in fast forward or rewind mode if it is con-

nected during a seek operation. In this case,

please manually reset the iPod®.

●An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con-

tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is discon-

nected during a seek operation.

●An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using an iPod®

nano (2nd Generation).

●Audiobooks may not play in the same order

as they appear on an iPod®.

●Large video files cause slow responses in an

iPod®. The vehicle center display may mo-

mentarily black out, but will soon recover.

●If an iPod® automatically selects large video

files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle

center display may momentarily black out,

but will soon recover.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Bluetooth® streaming audio

●Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be

recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.

●It is necessary to set up the wireless con-

nection between a compatible Bluetooth®

audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth®

module before using the Bluetooth® audio.

●Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® au-

dio will vary depending on the devices. Make

sure how to operate your audio device be-

fore using it with this system.

●The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped un-

der the following conditions:

●Receiving a call on the Hands-Free

Phone System.

●Checking the connection to the hands-

free phone.

●Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in

an area surrounded by metal or far away from

the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent

tone quality degradation and wireless con-

nection disruption.

●While an audio device is connected through

the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the

battery power of the device may discharge

quicker than usual.

●This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio

Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Visteon and Bosch.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)

1. CD eject button

2. CD button*

3. Display screen

4. CD insert slot

5. SEEK button

6. SCAN button

7. TRACK button

8. BACK button

9. Apps button

10. ENTER/SETTING button/ TUNE/FOLDER

knob

11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

12. RDM (random) button

13. RPT (repeat) button

14. (power) button/ VOL (volume) control

knob

15. DISP (display) button

16. MEDIA button

17. FM•AM button

For additional information, refer to “Audio opera-

tion precautions” in this section.

Audio main operation

(power) button / VOL (volume) con-

trol knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the (power) button

while the system is off to call up the mode (radio,

CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®) that

was playing immediately before the system was

turned off.

LHA3786

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

To turn the system off, press the (power)

button.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the

volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-

sitive Volume. When this feature is active, the

audio volume changes as the driving speed

changes.

ENTER/SETTING button

Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show the

Settings screen on the display. Turn the

TUNE/FOLDER knob to navigate the options and

then press the ENTER/SETTING button to make

a selection.

Audio

Bluetooth Adjusts Bluetooth® settings.

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Brightness and Contrast Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Clock adjust Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/FOLDER knob to

adjust the value. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the value.

On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.

RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.

Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of

the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases

in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides

no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.

Language select Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/FOLDER control knob to select the item

to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING button until the display returns to

the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

Apps button

Press the Apps button to launch the Smartphone

Integration Mode. For additional information, re-

fer to “NissanConnect

Mobile Apps” in this

section regarding this feature.

DISP (display) button

The DISP (display) button turns the display

screen on or off.

BACK button

Press the BACK button to return to the

previous menu screen.

FM/AM radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the band as

follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-

ing will automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on

the screen during FM stereo reception. When the

stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-

matically changes from stereo to monaural re-

ception.

TUNE/FOLDER knob (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to the left or right

for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning

Press the or SEEK buttons to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies and to

stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear

on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.

Pressing the button again during this 5 second

period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will

remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is

not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning

moves to the next station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve

stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1,

six for FM2).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using the

SEEK button or the TRACK button.

Press and hold any of the desired station

memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset

number is updated on the display and a

beep is heard.

3. Programming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-

ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

If the radio is already operating, it automatically

turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

MEDIA button

With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button until

the CD mode is displayed on the screen.

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text

may be displayed on the screen if the CD has

been encoded with text information. Depending

on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa-

tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis-

played.

The track number and the total number of tracks

in the current folder or on the current disc are

displayed on the screen as well.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or

Fast Forward) button

Press and hold the or

SEEK/TRACK button for 1.5 seconds while the

compact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward

the track being played. The compact disc plays at

an increased speed while reversing or fast for-

warding. When the button is released, the com-

pact disc returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK button

Press the SEEK/TRACK button while a CD

or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the

beginning of the current track. Press

the SEEK/TRACK button several times to

skip backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/TRACK button while a CD

or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one

track. Press the SEEK/TRACK button sev-

eral times to skip forward several tracks. If the last

track on a CD is skipped, the first track on the

disc is played. If the last track in a folder of an

MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the

next folder is played.

TUNE/FOLDER knob (MP3/WMA CD only)

If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-

ing, turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to change

folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a

folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a

folder.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed while a

compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

CD:

1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-

peated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-

peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-

cator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on

the screen unless no pattern is applied.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM (random) button is pressed while

a compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

CD:

1 Disc Random ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Disc Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be

played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder

will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on

the screen unless no pattern is applied.

CD EJECT button

When the CD EJECT button is pressed

with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc

will eject and the last source will be played.

When the CD EJECT button is pressed

twice with a compact disc loaded, the compact

disc will be ejected further for easier CD removal.

If the disc is not removed within 20 seconds, the

disc will reload.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod® player

operation without Navigation System” regarding

the iPod® player available with this system in this

section.

For additional information, refer to “USB (Univer-

sal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models without

Navigation System)” regarding the USB connec-

tion port available with this system in this section.

For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®

streaming audio without Navigation System”

about the Bluetooth® audio interface available

with this system in this section.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type

A) (if so equipped)

1. CD eject button

2. XM button

3. Display screen

4. CD insert slot

5. SEEK button

6. SCAN button

LHA2845

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

7. CAT button

8. BACK button

9. Apps button

10. ENTER/SETTING button/ TUNE/SCROLL

knob

11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

12. RDM (random) button

13. RPT (repeat) button

14. (power) button/ VOL (volume) control

knob

15. DISP (display) button

16. MEDIA button

17. FM•AM button

For additional information, refer to “Audio opera-

tion precautions” in this section.

Audio main operation

(power) button / VOL (volume)

control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the (power) button

while the system is off to call up the mode (radio,

CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®) that

was playing immediately before the system was

turned off.

To turn the system off, press the (power)

button.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the

volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-

sitive Volume. When this feature is active, the

audio volume changes as the driving speed

changes.

ENTER/SETTING button

Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show the

Settings screen on the display. Turn the

TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the options

and then press the ENTER button to make a

selection.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

Audio

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of

the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume in-

creases in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides

no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.

Brightness and Contrast Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Clock adjust Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to

adjust the value. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the value.

On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.

RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.

Language Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select the item

to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING button until the display returns to

the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Apps button

Press the Apps button to launch the Smartphone

Integration Mode. For additional information, re-

fer to “NissanConnect

Mobile Apps” in this

section regarding this feature.

DISP (display) button

The DISP (display) button turns the display

screen on or off.

BACK button

Press the BACK button to return to the

previous menu screen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the band as

follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-

ing will automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on

the screen during FM stereo reception. When the

stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-

matically changes from stereo to monaural re-

ception.

XM band select

Press the XM button to change the band as

follows:

XM1* →XM2* →XM3* →XM1 (satellite, if so

equipped)

When the XM button is pressed while the ignition

switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will

come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on when

the VOL (volume)/ (power) control

knob/button is pressed on.

*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite

radio reception will not be available unless an

optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-

stalled and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service

subscription is active. Satellite radio is not avail-

able in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the XM button

is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be

turned off and the last radio station played will

come on.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or right

for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning

Press the or SEEK buttons to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies and to

stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear

on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.

Pressing the button again during this 5 second

period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will

remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is

not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning

moves to the next station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve

stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1,

six for FM2).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using the

or SEEK/CAT button. Press and hold

any of the desired station memory buttons (1

– 6) until the preset number is updated on

the display and a beep is heard.

3. Programming is now complete.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-

ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

If the radio is already operating, it automatically

turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

MEDIA button

With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button until

the CD mode is displayed on the screen.

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text

may be displayed on the screen if the CD has

been encoded with text information. Depending

on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa-

tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis-

played.

The track number and the total number of tracks

in the current folder or on the current disc are

displayed on the screen as well.

SEEK/CAT (Reverse or

Fast Forward) button

Press and hold the or SEEK/CAT

button for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is

playing to reverse or fast forward the track being

played. The compact disc plays at an increased

speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When

the button is released, the compact disc returns

to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT button

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the begin-

ning of the current track. Press

the SEEK/CAT button several times to skip

backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.

Press the SEEK/CAT button several times

to skip forward several tracks. If the last track on

a CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is

played. If the last track in a folder of an

MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the

next folder is played.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)

If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-

ing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change

folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a

folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a

folder.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed while a

compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

CD:

1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-

peated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-

peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-

cator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on

the screen unless no pattern is applied.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM (random) button is pressed while

a compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

CD:

1 Disc Random ←→ OFF

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Disc Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be

played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder

will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on

the screen unless no pattern is applied.

CD EJECT button

When the CD EJECT button is pressed

with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc

will eject and the last source will be played.

When the CD EJECT button is pressed

twice with a compact disc loaded, the compact

disc will be ejected further for easier CD removal.

If the disc is not removed within 20 seconds, the

disc will reload.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod® player

operation without Navigation System” regarding

the iPod® player available with this system in this

section.

For additional information, refer to “USB (Univer-

sal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models without

Navigation System)” regarding the USB connec-

tion port available with this system in this section.

For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®

streaming audio without Navigation System”

about the Bluetooth® audio interface available

with this system in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type

B) (if so equipped)

1. POWER button / VOLUME control knob

2. CD eject button

3. CD insert slot

4. ENTER/AUDIO button/TUNE/SCROLL

knob

5. BACK button

6. button

7. TRACK button

8. SEEK button

9. Display screen

10. AUX button

11. CD button

12. FM-AM button

13. SXM button*

The [ ] button launches the Smartphone

Integration Mode. For additional information, re-

fer to “NissanConnect

Mobile Apps” in this

section.

*No satellite radio reception is available when the

SXM button is pressed to access satellite radio

stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-

tenna are installed and an SiriusXM® Satellite

Radio service subscription is active. Satellite ra-

dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

For additional information, refer to “Audio opera-

tion precautions” in this section.

LHA3906

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio main operation

POWER button/VOLUME control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, and then press the POWER button

while the system is off to call up the mode (radio

or CD) which was playing immediately before the

system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the POWER button.

Turn the VOLUME control knob to adjust the

volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-

sitive Volume for audio. The audio volume

changes as the driving speed changes.

Audio settings

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Audio” key.

Use the touch-screen to adjust the following

items to the desired setting:

Audio

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Speed Sensitive Vol. Adjusts the Speed Sensitive Volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the ve-

hicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to

vehicle speed.

AUX Volume Level Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Available options are

Low (Quiet), Medium, and High (Loud).

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/AUDIO button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the item to adjust.

When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/AUDIO button until the display returns to the main audio

screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

SXM settings

To view the SXM settings:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “SXM” key.

The signal strength, activation status and other

information are displayed on the screen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the band as

follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-

ing will automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will begin playing.

SXM band select

Pressing the SXM button will change the band as

follows:

SXM1* →SXM2*→SXM3* →SXM1* (satellite,

if so equipped)

When the SXM button is pressed while the igni-

tion switch is in the ACC or ON position, the

radio will come on at the last station played.

The last station played will also come on when

the VOL (volume) control knob is pressed to turn

the radio on.

*When the SXM button is pressed, the satellite

radio mode will be skipped unless an optional

satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscription is

active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska,

Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the SXM button

is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be

turned off and the last radio station played will

come on.

While the radio is in SXM mode, the operation

can be controlled through the touch-screen.

Touch the “Channels” key to display a list of

channels. Touch a channel displayed on the list to

change to that channel. Touch the “Categories”

key to display a list of categories. Touch a cat-

egory displayed on the list to display options

within that category.

Tuning with the touch-screen

When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be tuned

using the touch-screen. To bring up the visual

tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower right

corner of the screen. A screen appears with a bar

running from low frequencies on the left to high

frequencies on the right. Touch the screen at the

location of the frequency you wish to tune and the

station will change to that frequency. To return to

the regular radio display screen, touch the “OK”

key.

Tuning with the TUNE knob

The radio can also be manually tuned using the

TUNE knob. When in FM or AM mode, turn the

TUNE knob to the left for lower frequencies or to

the right for higher frequencies. When in SXM

mode, turn the TUNE knob to change the chan-

nel.

SEEK/TRACK tuning

When in FM or AM mode, press the SEEK

button or TRACK button to tune from low

to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at

the next broadcasting station.

When in SXM mode, press the SEEK but-

ton or TRACK button to change the cat-

egory.

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for

FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for

the AM band. Eighteen stations can be set for the

SXM band (6 for SXM1, 6 for SXM2 and 6 for

SXM3).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM select button or choose

the radio band SXM1, SXM2 and SXM3

using the SXM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual or

seek tuning. Press and hold any of the de-

sired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until a

beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Programming is now

complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-

ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Presets can also be selected by touching the

desired preset number on the screen.

Smart Favorites Preset Setup (if so

equipped)

The Smart Favorites feature allows the user to

designate presets, within the SXM1, SXM2 and

SXM3 bands, as their Smart Favorites. When any

of the Smart Favorite presets are selected, the

current track on that station will play from the

beginning of the song.

To program a Smart Favorite preset:

1. Press the SXM button.

2. Touch the “Setup” key.

LHA2899 LHA3085

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate (ON)

or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favorites.

4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select an

available preset.

For additional information, refer to “1 to 6 Station

memory operations” in this section.

NOTE:

• Smart Favorites will start functioning only

after the audio unit is turned on for a few

minutes.

• Tune Start is supported for music chan-

nels only.

Replay Screen

The Replay Screen gives the user the ability to

replay, skip, pause or rewind the currently aired

track.

When the “Replay” key is touched, the Replay

Screen is prompted.

REPLAY To replay a track from the

beginning, press the

seek button. The user can

continue to press the

seek button to replay previ-

ous songs, but can only go

back as far as the system

permits. The system will

warn the user when they

cannot skip any further back

by displaying “At the End” in

the bottom left corner of the

screen.

SKIP To skip a track, press

the track button.

“Live” will appear in the bot-

tom left corner of the screen

indicating the difference

from play time to live audio.

PAUSE To pause a track, press

the pause button.

LHA3087

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REWIND/

FAST

FORWARD

To rewind/ fast forward a

track, hold the or

seek/track button.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

If the radio is already operating, it automatically

turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button

When the CD button is pressed with the system

off and the compact disc loaded, the system will

turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with a compact

disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will

automatically be turned off and the compact disc

will start to play.

CD/MP3 display mode

Menu item

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded with text is

being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist,

album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when a CD is playing:

Random

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Ran-

dom” key alternates between the Random Folder and Random All. This text will appear on the display. To can-

cel random mode, touch the “Random” key until the key is no longer highlighted.

Repeat

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Repeat”

alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text will appear on the

display. To cancel repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer highlighted

Browse

Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the list to begin

playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the folders on the disc. Fol-

low the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a folder.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or

Fast Forward) buttons

Press and hold the SEEK button or

TRACK button for 1.5 seconds while the com-

pact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the

track being played. The compact disc plays at an

increased speed while reversing or fast forward-

ing. When the button is released, the compact

disc returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK buttons

Press the SEEK button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the begin-

ning of the current track. Press the SEEK

button several times to skip backward several

tracks.

Press the TRACK button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.

Press the TRACK button several times to

skip forward several tracks. If the last track on a

CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is played.

If the last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is

skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.

AUX button

The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any stan-

dard analog audio input such as from a portable

cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop

computer. Press the AUX button to play a com-

patible device plugged into the AUX IN jack.

CD EJECT button

When the CD eject button is pressed with

a compact disc loaded, the compact disc will

eject and the last source will be played.

If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds, the

disc will reload.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod® player

operation with Navigation System” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “USB (Univer-

sal Serial Bus) connection port (models with

Navigation System)” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®

streaming audio with Navigation System” in this

section.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

CONNECTION PORT (models

without Navigation System) (if so

equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB

Connection Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

LHA3794

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

●To avoid damage and loss of function

when using a USB device, note the fol-

lowing precautions.

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-

mation regarding the proper use and care of the

device.

The USB port is located on the center console

beneath the heater and air conditioner controls.

Insert the USB device into the connection port.

When a compatible storage device is plugged

into the connection port, compatible audio files

on the storage device can be played through the

vehicle’s audio system.

Audio file operation

MEDIA button

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the MEDIA button to switch to

the USB input mode. If a CD is playing or another

audio source is plugged in through the AUX IN

jack located in the center console, the MEDIA

button toggles between the three sources.

Play information

Information about the audio files being played

can be displayed on the display screen of the

vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the

audio files are encoded, information such as

Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.

The track number and number of total tracks in

the folder are displayed on the screen as well.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

(Reverse or Fast Forward)

button

Press and hold the or SEEK/CAT

and TRACK buttons for 1.5 seconds while an

audio file on the USB device is playing to reverse

or fast forward the track being played. The track

plays at an increased speed while reversing or

fast forwarding. When the button is released, the

audio file returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons

Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button

while an audio file on the USB device is playing to

return to the beginning of the current track. Press

the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button several

times to skip backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button

while an audio file on the USB device is playing to

advance one track. Press the SEEK/CAT or

TRACK button several times to skip for-

ward several tracks. If the last track in a folder on

the USB device is skipped, the first track of the

next folder is played.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM (random) button is pressed while

an audio file on the USB device is playing, the

play pattern can be changed as follows:

All Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

All Random: all tracks on the USB device will be

played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder

will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

The current play pattern of the USB device is

displayed on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed while

an audio file on the USB device is playing, the

play pattern can be changed as follows:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-

peated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-

peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-

cator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device is

displayed on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (If so equipped)

If there are multiple folders with audio files on the

USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to

change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip

back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip

ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio

files on the USB device, turning the

TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will re-

turn to the first track on the USB device.

TUNE/FOLDER knob (if so equipped)

If there are multiple folders with audio files on the

USB device, turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to

change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip

back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip

ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio

files on the USB device, turning the

TUNE/FOLDER knob in either direction will re-

turn to the first track on the USB device.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

CONNECTION PORT (models with

Navigation System) (if so equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB

Connection Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

LHA3794

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

●To avoid damage and loss of function

when using a USB device, note the fol-

lowing precautions.

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-

mation regarding the proper use and care of the

device.

The USB port is located on the center console

beneath the heater and air conditioner controls.

Insert the USB device into the connection port.

When a compatible storage device is plugged

into the connection port, compatible audio files

on the storage device can be played through the

vehicle’s audio system.

Audio file operation

AUX button

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the AUX button to switch to

the USB input mode. If another audio source is

playing and a USB memory device is inserted,

press the AUX button until the center display

changes to the USB memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USB

memory was playing, press the POWER button

to restart the USB memory.

Play information

Information about the audio files being played is

shown on the display screen of the vehicle’s

audio system. Touch “Browse” to display the list

of folders and files on the USB device. Touch the

name of a song on the screen to begin playing

that song.

SEEK/TRACK buttons

Press the SEEK/TRACK button while an

audio file on the USB device is playing to return to

the beginning of the current track. Press

the SEEK/TRACK button several times to

skip backward several tracks.

LHA4006

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

Press the SEEK/TRACK while an audio

file on the USB device is playing to advance one

track. Press the SEEK/TRACK several

times to skip forward several tracks. If the last

track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the

first track of the next folder is played.

Random and repeat play mode

While files on a USB device are playing, the play

pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated

or played randomly.

Random

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play

pattern to the USB device. When the Random

mode is active, the icon will illuminate. By touch-

ing the “Random” key again, the ”Random

Folder” key appears. By touching the “Random”

key once more, the “Random All” key appears. To

cancel Random mode, touch the “Random” key

until no icons are illuminated.

Repeat

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play

pattern to the USB device. When the Repeat

mode is active, the icon will illuminate. By touch-

ing the “Repeat” key again, the ”Repeat Track”

key appears. By touching the “Repeat” key once

more, the “Repeat Folder” key appears. . To can-

cel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no

icons are illuminated.

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-

mation regarding the proper use and care of the

device.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the

iPod® can be controlled with the audio system

controls and display screen, use the USB con-

nection port located on the center console below

the heater and air conditioner controls. Connect

the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod®

and the USB end of the cable to the USB con-

nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod® sup-

ports charging via a USB connection, its battery

LHA3794

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

will be charged while connected to the vehicle

with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-

tion.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can

only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re-

move the USB end of the cable from the USB

connection port on the vehicle, then remove the

cable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

●iPod® Classic - 5th Generation (firmware

version 1.3.0 or later)

●iPod® Classic - 6th Generation (firmware

version 2.0.1 or later)

●iPod® Classic - 7th Generation (firmware

version 2.0.4 or later)

●iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.3.1 or later)

●iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1.3 or later)

●iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1.3 or later)

●iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.0.4 or later)

●iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.0.2 or later)

●iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1 or later)

●iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware

version 4.2.1 or later)

●iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware ver-

sion 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0 required

for smartphone integration)

●iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware ver-

sion 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0 required

for smartphone integration)

●iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)

●iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)

(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone

integration)

●iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)

(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone

integration)

●iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone

integration)

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to

the version indicated above.

Audio main operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position. Press the MEDIA button repeatedly to

switch to the iPod® mode.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod®

was playing, pressing the button will start

the iPod®.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons

When the SEEK/CAT button or

TRACK button is pressed for less than 1.5 sec-

onds while the iPod® is playing, the next track or

the beginning of the current track on the iPod®

will be played.

When the SEEK/CAT button or

TRACK button is pressed for more than 1.5 sec-

onds while the iPod® is playing, the iPod® will

play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the

button is released, the iPod® will return to the

normal play speed.

REPEAT (RPT)

When the RPT button is pressed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed as

follows:

Repeat Off →1 Track Repeat →All Repeat →

Repeat Off

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-

peated.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

All Repeat: all songs in the current list are re-

peated.

Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied.

RANDOM (RDM)

When the RDM button is pressed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed as

follows:

Shuffle Off →Track Shuffle →Album Shuffle →

Shuffle Off

Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list will be

played randomly.

Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list will

be played randomly.

Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied.

BACK button

When the BACK button is pressed, it re-

turns to the previous menu.

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-

mation regarding the proper use and care of the

device.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the

iPod® can be controlled with the audio system

controls and display screen, use the USB con-

nection port located on the center console below

the heater and air conditioner controls. Connect

the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod®

and the USB end of the cable to the USB con-

nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod® sup-

ports charging via a USB connection, its battery

LHA3794

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

will be charged while connected to the vehicle

with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-

tion.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can

only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re-

move the USB end of the cable from the USB

connection port on the vehicle, then remove the

cable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

●iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.3.0 or later)

●iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware ver-

sion 2.0.1 or later)

●iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware ver-

sion 2.0.4 or later)

●iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware ver-

sion 4.2.1 or later)*

●iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware ver-

sion 5.1 or later)

●iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware ver-

sion 5.1 or later)

●iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.3.1 or later)

●iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1.3 or later)

●iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1.3 or later)

●iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.0.4 or later)

●iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.0.2 or later)

●iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1 or later)

●iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)

●iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)

●iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)

●iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

* Some features of this iPod® may not be fully

functional.

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to

the version indicated above.

Audio main operation

AUX button

When the AUX button is pressed with the system

off and the iPod® connected, the system will turn

on. If another audio source is playing and the

iPod® is connected, press the AUX button re-

peatedly until the center display changes to the

iPod® mode.

LHA4007

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

Interface

The interface for iPod® operation shown on the

vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to

the iPod® interface. Use the

touch-screen, BACK button or the scroll-

ing knob to navigate the menus on the screen.

When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu” key

to bring up the iPod® interface.

Depending on the iPod® model, the following

items may be available on the menu list screen.

For additional information, refer to the iPod®

Owner’s Manual regarding each menu item.

●Playlists

●Artists

●Albums

●Genres

●Songs

●Composers

●Audiobooks

●Podcasts

●Update Music Library (if so equipped)

Shuffle and repeat play mode

While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern can

be altered so that songs are repeated or played

randomly.

Shuffle

Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random play

pattern to the iPod®. When the Shuffle mode is

active, the text is illuminated. Touching the

“Shuffle” key once more will display the “Shuffle

songs” key. To cancel Shuffle mode, touch the

“Shuffle” key again until the text is no longer

illuminated.

Repeat

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play

pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat mode is

active, the text is illuminated. Touching the “Re-

peat” key once more will display the “Repeat

song” key. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the

“Repeat” key again until the text is no longer

illuminated.

Seek buttons

Press the or seek button to skip

backward or forward one track.

Press and hold the or seek button

for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse

or fast forward the track being played. The track

plays at an increased speed while reversing or

fast forwarding. When the button is released, the

track returns to normal play speed.

LHA2907

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Scrolling menus

While navigating long lists of artists, albums or

songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll

the list by the first character in the name. To

activate character indexing, touch and hold the

“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the screen.

Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to choose the

number or letter to jump to in the list and then

press the ENTER/AUDIO button.

If no character is selected after a few seconds,

the display returns to normal.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio de-

vice that is capable of playing audio files, the

device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio

system so that the audio files on the device play

through the vehicle’s speakers.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the

vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Select “Bluetooth”.

3. Select “Add Phone or Device”. This same

screen can be accessed to remove, replace

or select a different Bluetooth® device.

4. The system acknowledges the command

and asks you to initiate connecting from the

phone handset.

LHA2279 LHA2775

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

5. The system will display a PIN on the screen

and request confirmation that it matches the

one on the handset.

6. Using the menu control switch on the steer-

ing wheel, select “Yes” and then press

the button. If the PIN does not match,

the wrong device may have been selected

on the handset.

NOTE:

The connecting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone model. For additional information, re-

fer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual. You

can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth

or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions

on connecting NISSAN recommended cellu-

lar phones.

Audio main operation

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press

the MEDIA button repeatedly until the

Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the

screen.

The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are dis-

played on the screen. Use the Preset 3 button for

play and the Preset 4 button for pause.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio de-

vice that is capable of playing audio files, the

device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio

system so that the audio files on the device play

through the vehicle’s speakers.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the

vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

LHA3711

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

5. The system acknowledges the command

and asks you to initiate connecting from the

phone handset.

NOTE:

The connecting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone model. For additional information, re-

fer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual. You

can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth

or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions

on connecting NISSAN recommended cellu-

lar phones.

Audio main operation

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press

the AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth®

audio mode is displayed on the screen.

The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are dis-

played on the screen. CD CARE AND CLEANING

●Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

●Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

●To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

●Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

LHA2844 LHA0049

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

●A new disc may be rough on the inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges by

rubbing the inner and outer edges with the

side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using the

controls on the steering wheel.

1. SOURCE switch

2. Menu control switch/ENTER button

3. switches

4. Volume control switch

SOURCE switch

With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-

tion, push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio

system on.

Push the SOURCE switch to change the mode in

the following sequence:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →SXM1 (satellite radio, if so

equipped) →SXM2 (satellite radio, if so equip-

ped)→SXM3 (satellite radio, if so equipped) →

CD* →USB/iPod®*→Bluetooth® Audio* →Au-

dio App*→AUX* →AM.

* These modes are only available when compat-

ible media storage is inserted into the device or

connected to the system.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch to increase or

decrease the volume.

Menu control

switch/ENTER button

While the display is showing a map or audio

screen, tilt the Menu Control switch upward or

downward to select a station, track, CD or folder.

For most audio sources, tilting the switch

up/down for more than 1.5 seconds provides a

different function than a tilting up/down for less

than 1.5 seconds.

LHA3812

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

AM and FM

●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.

●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

seek up or down to the next station.

●Press the ENTER button to show the list of

preset stations.

SXM (if so equipped)

●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.

●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

go to the next or previous channel.

●Press the ENTER button to show the SXM

Menu.

iPod®

●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

●Press the ENTER button to show the iPod

Menu.

●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the folder number (if

playing compressed audio files).

●Press the ENTER button to show the CD

Menu.

USB

●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the folder number.

●Press the ENTER button to show the USB

Menu.

Bluetooth® Audio

●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

skip ahead or back to the next song.

●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

reverse or fast forward the current song.

AUX

●Press the ENTER button to show the AUX

Menu.

ANTENNA

The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be

removed. When you need to remove the antenna,

turn the antenna rod counterclockwise.

To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna rod

clockwise and hand tighten.

CAUTION

●Always properly tighten the antenna

rod during installation or the antenna

rod may break during vehicle operation.

●Be sure that the antenna is removed

before the vehicle enters an automatic

car wash.

●Be sure to fold down the antenna be-

fore the vehicle enters a garage with a

low ceiling.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone Inte-

gration technology. This allows many compatible

Smartphone applications to be displayed and

easily controlled through the vehicle’s touch-

screen.

NOTE:

A compatible smartphone and registration

is required to use mobile applications or to

access connected features of certain ve-

hicle applications.

REGISTERING WITH

NISSANCONNECT

MOBILE APPS

To use the Smartphone Integration feature, it is

necessary for the user to register. In order to

website,

www.nissanusa.com/connect/ or

www.canada.nissanconnect.com (For Canada)

and sign up or create an account through the

prompts on the NissanConnect Mobile App.

Once registered, download the NissanConnect

App from your compatible phone’s application

download source and then log into the applica-

tion. If you already have an account created

through the App, please log in.

CONNECT PHONE

To use this feature, a compatible smartphone

must be connected via Bluetooth® or USB to the

vehicle. For additional information on connecting

your phone, refer to Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System without Navigation System” or

“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with

Navigation System” in this section.

NOTE:

For vehicles with navigation, Apple

iPhones® REQUIRE the phone to be

plugged in via USB for NissanConnect Mo-

bile Apps to function.

For vehicles without Navigation, Apple

iPhones® must be paired via Bluetooth®

for NissanConnect Mobile Apps to func-

tion.

NOTE:

For Android phones, NissanConnect Mo-

bile Apps REQUIRES the phone to be

paired via Bluetooth®.

APPLICATION DOWNLOAD

Once connected, the NissanConnect App will

search your phone to determine which compat-

ible applications are currently installed. The user

will then choose which apps they want to bring

into their vehicle from the list of apps within the

“Manage My Apps” section of the NissanCon-

nect App on their smartphone. The vehicle will

then download the in-vehicle interface for each of

these compatible applications. Once down-

loaded, the user can access their selected smart-

phone applications through the vehicle interface.

For additional information on application avail-

ability visit www.nissanusa.com/connect/ or

www.canada.nissanconnect.com

NISSANCONNECT

MOBILE APPS

(if so equipped)

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NissanConnect

Services is a suite of telemat-

ics tools that provide emergency preparedness,

remote access, customizable alerts and conve-

nience services. This feature is an option on

Navigation equipped vehicles. For additional in-

formation, refer to the separate Navigation Sys-

tem Owner’s Manual.

Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant can be

accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes Free can be

accessed in Siri Eyes Free mode to reduce user

distraction. In this mode, Siri Eyes Free is avail-

able for interaction by voice control. After con-

necting a compatible Apple device by using

Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated from

the TALK switch on the steering wheel.

Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

●Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as dis-

playing pictures or opening apps, may not

be available while driving.

●For best results, always update your device

to the latest software version.

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate the

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing the voice commands cor-

rectly.

●For functions that can be used in Siri Eyes

Free, please refer to the Apple website.

REQUIREMENTS

Siri is only available on the iPhone® 4S or later.

Devices released before iPhone® 4S are not

supported by the Siri Eyes Free system. Visit

www.apple.com/ios/siri for details about device

compatibility.

Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please check

phone settings.

If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be

accessible from the lock screen. Please check

phone settings.

For best results, always update your device to the

latest software version.

NISSANCONNECT

SERVICES (if so

equipped)

SIRI® EYES FREE (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

SIRI® ACTIVATION

Siri® Eyes Free function can be activated by

pushing TALK switch on the steering

wheel.

Models with navigation system

1. Connect an Siri Eyes Free enabled iPhone®

to the vehicle. For additional information,

refer to “Connecting procedure” in this sec-

tion.

2. After the Bluetooth® connection is estab-

lished, push and hold the TALK

switch to activate the Siri Eyes Free function.

Models without navigation system

1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled iPhone®

to the vehicle. For additional information,

refer to “Initialization” in this section.

2. After the Bluetooth® connection is estab-

lished, the switch operation select screen is

displayed.

3. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” for Siri

Eyes Free activation Switch action can also

be changed from the Bluetooth® settings

menu. For additional information, refer to

“Changing Siri Eyes Free Settings (models

without navigation system)” in this section.

OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE

1. Push or push and hold the TALK

switch.

2. Speak your command and then listen to the

Siri Eyes Free reply.

After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the

TALK switch again within 5 seconds of the end of

the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend the

session.

Example 1 – Playing music

1. Push or push and hold the TALK

switch.

2. Say “Play (artist name, song name, etc.)”.

3. Your vehicle will automatically change to

Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode* when

the music starts playing. Mode selection is

determined by the phone.

* If the iPhone® is also connected with the USB

cable.

If the audio track does not start playing automati-

cally after Siri Eyes Free ends, try changing the

track or audio source to resume playback.

NOTE:

For best results, use the native music app.

Performance of music control function

while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other

3rd party music apps may vary and is con-

trolled by the iPhone®.

Example 2 – Replying to text messages

1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected and

“Show Notifications” of the iPhone® set-

tings is enabled, the vehicle will display a

notification for new incoming text messages.

2. After reading the message, push or push

and hold the TALK switch to reply

using Siri Eyes Free.

3. After a beep sounds, say “Text message” or

a similar command to reply using Siri Eyes

Free.

LHA4005

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE

SETTINGS (models with navigation

system)

Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in the

Bluetooth settings menu. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Bluetooth® settings”in this section.

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Phone settings” key.

5. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” to set

the activation.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot access Siri Eyes

Free from switch on the

steering wheel

Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.

Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.

Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.

Models without navigation system:

Check the settings for Siri Eyes Free activation on the vehicle audio system. If the setting is “Long Press”, you must push and hold the TALK

switch on the steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds to start Siri Eyes Free. If the setting is “Short Press”, a short push and release of the switch

should start Siri Eyes Free.

Audio Source does not

change automatically to

iPod® or Bluetooth® Audio

mode

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may

vary.

For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade performance.

Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the steering wheel.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Play, pause, next track, previ-

ous track or play timer does

not work

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may

vary and is controlled by the device.

Cannot hear any music/

audio being played back

from a connected iPhone®

Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.

Cannot hear map turn-by-

turn direction guidance from

a connected iPhone®

Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.

Cannot receive text message

notifications on the vehicle

audio system

Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”. Press the info

button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.

Cannot reply to text mes-

sage notifications by Siri

Eyes Free

After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push or push and hold the TALK switch on the steering wheel for Siri

Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

●The Mobile Entertainment System is

designed for rear seat passenger view-

ing only.

●It is unlawful in most jurisdictions for a

person to drive a motor vehicle which is

equipped with a television viewer or

screen that is located in the motor ve-

hicle at any point forward of the back of

the driver’s seat, or that is visible, di-

rectly or indirectly, to the driver while

operating the vehicle.

●In the interest of safety, the monitors

should never be installed where they

will be visible, directly or indirectly, by

the operator of the motor vehicle.

●If your vehicle is equipped with a wire-

less rear seat audio system or any other

wireless infrared device, make sure it is

powered off when operating the Rear

Seat Entertainment System. If both sys-

tems are powered on at the same time,

the two systems may obstruct each

other, possibly creating undesirable au-

dio interference through the wireless

headphones.

●For safety reasons, when changing

video discs it is recommended that the

vehicle is not in motion, and that you do

not allow children to unfasten safety

belts to change discs or make any ad-

justments to the system. System adjust-

ments can be accomplished using the

remote control unit, while safety belts

remain fastened.

CAUTION

●Be sure to run the vehicle engine while

using the system. Using this system

without running the engine can result in

a battery drain. To avoid the risk of

battery drain, please remember to turn

off the system when the vehicle is not in

use. Do not touch the inner pins of the

jacks on the front panel. Electrostatic

discharge may cause permanent dam-

age to the system.

NOTE:

Depending on the USB device, it may or

may not charge when connected to the USB

connection port. Not all devices are able to

charge when connected to the USB connec-

tion port.

Each monitor includes a built-in dual channel

infrared transmitter for use with wireless head-

phones. The wireless headphones must be used

within a line of sight from the transmitter as infra-

red transmission, like visible light, travels only in a

straight line.

When placing the headphones on your head,

make sure to observe the Left and Right orienta-

tion. The headphones must be oriented correctly

(facing forward) in order to receive the audio

signal. Press the power button on the head-

phones, then select channel “A” to listen to moni-

tor A, or channel “B”to listen to monitor B. Adjust

the audio level using the volume control on each

headphone.

There is a 3.5mm stereo headphone output jack

on each monitor which can be used with any

standard stereo headphone with an in-line vol-

ume control (wired headphones sold separately).

The system includes a built-in infrared receiver

for use with the included wireless remote control.

For additional information, refer to “Remote con-

trol operation” in this section.

NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT

SYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

1. Status lights

2. Disc Compartment Slot

3. IR Sensor/Transmitter

4. Monitor Adjustment

5. TFT LCD Panel

6. USB Port

7. Audio Video Output Jack

8. Headphone Output Jack

9. Audio Video Input Jacks

10. I/O Port Covers

11. Lever Lock and Release Latch

FRONT PANEL BUTTONS

CAUTION

●Do not use any harsh solvents or chemi-

cals when cleaning the unit.

●Do not use any abrasive cleaners that

may scratch the screen. Use only a

lightly dampened lint free cloth to wipe

the screen if it is dirty.

●Position LCD monitor in the fully closed

position when not in use.

●Before using the monitor, ensure lever

lock and release latch is engaged in the

normal viewing position 䊊

●Do not put pressure on the screen.

●Caution children to avoid touching the

screen, as it may become dirty or

damaged.

Status lights

The status lights illuminate if there is no disc

present in the unit.

Disc Compartment Slot

Insert a disc to play.

LHA3804

4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

IR Sensor/Transmitter

The IR sensor allows the remote control to oper-

ate the monitor. The IR transmitter provides audio

to IR wireless headphones.

Monitor Adjustment

The monitor is hinged to allow the user to manu-

ally adjust the viewing angle of the LCD panel 䊊

TFT LCD Panel

7–inch TFT LCD Panel..

USB Port

Play videos, music, and images stored on most

USB devices. It also allows for charging some

USB devices.

Audio Video Output Jack

Connect to an external audio/video monitor using

a 3.5mm A/V connector (sold separately).

Headphone Output Jack

Connect wired headphones using a 3.5mm ste-

reo connector. Headphones must include in-line

volume control in order to adjust the volume level.

Audio Video Input Jacks

Connect to an external audio/video source using

RCA type connectors (sold separately).

I/O Port Covers

Gently pull down on the I/O covers to expose the

ports. Keep the ports covered when not in use.

Lever Lock & Release Latch

The lever lock and release latch located behind

the monitor limits the monitor angle (normal view-

ing 䊊

A). Sliding the latch to the left will allow the

monitor to open to the service position 䊊

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

1. POWER button

2. UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT buttons

3. PLAY button

4. STOP button

5. PAUSE button PLAY button

6. MENU/SELECT button

7. EJECT button

8. SOURCE button

FRONT PANEL BUTTONS

OPERATION

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT buttons

These buttons are used to navigate the contents

of the display menus.

POWER buttons

Press this button to turn the monitor on or off.

SOURCE button

Press this button to cycle between monitor A

audio/video sources and monitor B audio/video

sources.

EJECT buttons

Press this button to eject the disc.

PLAY button

Press this button to play the media.

STOP button

Press this button to stop media playback.

PAUSE button

Press this button to pause media playback.

MENU/SELECT button

Press this button to access the DVD OSD menu.

Press the SETUP button on the remote control to

exit the DVD OSD menu. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “How to use the DVD OSD Menu” in

this section.

WIRELESS HEADPHONE

OPERATION

LHA3845

4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Installing the batteries

Before attempting to operate the headphones,

install the batteries as described below.

1. Remove headphone battery cover 䊊

2. Install two “AAA” batteries into the head-

phones. Make sure the proper polarity (+ or

–) is observed.

3. Reinstall headphone battery cover.

Headphone operation

Press the power button 䊊

Aon the headphones to

turn on and off the headphones. The red LED will

illuminate when the headphone is turned on. Set

the select switch 䊊

Bto “A” or “B” for use with the

“A” monitor or “B” monitor respectively. Use the

volume thumb wheel䊊

Cto adjust the volume level

for the headphone audio.

NOTE:

If the headphones are accidentally left on

and system is powered off, a battery saver

feature will automatically turn off the head-

phones after approximately 3 minutes.

CAUTION

●Always ensure that the batteries are

inserted with the positive and negative

terminals in the correct direction as

shown in the battery compartment.

●Different types of batteries have differ-

ent characteristics. Do not mix different

types.

LHA3846 LHA3847 LHA3810

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

●Remove the batteries if the head-

phones are not used for a month or

longer.

REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION

Before attempting to operate your remote con-

trol, install the batteries described below.

1. Turn the remote control face down. Press

down on the ridged area of the battery cover

and slide it off.

2. Install two “AAA” batteries. Make sure that

proper polarity (+ or —) is observed.

3. Slide the cover back into place until it clicks.

NOTE:

The remote control will only operate this

device. It is not a universal remote control

and will not control other equipment.

WARNING

●Keep the batteries out of the reach of

children. Should the batteries be swal-

lowed, immediately consult a doctor.

Also, when disposing of used batteries,

please comply with governmental regu-

lations or environmental public institu-

tion rules that apply in your

country/area.

CAUTION

●Always ensure that the batteries are

inserted with the positive and negative

terminals in the correct direction as

shown in the battery compartment.

LHA3848

4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●Different types of batteries have differ-

ent characteristics. Do not mix different

types.

●Do not mix old and new batteries. Mix-

ing old and new batteries will shorten

battery life and/or cause chemical leaks

from the old batteries.

●When batteries fail to function, replace

them immediately.

●Remove the batteries if the remote con-

trol is not used for a month or longer.

REMOTE CONTROL BUTTONS

1. POWER button

2. SOURCE button

3. SETUP button

4. EJECT button

5. DVD-B button

6. SOUND AROUND SELECT button

7. PIX button

8. REPEAT button

9. RIGHT button

10. ENTER button

11. A-B button

12. R-S button

13. ERASE/ADD button

14. AUDIO button

15. ANGLE button

16. GO TO button

17. DISPLAY button

18. PROGRAM button

19. RANDOM button

20. 3D button

21. PBC (Video CD only) button

22. ZOOM button

23. NEXT button

LHA4093

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

24. PREV button

25. FF (Fast forward) button

26. FR (Fast rewind) button

27. STOP button

28. PLAY/PAUSE button

29. Number Keys

30. SUBTITLE button

31. TITLE button

32. CH-SEARCH/SKIP button

33. AUTO MEMORY button

34. DOWN button

35. RETURN button

36. LEFT button

37. UP button

38. MENU button

39. MUTE button

40. SOUND AROUND ON/OFF button

41. DVD-A button

NOTE:

The following remote control functions do

not apply to this model: A-B and Program.

POWER button

Press this button to turn the monitor on. Press

this button again to turn the monitor off.

Source button

Press this button to cycle between monitor A

audio/video sources and monitor B audio/video

sources.

Setup button

Press this button to navigate the DVD OSD

menu. For additional information, refer to “How to

use the DVD OSD menu” in this section.

Eject button

Press this button to eject the disc.

DVD–B button

Press this button to transmit the remote control

codes and functions to operate monitor B.

SOUND AROUND SELECT button

Selects a FM transmitter channel.

PIX button

Press this button to access the picture adjust-

ment menu and select between BRIGHTNESS,

CONTRAST, SATURATION, HUE, SHARP-

NESS, IR HEADPHONE, LANGUAGE, and RE-

SET. Press the or buttons to

adjust the screen.

REPEAT button

Press this button to select between different

repeat modes.

ENTER button

Press this button to make a selection or begin

playback of the media.

RIGHT button

Press this button to navigate right when display-

ing a menu or file list.

A-B button

Press the A-B button once to set point A and

then press again to set point B. Playback will now

repeat between point A and point B.

R-S button

Non-functioning.

4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ERASE / ADD button

Non-functioning.

AUDIO button

Press this button to select and listen to different

audio streams (this function only applies to DVD

titles that support multiple audio streams).

ANGLE button

Press this button to select different viewing

angles (this function only applies to DVD titles

that support multiple angles).

GO TO button

Non-functioning.

DISPLAY button

Press this button to display various information

including title, chapter/track, elapsed time, time

remaining, or turn off the display.

PROGRAM button

Edit a playback program containing desired titles

in the DVD or tracks in the CD-DA.

RANDOM button

Press this button to play content in a random

order.

3D button

Press this button to select between several audio

effects. DVD mode: Concert, Living Room, Hall,

Bathroom, Cave, Arena, Church, and Off.

PBC (Video CD only) button

Press this button to run the playback control on or

off.

ZOOM button

Press this button to zoom in or out when display-

ing images or playing DVDs. The zoom range for

images is from 50% to 200%. The zoom range

for DVDs is from 1/4 size to 4x the original size.

NEXT button

Press this button to select the next chapter, track,

or file.

PREV button

Press this button to select the previous chapter,

track, or file.

FF (Fast foward) button

Press this button to search media forwards.

FR (Fast rewind) button

Press this button to search media backwards.

STOP button

Press this button once to stop playback (press

play to resume playback). Press this button twice

to perform a full stop (press play to start playback

from the beginning).

PLAY/PAUSE button

Press this button to begin media playback. Press

this button again to pause media playback.

Number Keys

0—9

SUBTITLE button

Press this button to select and display subtitles

(this function only applies to DVD titles that sup-

port subtitles).

TITLE button

Press this button to navigate the title menu if

included on the disc.

CH- SEARCH/SKIP button

Non-functioning.

AUTO MEMORY button

Non-functioning.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

DOWN button

Press this button to navigate down when display-

ing a menu or file list.

RETURN button

Press this button to return to a previous menu

screen.

LEFT button

Press this button to navigate left when displaying

a menu or file list.

UP button

Press this button to navigate up when displaying

a menu or file list.

MENU button

Press this button to go to the root menu if in-

cluded on the disc.

MUTE button

Press this button to mute the audio when playing

discs or playing files from a USB device. Press

this button again to resume audio.

SOUND AROUND ON/OFF

Turns the FM transmitter ON/OFF.

DVD–A button

Press this button to transmit the remote control

codes and functions to operate monitor A.

GENERAL OPERATING

INSTRUCTIONS

Turning the monitor ON or OFF

1. Press the POWER button on the front panel

or the remote control to turn the monitor on

or off. When powered on, the front panel

controls will illuminate.

2. After the monitor has been turned on and is

displaying a picture, adjust the viewing angle

by pivoting the screen to optimize the picture

quality.

3. Remember to turn the monitor off and return

the LCD monitor to the fully closed (upright)

position when not in use.

Listening through vehicle speakers

Press the AUX button on the factory radio and

toggle through AUX screens to select VTRF —

Jack to listen to the audio from monitor A.

Sharing sources between Monitor A

and Monitor B

The source button on your monitor unit or remote

control allows viewing monitor A video on moni-

tor B and vice versa. Press the source button to

cycle through available video sources.

Disc/DVD Basic Operation

To get the most use out of each disc, make sure

you read this section completely.

For additional information, refer to “CD care and

cleaning” in this section.

Regional coding

Both the DVD player and discs are coded by

region. These regional codes must match in order

for the disc to play. The system is preset to the

region code designated for your area by the DVD

Copy Control Association. Other regions may not

be played in this system.

Supported Disc Types

●DVD-Video: DVD contains video

●DVD +/- R: DVD contains video

●CD-DA: CD contains audio

●CD-Video: CD contains video

●CD-R/+RW: CD contains audio

4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Unsupported Disc Types

Before you load a disc, make sure that it is

compatible with the player. Note that the follow-

ing disc CANNOT be used with this system:

Optical disc- CD-1, CD-ROM, and DVD-ROM

Mini disc- CDG (audio only, not graphics), and

Blu-ray (list is not all inclusive).

Loading and Playing Discs

Press the POWER button to turn the monitor on.

Insert the disc about halfway into the disc com-

partment slot, with the disc’s label facing the rear

of the vehicle. Do NOT insert the disc at an angle.

The Disc must be inserted straight into the player.

The disc will load automatically and begin to play.

Some discs may start at the root menu, where

playback must be selected to start a movie. De-

pending on the disc and playback location on the

disc, a “ ” icon may be displayed in the upper-

left hand corner of the screen indicating that

playback is not possible during certain times.

Additional information on Media

Compatibility

This system is compatible with the following me-

dia formats:

Format Extension

Audio MP3 .mp3

WMA .wma

Video

AVI .avi

MPEG-1 .mpg

MPEG-2 .mpg

Image JPEG .jpg

Due to ongoing technological advancements,

some USB flash drives may be incompatible with

this system.

●The text information of some audio and video

files may not be correctly displayed.

●There may be a slight delay before playback

of files using a USB flash drive with complex

folder hierarchies.

●Some audio, video, and image files may be

incompatible with this system due to file

characteristics, file format, recording soft-

ware used, directory structure, and/or the

type of audio/video encoding used.

HOW TO USE THE DVD OSD MENU

This section describes how to set and adjust

settings using On-Screen Display (OSD) Menu.

You can use the OSD menu to adjust all the

settings. Follow the steps outlined below to se-

lect the desired function.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

General Setup Page

Press the SETUP button on the remote control.

Use the or and the

or buttons to navigate the Setup Page.

Press ENTER to select and then to

return to the sub–menu. To cancel the Setup

Display, press the SETUP button on the remote.

OSD Language

The OSD Lang sub-menu allows the user to

select the language for the on-screen display.

When the OSD Lang option is highlighted, press

the button once and then use

the or buttons on the re-

mote control to select the desired language. The

user can select English, Simplified/Traditional

Chinese, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Por-

tuguese, or Korean for the OSD language. Press

ENTER to select and then the button

to return to the sub-menu.

Angle Mark

The angle mark is an option for different viewing

angles on the DVD. When the Angle Mark option

is highlighted, press the button once

and then use the or buttons

on the remote control to turn the angle mark

setting on or off. Press ENTER to select and then

the button to return to the sub-menu.

LHA3851 LHA3852 LHA3853

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Speaker Setup Page

Downmix— When the Downmix option is high-

lighted, press the button once and

then use the or buttons on

the remote control to select between Stereo or

LT/RT. Press ENTER to select and then

the button to return to the sub-menu.

Video Setup Page

Video Quality — When the Quality option is high-

lighted, press ENTER and then use the

or and the or but-

tons on the remote control to select between the

various video quality settings. Press ENTER to

select and then the button to return to

the sub-menu.

Video Quality Setup

Option Description Range Default

Sharpness

Adjust to soften

or sharpen the

picture.

Low/

Med/

High

Low

Brightness

Adjust to

brighten or

darken the

picture.

-20 —

+20 00

Contrast

Adjust to in-

crease or de-

crease picture

contrast.

-16 —

+16 00

LHA3854 LHA3855 LHA3856

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

Option Description Range Default

Gamma

Adjust to in-

crease or de-

crease the pic-

ture gamma.

Low/

Med/

High/

None

Hue

Adjust to in-

crease or de-

crease the color

hue.

-09 —

+09 00

Saturation

Adjust to in-

crease or de-

crease color

intensity.

-09 —

+09 00

Luma De-

lay

Adjust to

change the

Luma delay.

0T or 1T 1T Preference Page

If a disc or USB device is playing, press STOP

twice (full stop). Press the SETUP button on the

remote control. Use the or

and the or buttons on the

remote control to navigate the Setup Page. Press

ENTER to select and then the to return

to the sub-menu.

Audio

The Audio sub-menu allows the user to select the

audio stream in the desired language for play-

back. When the Audio option is highlighted,

press the button once and then use

the or buttons on the re-

mote control to select the desired language. The

user can select English, French, Spanish, Chi-

nese, Japanese, German, Portuguese, Italian, Ko-

rean, Russian or Thai for the audio stream lan-

guage. Press ENTER to select and then

the button to return to the sub-menu.

The DVD title must include the desired audio

stream in order for it to be heard during playback.

LHA3857 LHA3858

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Subtitle

The Subtitle sub-menu allows the user to select

the subtitle in the desired language for playback.

When the Subtitle option is highlighted, press

the button once and then use

the or buttons on the re-

mote control to select the desired language. The

user can select English, French, Spanish, Chi-

nese, Japanese, German, Portuguese, Italian, Ko-

rean, Russian, Thai or OFF for the subtitle lan-

guage. Press ENTER to select and then

the button to return to the sub-menu.

The DVD title must include the desired audio

stream in order for it to be heard during playback.

Disc Menu

The Disc Menu sub-menu allows the user to

select the desired language of the DVD disc

menu. When the Disc Menu option is highlighted,

press the button once and then use

the or buttons on the re-

mote control to select the desired language. The

user can select English, French, Spanish, Chi-

nese, Japanese, German, Portuguese, Italian, Ko-

rean, Russian or Thai for the Disc Menu language.

Press ENTER to select and then the

button to return to the sub-menu. The DVD title

must include the desired menu language in order

for it to be displayed during playback.

Default

This section of the Setup Menu allows the user to

restore all controls and values to the default

levels. When the Default option is highlighted,

press the button once and then press

ENTER to perform the reset. This will not affect

parental control setting.

LHA3859 LHA3860 LHA3861

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

Parental

This section of the Setup Menu allows the user to

select the level of movie content playback from

KID SAFE to ADULT. The parental control func-

tion allows you to limit viewing to your preference.

The rating levels range from 1 to 8 and are

country dependent. The lower rating number, the

stricter the playback limitation is. When the Pa-

rental option is highlighted, press the

button once and then use the

or buttons on the remote control to

select the desired parental control setting and

press ENTER. A password is required to change

the Parental settings. Using the remote control,

enter the password (0000) and press ENTER to

confirm the setting and return to the sub-menu.

HOW TO USE THE MONITOR OSD

This section describes how to set and adjust the

following monitor settings using the monitor on-

screen display (OSD) Menu:

●Press the PIX button on the remote control

to select between the options in the table

below.

●After selecting the desired option, use

the or buttons on the re-

mote control to adjust the setting.

LHA3862 LHA3863

4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Option Descrip-

tion Range Default

Brightness

Adjust to

brighten or

darken the

picture.

0 — 100 50

Contrast

Adjust to

increase

or de-

crease

picture

contrast.

0 — 100 50

Saturation

Adjust to

increase

or de-

crease

color

intensity.

0 — 100 50

Hue

Adjust to

increase

or de-

crease the

color hue.

0 — 100 50

Option Descrip-

tion Range Default

Sharpness

Adjust to

soften or

sharpen

the

picture.

0 — 100 50

IR Head-

phone

Select on

or off to

turn the IR

head-

phone

audio out-

put on or

off.

ON or

OFF ON

Language

Set lan-

guage of

the moni-

tor OSD

menu.

English,

French,

Spanish,

Portu-

guese

English

Reset

Resets the

monitor

OSD

menu set-

tings to

default

values.

Press Up

or Down;

“OK” will

displayed.

PLAYING A CD

Insert a disc into the unit with label facing the rear

of vehicle and select monitor A mode (if using

monitor A) or monitor B mode (if using monitor B)

using the front controls or the remote control.

When playing an audio CD, the information

screen appears automatically. It can display the

current track number along with the amount of

time the track has been playing, the amount of

time remaining for the track playing, the total

amount of time elapsed so far, or the total amount

of time remaining.

LHA3864

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105

Display

Press the DISPLAY button on the remote control

to select the desired type of display setting. The

single elapsed time of the current track is dis-

played by default.

Press DISPLAY (1x)

“Single Remain” is displayed along with the cur-

rent track playing and the amount of time remain-

ing for the current track.

Press DISPLAY (2x)

“Total Elapsed” is displayed along with the cur-

rent track playing and the total amount of elapsed

time.

Press DISPLAY (3x)

“Total Remain” is displayed along with the current

track playing and the total amount of time remain-

ing.

Press the DISPLAY button again to display the

elapsed time of the current track.

Skipping Tracks

Press the NEXT button on the remote control to

select to the next track. Press the PREV button

one time to select the beginning of the current

track. Press the PREV button two times to select

the previous track.

Repeat Modes

To access the repeat mode options, press the

REPEAT button on the remote control. The re-

peat mode options are as follows:

●REPEAT ALL: Repeat the entire disc

(default).

●REPEAT ONE: Repeat the current

track.

●REPEAT OFF: Playback stops after the disc

in its entirety.

Random Mode

You can choose what order the tracks will be

played. To access the random play mode, press

the RANDOM button on the remote control. All

tracks on the disc will playback in random order.

Press RANDOM again to cancel random mode.

Direct Track Access

Press the number keys on the remote control

(0–9) to access a track directly. For example, to

go to track 14, press “1”,”4”, then ENTER on the

remote control.

PLAYING AUDIO FILES

MP3 and WMA are formats for storing digital

audio. A CD quality song can be compressed into

the MP3 or WMA format with very little loss of

quality, while talking up much less storage space.

Encoded discs and USB devices that include

MP3 or WMA audio files can be played on this

system.

Insert a disc or USB device into the unit and

select monitor A mode (if using monitor A) or

monitor B (if using monitor B) using the front

panel controls or the remote control.

LHA3865

4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Using a USB Device

Insert a USB device into the USB connection

port. When inserting a USB device, the top side

of the devices should face upwards.

When an MP3/WMA encoded disc or USB de-

vice is inserted, the information screen appears

automatically and playback will begin.

Display

During audio file playback, press the DISPLAY

button on the remote control to select between

the file list and currently playing file.

Selecting Files

1. To change files when a file is playing, press

the or buttons on the re-

mote control to display the file list, and then

press the or buttons to

select the desired file.

2. Once the desired file is highlighted, press

the ENTER button on the remote control to

select it.

Selecting Folders

1. To select folders when a file is playing, press

the button on the remote control

to display the list. Press the

or buttons to select the desired

folder.

2. Press the button to access the

previous level (go up one level) or, press

the button to access the next level

(go down one level).

3. Once the desired folder is highlighted, press

the ENTER button on the remote control to

select it.

Skipping Files

Press the NEXT button on the remote control to

select to the next file. Press the PREV button one

time to select the beginning of the current file.

Press the PREV button two times to select the

previous file.

Repeat Modes

To access the repeat mode options, press the

REPEAT button on the remote control. The re-

peat mode options are as follows:

●REPEAT ALL: Repeat the entire disc

or USB device (default).

●REPEAT FOLDER: Repeat the cur-

rent folder

●REPEAT ONE: Repeat the current

file.

●REPEAT OFF: Playback stops after the disc

or USB device is played in its entirety.

Random Mode

You can choose what order the files will be

played. To access the random play mode, press

the RANDOM button on the remote control. The

files in the current folder will playback in random

order. Press RANDOM again to cancel random

mode.

Direct File Access

Press the number keys on the remote control

(0–9) to access a file directly. For example, to go

to track 14, press “1”,”4”, then ENTER on the

remote control.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107

PLAYING IMAGE FILES

Insert a disc or USB device into the unit and

select monitor A mode (if using monitor A) or

monitor B (if using monitor B) using the front

panel controls or the remote control.

Using a USB Device

Insert a USB device into the USB connection

port. When inserting a USB device, the top side

of the devices should face upwards.

When a disc or USB device with JPG files is

inserted, the slideshow will begin automatically.

When a disc or USB device with mixed

audio/video/image files is inserted, the file list

screen may appear first.

Selecting Files

1. To select files during the slideshow, press

the MENU button remote control to access

the file list. Press the or

buttons on the remote control to select the

desired file.

2. Once the desired file is highlighted, press

the ENTER button on the remote control to

select it.

Selecting Folders

1. To select folders during the slideshow, press

the MENU button on the remote control to

access the list.

2. Press the button to access the

previous level (go up one level) or, press

the button to access the next level

(go down one level).

3. Once the desired folder is highlighted, press

the ENTER button on the remote control to

select it.

Repeat Modes

To access the repeat mode options, press the

REPEAT button on the remote control. The re-

peat mode options are as follows:

●REPEAT ALL: Repeat the entire disc

or USB device (default).

●REPEAT FOLDER: Repeat the cur-

rent folder

●REPEAT ONE: Repeat the current

file.

●REPEAT OFF: Playback stops after the disc

or USB device is played in its entirety.

Thumbnail Views

1. Press the STOP button on the remote con-

trol during the slideshow to display images

in thumbnail mode. Press the

or and the or

buttons on the remote control to select the

desired language.

2. Once the desired image is highlighted,

press the ENTER button on the remote con-

trol to select it.

LHA3866

4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Rotating Images

During the slideshow, press the button

on the remote control to rotate the image 90°

clockwise. Press the button to rotate

the image 90° counter-clockwise.

Inverting Images

During the slideshow, press the button

on the remote control to invert the image (Up-

Down).

Mirroring Images

During the slideshow, press the button

on the remote control to mirror the image (Left-

Right).

Direct File Access

Press the number keys on the remote control

(0–9) to access a file directly. For example, to go

to track 14, press “1”,”4”, then ENTER on the

remote control.

PLAYING VIDEO FILES

Insert a disc or USB device into the unit and

select monitor A mode (if using monitor A) or

monitor B (if using monitor B) using the front

panel controls or the remote control.

Using a USB Device

Insert a USB device into the USB connection

port. When inserting a USB device, the top side

of the device should face upwards.

When a disc or USB device with video files is

inserted, playback will begin automatically. When

a disc or USB device with mixed

audio/video/image files is inserted, the file list

screen may appear first.

Selecting Files

1. To select files during the video playback,

press the MENU button on the remote con-

trol to access the file list. Press the

or buttons on the remote control to

select the desired file.

2. Once the desired file is highlighted, press

the ENTER button on the remote control to

select it.

Selecting Folders

1. To select folders during video playback,

press the MENU button on the remote con-

trol to access the list.

2. Press the button to access the

previous level (go up one level) or, press

the button to access the next level

(go down one level).

3. Once the desired folder is highlighted, press

the ENTER button on the remote control to

select it.

LHA3867

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109

Skipping Files

Press the NEXT button on the remote control to

select to the next file. Press the PREV button one

time to select the beginning of the current file.

Press the PREV button two times to select the

previous file.

Repeat Modes

To access the repeat mode options, press the

REPEAT button on the remote control. The re-

peat mode options are as follows:

●REPEAT ALL: Repeat the entire disc

or USB device (default).

●REPEAT FOLDER: Repeat the cur-

rent folder

●REPEAT ONE: Repeat the current

file.

●REPEAT OFF: Playback stops after the disc

or USB device is played in its entirety.

Direct File Access

Press the number keys on the remote control

(0–9) to access a file directly. For example, to go

to track 14, press “1”,”4”, then ENTER on the

remote control.

CHARGING A USB DEVICE

Plug the USB cable (not supplied) into the USB

connection port and then connect the other end

to the USB device.

NOTE:

Depending on the device, it may or may not

charge when connected to the USB port.

Not all devices are able to charge when

connected to the USB port.

CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL

AUXILIARY A/V SOURCE — INPUT

An external A/V source such as a media player,

video game, or other audio/video device may be

connected to the RCA type jacks on the front of

the monitor. Connect the external audio/video

source to the RCA type input jacks on the front of

the monitor using RCA type connectors (sold

separately).

Yellow: Video input

Red: Audio-right channel input

White: Audio-left channel input

The system will automatically select the auxiliary

input mode when the RCA type connectors are

inserted into the input jacks. The auxiliary input

connection overrides disc and USB playback.

The system provides priority for each of the fol-

lowing device inputs:

1. External RCA A/V input

2. USB port

3. Disc playback

For example if a disc is playing and a USB device

is plugged in, the USB device will take priority

over disc playback. The external RCA A/V input

connections have priority over both USB port and

disc playback.

CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL A/V

MONITOR — OUTPUT

An external audio/video monitor may be con-

nected to the 3.5mm A/V connector (sold sepa-

rately).

NOTE:

Use the 3.5mm A/V cable made specifically

for the device. An optional adapter (sold

separately) may be used to convert the

3.5mm A/V output to the standard RCA

jacks.

4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SELECTING MONITOR A OR B AS

THE SOURCE

It is possible to select monitor B as the source

from monitor A and vice versa. This will allow

content that is playing on monitor B to be dis-

played on monitor A.

Monitor A:

To select monitor B as the source for monitor A,

press the source button on the front panel or the

remote control until “MONITOR B” is displayed.

Monitor B:

To select monitor A as the source for monitor B,

press the source button on the front panel or the

remote control until “MONITOR A” is displayed.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Remedy

Monitor does

not power on.

Is ignition switch turned to the on or

ACC position?

Are batteries installed in the remote

control?

Check the remote control to make

sure “DVD-A” button is pressed for

controlling monitor A and “DVD-B”

button is pressed for controlling

monitor B.

Symptom Remedy

Remote control

does not

function.

Verify that the batteries in the remote

control are good.

Verify that the remote sensor lens is

not obstructed.

Disc will not

play.

Insert the disc with label side facing

the rear of the vehicle.

Check if the disc is defective by try-

ing another disc.

Check the type of disc being played.

This unit only plays DVD (Single,

Dual Layer), DVD-R/+R, DVD+R

Dual layer, DVD-RW/+RW, CD,

CD-R, and CD-RW.

Both the unit and DVD discs are

coded by region. If the region codes

don’t match, the DVD can’t be

played.

Disc plays, but

stops

intermittently.

The disc is dirty and needs cleaning.

Condensation has formed inside the

unit. Remove the disc and allow unit

to dry out.

No picture.

Check the signal source is

connected.

Check the menu source setting.

Match your monitor mode with the

source correctly.

Distorted

picture.

Check the disc for fingerprints and

clean with a soft cloths, wiping from

center to edge.

Symptom Remedy

Cannot advance

through a DVD

movie.

You cannot advance through the

opening credits and warning infor-

mation that appears at the beginning

of DVDs because the disc is pro-

grammed to prohibit these actions.

No sound or

distorted sound.

Make sure that the external media

device is connected properly, and all

cables are securely inserted into the

appropriate jacks.

Verify that the batteries in the head-

phones are good.

If you are using the wireless

headphones, make sure you turn on

the power and select the correct

monitor(AorB).

Is volume turned on the head-

phones?

Is anything blocking the path be-

tween the monitor IR sensor and

headphones?

When placing the headphones on

your head, make sure to observe the

Left and Right orientation. The head-

phones must be oriented correctly

(facing forward) in order to receive

the audio signal.

Monitor feels

warm.

When the monitor is in use for a

long period of time, the surface will

be warm. This is normal.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111

Symptom Remedy

Player does not

respond to all

commands dur-

ing playback.

Some operations are not permitted

by the DVD.

Refer to the specific instructions

included with the DVD for more

information.

When a DVD is

inserted, a Pa-

rental Setting

message is

displayed, pro-

hibiting DVD

movie playback.

Using the remote control, enter the

4–digit Parental Password (0000)

and then press Enter.

After the Paren-

tal Password is

entered, a Pass-

word Incorrect

message is dis-

played and DVD

movie will not

play.

If the incorrect Parental Password is

entered more than two times, the

until will stop playback and return to

the splashscreen. Using the remote

control, press Play to initiate play-

back and display the Parental Set-

ting message. Using the remote

control, enter the 4–digit Parental

Password (0000) and then press

Enter.

SPECIFICATIONS

LCD Backlight LED

Resolution 480x3(RGB) x234

Display 7”TFT LCD Panel

DVD Mechanism Slot-In Loader

LCD Backlight LED

Supported Disc

DVD (Single, Dual Layer),

DVD-R/+R, DVD-R/+R Dual

layer, DVD-RW/+RW, CD,

CD-R, CD-RW

Sources Internal CD/DVD, USB Flash

Memory, External A/V Input

I/O Ports

USB 2.0 port, 3.5mm A/V

Output Jack, 3.5mm Head-

phone Jack, RCA Type A/V

Input Jacks

Frequency Re-

sponse

20Hz — 20kHz

Headphone (Au-

dio Out)

Output Level: 2Vpp (input

0dB 1kHz)

Load Impedance: 10k

Video Display

System

NTSC/PAL

Video Out Output Level: 1Vpp (±20%)

Load Impedance: 75

Wireless Audio

Dual channel infrared audio

transmitter, supports stereo

headphone operation

IR Channels

Channels

A :2.3/2.8 MHz

B: 3.2/3.8 MHz

FCC NOTICE

This device has been tested and found to comply

with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursu-

ant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable protection

against harmful interference in a residential in-

stallation. This device generates, uses, and can

radiate radio frequency energy, and if not in-

stalled and used in accordance with the instruc-

tions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no guarantee

that interference will not occur in a particular

installation. If this device does cause unaccept-

able interference to radio or television reception,

which can be determined by turning the device

off and on, the user is encouraged to try to

correct the interference by one or more of the

following measures:

●Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

●Increase the separation between the device

and receiver.

●Connect the device into an outlet on a circuit

different from that to which the receiver is

connected.

●Consult your dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

FCC WARNING

WARNING

●To assure continued FCC compliance,

the user must use the provided

grounded power supply cord and the

shielded video interface cable with

bonded ferrite cores.

●Any unauthorized change or modifica-

tions to this device would void the us-

er’s authority to operate this device.

ITE NOTICE

This Class B digital apparatus complies with

Canadian ICES-003.

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1) this

device may not cause interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired operation

of the device.

This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-

located or operation in conjunction with any other

antenna or transmitter.

Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio

transmitter may only operate using an antenna or

a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for

the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce

potential radio interference to other users, the

antenna type and its gain should be so chosen

that the equivalent isotropically radiated power

(e.i.r.p) is not more than that necessary for suc-

cessful communication.

WEEE NOTICE

Disposal of Old Electrical & Electronic Equip-

ment (Applicable in the European Union and

other European countries with separate collec-

tion systems).

This symbol on the product or on its packaging

indicates that the device shall not be treated as

household waste. Instead, it shall be handed over

to the applicable collection point for the recycling

of electrical and electronic equipment By ensur-

ing this device is disposed of correctly, you will

help prevent potential negative consequences

for the environment and human health, which

could otherwise be caused by inappropriate

LHA3869

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113

waste handling of this device. The recycling of

material will help to conserve natural resources.

For additional information about recycling of this

device, please contact your local city office, your

household waste disposal service or the shop

where you purchased the device. Applicable ac-

cessory: remote control.

MACROVISION NOTICE

This product incorporates copyright protection

technology that is protected by method claims of

certain U.S. patents and other intellectual prop-

erty rights owned by Macrovision Corporation

and other rights owners. Use of this copyright

protection technology must be authorized by

Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for

home and other limited viewing used only unless

otherwise authorized by Macrovision

Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassem-

bly is prohibited.

DOLBY DIGITAL

Manufactured under license from Dolby Labora-

tories.

Dolby and the double-D symbol are registered

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in

your vehicle, be sure to observe the following

precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may

adversely affect the engine control system and

other electronic parts.

WARNING

●A cellular phone should not be used for

any purpose while driving so full atten-

tion may be given to vehicle operation.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of

cellular phones while driving.

●If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-

lar phone operational mode (if so

equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-

ercise extreme caution at all times so

full attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

LHA3870

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

●Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control

modules.

●Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic control

system harnesses. Do not route the an-

tenna wire next to any harness.

●Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio

as recommended by the manufacturer.

●Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

●For additional information, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

WARNING

●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle

in a safe location. If you have to use a

phone while driving, exercise extreme

caution at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-

patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you

can set up the wireless connection between your

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with

your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the

in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-

necting procedure is required. Your phone is

automatically connected with the in-vehicle

phone module when the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position with the previously connected

cellular phone turned on and carried in the ve-

hicle.

NOTE:

Some devices require the user to accept

connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If

your phone does not connect automatic

ally to the system, consult the phone’s

Owner’s Manual for details on device op-

eration.

You can connect up to five different Bluetooth®

cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

●Set up the wireless connection between a

compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module before using the hands-free

phone system.

●Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized or work properly.

Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth

or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and connecting instruc-

tions.

LHA3780

4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-

vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive a cellular signal; such

as in a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, near a tall building or in a moun-

tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

●When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-

ing a call.

●Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

●While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may dis-

charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge

cellular phones.

●Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers. Stor-

ing the device in a different location may

reduce or eliminate the noise.

●For additional information, refer to the cellu-

lar phone Owner’s Manual regarding the

telephone charges, cellular phone antenna

and body, etc.

●For additional information, refer to “Trouble-

shooting guide” in this section. You can also

visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshoot-

ing help if the hands-free phone system

seems to be malfunctioning.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the

supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-

quirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The system allows hands-free operation of the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may

not be available so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,

which takes a few seconds. If the button is

pressed before the initialization completes, the

system will announce “Hands-free phone system

not ready” and will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSAN

Voice Recognition system, observe the following:

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Keep all vents pointed away from

the microphone and close the windows to

eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises,

vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent

the system from recognizing voice com-

mands correctly.

●Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

●Start speaking a command within 5 seconds

after the tone sounds.

●Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

●For calling contacts by name, please say

both the first and last name of the contact for

better recognition.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press

and release the button located on the

steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a

command.

The command given is picked up by the micro-

phone, and voice feedback is given when the

command is accepted.

●If you need to hear the available commands

for the current menu again, say “Help” and

the system will repeat them.

●If a command is not recognized, the system

announces, “Command not recognized.

Please try again.” Make sure the command is

said exactly as prompted by the system and

repeat the command in a clear voice.

●If you want to go back to the previous com-

mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-

tion” any time the system is waiting for a

response.

●You can cancel a command when the sys-

tem is waiting for a response by saying,

“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces

“Cancel” and ends the Voice Recognition

session. You can also press and hold

the button on the steering wheel for

5 seconds at any time to end the Voice

Recognition session. Whenever the Voice

Recognition session is canceled, a double

beep is played to indicate you have exited

the system.

●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, push the volume control switches

(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being

provided with feedback. You can also use

the radio volume control knob.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

In most cases you can interrupt the voice feed-

back to speak the next command by pressing

the button on the steering wheel. After

interrupting the system, wait for a beep before

speaking your command.

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example, press

the button and after the tone say, “Call

Redial”.

4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System are located on the steering

wheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initiate

a Voice Recognition session or

answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button

to interrupt the system feedback

and give a command at once. For

additional information, refer to

“Voice Commands” and “During a

call” in this section.

PHONE/END

While the voice recognition sys-

tem is active, press and hold

the button for 5 seconds to

quit the voice recognition system

at any time.

Tuning switch

While using the voice recognition

system, tilt the tuning switch up or

down to manually control the

phone system.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the

vehicle starts moving during the procedure,

the procedure will be canceled.

LHA3781 LHA2775

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL or TUNE/FOLDER

knob to select “Bluetooth” and then press

the ENTER/SETTING button.

Menu Item Result

Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.

On Turns Bluetooth® functionality on

Off Turns Bluetooth® functionality off

Add Phone or Device Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter the PIN and complete the

connection process.

Replace Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voicetags that were recorded using the previ-

ous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.

The connecting procedure varies according to each phone. For additional information, refer to the phone’s Owner’s Manual. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth or call the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on connecting recommended

cellular phones.

4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

VOICE COMMANDS

Voice commands can be used to operate the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Press

the button and say “Phone” to bring up the

phone command menu. The available options

are:

●Call

●Phonebook

●Recent Calls

●Messaging

●Show Applications (if so equipped)

●Select Phone or Device

“Call”

For additional information, refer to “Making a call”

in this section.

“Phonebook”

The following commands are available under

“Phonebook”:

●(a name)

Say a name in the phonebook to bring up a

list of options for that phonebook entry. The

system will say the name it interpreted based

on the voice command provided. If the name

is incorrect, say “Correction” to hear another

name.

Once the correct phonebook entry is identi-

fied, say “Dial” to dial the number or “Send

Text” to send a text message to that number.

Say “Record Name” to record a name for the

phonebook entry. Say “Delete Recording” to

delete a recorded name for the phonebook

entry.

●List Names

Speak this command to have the system list

the names in the phonebook one by one

alphabetically. Say “Dial” to dial the number

of the current name or “Send Text” to send a

text message to that number. Say “Next En-

try” or “Previous Entry” to move through the

list alphabetically. Say “Record Name” to

record a name for the current phonebook

entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a

recorded name for the current phonebook

entry.

●Transfer Entry (if so equipped)

This command can be used to transfer mul-

tiple contacts at a time. To enable manual

contact transfer capability, set “Phonebook

Download” to “Off” in the Setting menu. The

ability to transfer contacts via the OPP

Bluetooth® profile depends on your mobile

phone. For additional information, refer to

your phone’s Owner’s Manual.

●Delete Entry (if so equipped)

Speak this command to delete an entry in

the phonebook. Choose an entry to delete

by speaking the desired name or say “List

Names”.

“Recent Calls”

The following commands are available under

“Recent Calls”:

●Incoming Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is

from an entry in the phonebook, the name

will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone

number of the incoming call will be dis-

played.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”

to send a text message to that number. Say

“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move

through the list of incoming calls.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121

●Missed Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from

an entry in the phonebook, the name will be

displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of

the missed call will be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”

to send a text message to that number. Say

“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move

through the list of missed calls.

●Outgoing Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call

was to an entry in the phonebook, the name

will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone

number of the outgoing call will be dis-

played.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”

to send a text message to that number. Say

“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move

through the list of outgoing calls.

●Redial

Speak this command to call the last number

dialed.

●Call Back

Speak this command to call the number of

the last incoming call to the vehicle.

“Messaging” (if so equipped)

Speak this command to access text messaging

functions. For additional information, refer to

“Text messaging” in this section.

“Show Applications” (if so equipped)

Speak this command to display list of smart-

phone apps available.

NOTE:

Compatible smartphone and registration

necessary to access applications. For addi-

tional information, refer to “NissanCon-

nect

Mobile Apps” in this section.

“Select Phone or Device”

Speak this command to select a phone to use

from a list of those phones connected to the

vehicle.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call from a phone connected to the

vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem:

1. Press the button.

2. The system will prompt you for a command.

Say “Call”.

3. Select one of the available voice commands

to continue:

●“(a name)” – Speak the name of a phone-

book entry to place a call to that entry. The

system will respond with the name it inter-

preted from your command and will prompt

you to confirm that the name is correct. Say

“Yes” to initiate the call or “No” to hear an-

other name from the phonebook.

●“Number” – Speak this command to place a

call by inputting numbers.

For 7- and 10-digit phone numbers, speak

the numbers. When finished, say “Dial” to

initiate the call. Say “Correction” at any time

in the process to correct a misspoken or

misinterpreted number.

For phone numbers with more digits or spe-

cial characters, say “Special Number”, then

speak the digits. Up to 24 digits can be

entered. Available special characters are

“star”, “pound”, “plus” and “pause”. When

finished, say “Dial” to initiate the call. Say

“Correction” at any time in the process to

correct a misspoken or misinterpreted num-

ber or character.

4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●“Redial” – Speak this command to dial the

number of the last outgoing call. The system

will display “Redialing <name/number>”.

The name of the phonebook entry will be

displayed if it available, otherwise the num-

ber being redialed will be displayed.

●“Call Back” – Speak this command to dial

the number of the last incoming call. The

system will display “Calling back

<name/number>”. The name of the phone-

book entry will be displayed if it available,

otherwise the number being called back will

be displayed.

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is received by the phone connected

to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, the call information is displayed on either

the vehicle information display or both the vehicle

information display and the control panel display.

Press the button to accept the call. Press

the button to reject the call.

DURING A CALL

While a call is active, press the button to

access additional options. Speak one of the fol-

lowing commands:

●“Send” – Speak this command followed by

the digits to enter digits during the phone

call.

●“Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the com-

mand to mute or unmute the system.

●“Transfer Call” – Speak this command to

transfer the call to the handset. To transfer

the call back from the handset to the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System,

press the button and confirm when

prompted.

If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System allows for call waiting

functionality. If a call is received while another call

is already active, a message will be displayed on

the screen. Press the button to hold the

active call and switch to the second call. Press

the button to reject the second call.

While the second call is active, pressing

the button will allow the same commands

that are available during any call as well as two

additional commands:

●“Switch Call” – Speak this command to hold

the second call and switch back to the origi-

nal call.

●“End Other Call” – Speak this command to

stay with the second call and end the original

call.

Press the button to accept the call. Press

the button to reject the call.

ENDING A CALL

To end an active call, press the button.

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)

WARNING

●Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict

the use of “Text-to-Speech.” Check lo-

cal regulations before using the

feature.

●Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict

the use of some of the applications and

features, such as social networking and

texting. Check local regulations for any

requirements.

●Use the text messaging feature after

stopping your vehicle in a safe location.

If you have to use the feature while

driving, exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while using the text

messaging feature, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123

NOTE:

Many phones may require special permission to

enable text messaging. Check the phone’s

screen during Bluetooth® pairing. For some

phones, you may need to enable ‘Notifications’

in the phone’s Bluetooth® menu for text mes-

sages to appear on the headunit. Please consult

you phone’s Owner’s manual. Text message in-

tegration requires that the phone support MAP

(Message Access Profile) for both receiving and

sending text messages. Some phones may not

support all text messaging features. Please re-

fer to www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility in-

formation, as well as your device’s Owner’s

manual.

The system allows for the sending and receiving

of text messages through the vehicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Press the button.

2. Say “Messaging”.

3. Say “Send Text”.

4. The system will provide a list of available

commands in order to determine the recipi-

ent of the text message. Choose from the

following:

●(A name)

●Number

●Incoming Calls

●Outgoing Calls

●Missed Calls

If “Incoming Calls”, “Outgoing Calls”, or

“Missed Calls” is selected, the following ad-

ditional commands will be displayed:

●Send Text

●Next Entry

●Previous Entry

For additional information about these op-

tions, refer to “Voice commands” in this sec-

tion.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system

prompts for which message to send. Five

predefined messages are available as well

as three custom messages. To choose one

of the predefined messages, speak one of

the following:

●“Driving, can’t text”

●“Call me”

●“On my way”

●“Running late”

●“Okay”

To send one of the custom messages, say “Cus-

tom Message”. If more than one custom message

is stored, the system will prompt for the number

of the desired custom message. For additional

information on setting and managing custom text

messages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this

section.

Reading a received text message:

1. Press the button.

2. Say “Messaging”.

3. Say “Read Text”.

The text message, sender and delivery time are

shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch on

the steering wheel to scroll through all text mes-

sages if more than one are available. Press

the button to exit the text message screen.

Press the button to access the following

options for replying to the text message:

●Call Back

Speak this command to call the sender of

the text message using the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System.

●Send Text

Speak this command to send a text message

response to the sender of the text message.

4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●Read Text

Speak this command to read the text mes-

sage again.

●Previous Text

Speak this command to move to the previ-

ous text message (if available).

●Next Text

Speak this command to move to the next text

message (if available).

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if the

vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

To access and adjust the settings for the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL or TUNE/FOLDER

knob to select “Bluetooth” and then press

the ENTER/SETTING button:

●Bluetooth

Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s

Bluetooth® system on or off.

●Add Phone or Device

For additional information, refer to “Con-

necting procedure” in this section.

●Delete Phone or Device

Select to delete a phone from the displayed

list. The system will ask to confirm before

deleting the phone.

●Replace Phone

Select to replace a phone from the displayed

list. When a selection is made, the system

will ask to confirm before proceeding. The

recorded phonebook for the phone being

deleted will be saved as long as the new

phone’s phonebook is the same as the old

phone’s phonebook.

●Select Phone or Device

Select to connect to a previously connected

phone from the displayed list.

●Phonebook Download

Select to turn on or off the automatic down-

load of a connected phone’s phonebook.

●Show Incoming Calls

Select “Driver Only” to have incoming call

information displayed only in the vehicle in-

formation display. Select “Both” to have in-

coming call information displayed in both the

vehicle information display and the center

display screen.

●Text Message (if so equipped)

Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text

messaging feature.

LHA2894

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125

●New Text Sound (if so equipped)

Select to adjust the volume of the sound that

plays when a new text is received by a phone

connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System. The setting all the way to the

left indicates that the new text sound will be

muted.

●Show Incoming Text (if so equipped)

Select “Driver Only” to have incoming text

messages displayed only in the vehicle infor-

mation display. Select “Both” to have incom-

ing text messages displayed in both the ve-

hicle information display and the center

display screen. Select “None” to have no

display of incoming text messages.

●Edit Custom Messages (if so equipped)

Select to set a custom message that will be

available with the standard options when

sending a text message. To set a custom

message, send a text message to your own

phone number while the phone is connected

to the system. Three custom messages can

be set. Custom messages can only be set

while the vehicle is stationary.

●Auto Reply (if so equipped)

Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply func-

tion. When enabled, the vehicle will auto-

matically send a predefined text message to

the sender when a text message is received

while driving.

●Auto Reply Message (if so equipped)

Select to choose the message that is sent

when the Auto Reply function is enabled.

Choose from “I’m Driving” or one of the three

custom messages stored in the system.

●Vehicle Signature On/Off (if so equipped)

Select to choose whether or not the vehicle

signature is added to outgoing text mes-

sages from the vehicle. This message can-

not be changed or customized.

MANUAL CONTROL

While using the Voice Recognition system, it is

possible to select menu options by using the

steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice

commands. To activate manual control mode,

press the PHONE/SEND button on the

steering wheel to access the phone menu and

then push either up or down on the tuning

switch .

The manual control mode does not allow dialing a

phone number by digits. The user may select an

entry from the Phonebook or Recent Calls lists.

To reactivate Voice Recognition, exit the manual

control mode by pressing and holding the

PHONE/END button. At that time, press-

ing the PHONE/SEND button will start the

Hands Free Phone System.

4-126 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice

commands without difficulty. If problems are en-

countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try

each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until

the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “Voice commands” in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too

noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the

phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by

using the “List Names” command. For additional information, refer to “Voice Commands” in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127

WARNING

●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle

in a safe location. If you have to use a

phone while driving, exercise extreme

caution at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-

patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you

can set up the wireless connection between your

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with

your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the

in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-

necting procedure is required. Your phone is

automatically reconnected with the in-vehicle

LHA3782

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

4-128 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

phone module when the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position with the connected cellular

phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to five different Bluetooth®

cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the

phone commands, so dialing a phone number

using your voice is possible. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition Sys-

tem” in this section.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

●Set up the wireless connection between a

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone

module before using the hands-free phone

system.

●Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and connecting.

●You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-

vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive cellular signal; such as

in a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, near a tall building or in a moun-

tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

●When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-

ing a call.

●Immediately after the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position, it may be impos-

sible to receive a call for a short period of

time.

●Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

●While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may dis-

charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge

cellular phones.

●Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers. Stor-

ing the device in a different location may

reduce or eliminate the noise.

●For additional information, refer to the cellu-

lar phone owner’s manual regarding the bat-

tery, battery charging and cellular phone op-

erations.

●The signal strength display on the monitor

will not coincide with the signal strength

display of some cellular phones.

●For additional information, refer to “Trouble-

shooting guide” in this section. You can also

visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshoot-

ing help if the hands-free phone system

seems to be malfunctioning.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the

supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-

quirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Bosch.

VOICE COMMANDS

You can use voice commands to operate various

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features

using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For

additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice

Recognition System” in this section.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

While using the Voice Recognition system, the

system voice can be interrupted to allow the user

to speak commands. While the system is speak-

ing, press the button on the steering

wheel. The system voice will stop and a tone will

be heard. After the tone, speak desired command

(displayed on the touch-screen).

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example, press

the button and after the tone say, “Call

Redial”.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the

vehicle starts moving during the procedure,

the procedure will be canceled.

1. Press the [ ] button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

LHA3712

4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5. Initiate the connecting process from the

handset. The system will display the mes-

sage: “Confirm on your Bluetooth device

that the pin XXXXXX is displayed”. If the PIN

is displayed on your Bluetooth® device, se-

lect “Yes/Pair” to complete the pairing pro-

cess.

For additional information, refer to the

Bluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual.

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK

To access the vehicle phonebook:

1. Press the button on the control panel.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.

3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed

list.

4. The number of the entry will be displayed on

the screen. Touch the number to initiate di-

aling.

NOTE:

To scroll quickly through the list, touch the

“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the

screen. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to

choose a letter or number and then press

ENTER. The list will move to the first entry

that begins with that number or letter.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the button on the control panel.

The “Phone” screen will appear on the dis-

play.

2. Select one of the following options to make a

call:

●“Phonebook”: Select the name from an entry

stored in the vehicle phonebook.

●“Call Lists”: Select the name from the in-

coming, outgoing or missed.

●“Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from the

vehicle.

●“”: Input the phone number manually

using a keypad displayed on the screen. For

additional information, refer to “How to use

the touch-screen” in this section.

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is placed to the connected phone,

the display will change to phone mode.

To accept the incoming call, either:

●Press the button on the steering

wheel, or

●Touch the icon on the screen.

To reject the incoming call, either:

●Press the button on the steering

wheel, or

●Touch the phone icon on the screen.

DURING A CALL

While a call is active, the following options are

available on the screen:

●“Handset”

Select this option to switch control of the

phone call over to the handset.

●“Mute Mic.”

Select this option to mute the microphone.

Select again to unmute the microphone.

●Phone icon

Select to end the phone call.

ENDING A CALL

To end a phone call, select the red phone

icon on the screen or press the button on

the steering wheel.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)

WARNING

●Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict

the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Check lo-

cal regulations before using this

feature.

●Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict

the use of some of the applications and

features, such as social networking and

texting. Check local regulations for any

requirements.

●Use the text messaging feature after

stopping your vehicle in a safe location.

If you have to use the feature while

driving, exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while using the text

messaging feature, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

NOTE:

This feature is automatically disabled if the

connected device does not support the

Message Access Profile (MAP). For addi-

tional information, refer to the phone’s

Owner’s Manual for details and instruc-

tions.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special permis-

sion to enable text messaging. Check the

phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.

For some phones, you may need to enable

‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth®

menu for text messages to appear on the

headunit. For additional information, refer

to your phone’s Owner’s manual. Text mes-

sage integration requires that the phone

support MAP (Message Access Profile) for

both receiving and sending text messages.

Some phones may not support all text mes-

saging features. Please refer to

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility

information, as well as your device’s Own-

er’s manual.

The system allows for the sending and receiving

of text messages through the vehicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

4. The system will provide a list of available

commands in order to determine the recipi-

ent of the text message. Choose from the

following:

●To (a name)

●Enter Number

●Missed Calls

●Incoming Calls

●Outgoing Calls

For additional information about these op-

tions, refer to “Voice commands” in this sec-

tion.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system

prompts for which message to send. Nine

predefined messages are available as well

as three custom messages. To choose one

of the predefined messages, speak one of

the following after the tone:

●“Driving, can’t text”

4-132 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●“Call me”

●“On my way”

●“Running late”

●“Okay”

●“Yes”

●“No”

●“Where are you?”

●“When?”

●“Custom Messages”

To send one of the custom messages, say

“Custom Messages”. If more than one cus-

tom message is stored, the system will

prompt for the number of the desired cus-

tom message. For additional information on

setting and managing custom text mes-

sages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this

section.

Reading a received text message:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.

The text message, sender and delivery time are

shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to

scroll through all text messages if more than one

are available. Press the button to exit the

text message screen. Press the button to

access the following options for replying to the

text message:

●Call Back

Speak this command to call the sender of

the text message using the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System.

●Send Text

Speak this command to send a text message

response to the sender of the text message.

●Read Text

Speak this command to read the text mes-

sage again.

●Previous Text

Speak this command to move to the previ-

ous text message (if available).

●Next Text

Speak this command to move to the next text

message (if available).

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if the

vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

NOTE:

iPhones®can only send text messages via

Siri® Eyes Free.

Making custom messages with Siri® Eyes

Free

If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®, it

can also be used to create custom messages.

For additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes

Free” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-133

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

To access the phone settings:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

Menu Item Result

Phone Settings For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section for additional information.

Connect New Device Select to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Select Connected Device Select to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Replace Connected Device Select to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Delete Connected Device Select to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Bluetooth Select to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.

LHA2844

4-134 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

PHONE SETTINGS

To access the phone settings:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and adjust

the following settings as desired:

●Start Siri by:

Touch “Short Press” or “Long Press” to set

how Siri® is operated on the steering wheel.

●Sort Phonebook By:

Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to

choose how phonebook entries are alpha-

betically displayed on the screen.

●Use Phonebook From:

Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s phone-

book. Touch “SIM” to use the phonebook on

the SIM card. Select “Both” to use both

sources.

●Download Phonebook Now:

Touch to download the phonebook to the

vehicle from the chosen source.

●Record Name for Phonebook Entry:

Touch to record a name for a phonebook

entry for use with the NISSAN Voice Recog-

nition System.

●Phone Notifications for:

Touch “Driver” to have phone notifications

shown in the vehicle information display. Se-

lect “Both” to have phone notifications

shown in both the vehicle information display

and the center display screen.

●Text Messaging (if so equipped):

Touch to toggle the text message function-

ality on or off.

●Show Incoming Text for If so equipped):

Touch “Driver” to have incoming text notifi-

cations shown in the vehicle information dis-

play. Touch “Both” to have text notifications

shown in both the vehicle information display

and the center display screen. Touch “Off” to

turn off all text notifications.

●Auto Reply (if so equipped):

Touch to toggle the auto reply functionality

on or off.

●Auto Reply Message (if so equipped):

Touch to indicate preferred message to be

sent when “Auto Reply”function is activated.

●Use Vehicle’s Signature (if so equipped):

Touch to toggle on or off the addition of the

vehicle signature to outgoing messages.

●Custom Text Messages (if so equipped):

Touch this option to select a custom mes-

sage to edit. There are 4 customer message

slots available.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-135

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice

commands without difficulty. If problems are en-

countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try

each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until

the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “Voice commands” in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too

noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the

phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. For additional information,

refer to “Vehicle phonebook” in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.

4-136 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows

hands-free operation of the systems equipped on

this vehicle, such as the phone and navigation

systems.

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press

the button located on the steering wheel.

When prompted, speak the command for the

system you wish to activate. The command given

is picked up by the microphone and performed

when it is properly recognized. NISSAN Voice

Recognition will provide a voice response as well

as a message in the center display to inform you

of the command results.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which

takes a few seconds. When completed, the sys-

tem is ready to accept voice commands. If

the button is pressed before the initializa-

tion completes, the system will announce: “Voice

Recognition System not ready. Please wait.”

Giving voice commands

1. Press the button.

2. The system announces: “Please say a cat-

egory like phone or a command like points of

interest followed by a brand name”. A list of

available commands is then spoken by the

system.

3. After the tone sounds and the face icon on

the display changes, speak a command.

Available commands are discussed in this

section.

4. Voice and display feedback are provided

when the command is accepted.

●If the command is not recognized, the sys-

tem announces: “Command not recog-

nized”. Repeat the command in a clear voice.

●If you want to cancel the command or go

back to the previous menu of commands,

press the button. The system will an-

nounce: “Canceling Voice Recognition” or

“Go back” depending on the current menu

level.

●Press the button to move back

through the menus displayed on the screen.

●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, use the volume control switches

on the steering wheel or the volume knob on

the control panel.

●The voice command screen can also be

accessed using the control panel display:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.

LHA3783

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-137

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of NISSAN

Voice Recognition, observe the following:

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate the

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing the voice commands cor-

rectly.

●Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

●Start speaking a command within 3.5 sec-

onds after the tone sounds.

●Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

SYSTEM FEATURES

NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the fol-

lowing systems:

●Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

●Navigation

●Audio

●Information

●My Apps

For additional information, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer

to the following examples.

General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for

“0”.

Phone numbers

Speak phone numbers according to the following

example. For 1-800-662-6200, say dial number

and then speak the phone number in any of the

following formats:

●“one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”

●“one eight hundred six six two six two oh oh”

●“one eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh”

For the best voice recognition phone dialing re-

sults, say phone numbers as single digits. Also,

full numbers can only be spoken for “800”. For

example, you cannot say 555-6000 as “five five

five six thousand”.

LHA4241

4-138 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE

PHONE SYSTEM VOICE

COMMANDS

To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System voice commands:

1. Press the button.

2. Say “Call” and then a name in the vehicle

phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise, say

“Phone” to access various phone com-

mands.

If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the

system announces: “Bluetooth® is off. Would

you like to turn Bluetooth® on?”

If no phone is connected to the system and the

vehicle is stationary, the system announces:

“There is no phone connected. Would you like to

connect a phone now?” Say “Yes” to connect a

phone. All further Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System voice commands are only available if a

phone is connected.

If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is set to

“On”, the following voice commands are available:

●Call (a name)

Speak the name of the contact in which you

are trying to call. System will confirm correct

contact. Say “Dial” to initiate dialing.

●Dial Number

Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed. After

the number is entered, say “Dial” to initiate

dialing. Say “Correction” to correct the num-

ber entered. Say “Go Back” to return to the

main menu.

●List Phonebook

Starting with the first alphabetical entry in

the vehicle phonebook, the system prompts

for an additional command. Say “Dial” to call

the number of the phonebook entry. Say

“Send Text” to send a text message to the

number of the phonebook entry. Say “Next

Entry” to skip to the next alphabetical entry in

the vehicle phonebook, where the same op-

tions will then be available.

●Recent Calls

The system prompts for an additional com-

mand. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls”

or “Outgoing Calls” to display a list of such

calls on the screen.

Speak the number of the entry displayed on

the screen to dial that number or say “Next

Page” to view entries on the next page (if

available).

●Redial

Redials the last called number.

●Read Text (if so equipped)

Reads an incoming text message. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation

System” in this section.

●Send Text (if so equipped)

Sends a text message. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System with Navigation System” in

this section.

●Select Phone

The system replies “Please use manual con-

trols to continue”. Use manual controls to

change the active phone from among the

listed phones connected to the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation Sys-

tem” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-139

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE

COMMANDS

The following voice commands are available for

the Navigation System:

●Street Address (address)

●Points of Interest (name)

●POI by Category

●Home

●Address Book

●Previous Destinations

●Enter Address in Steps

●Cancel Route

For additional information, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE

COMMANDS

To access the audio system voice commands:

1. Press the button.

2. Say “Audio”

3. Speak a command from the following avail-

able commands:

●Play (AM, FM, etc.)

Allows user to select radio band

●Tune AM (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired AM

frequency

●Tune FM (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired FM

frequency

●SXM channel (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired

SXM station (if so equipped)

●CD Track (number)

Allows user to select track to be played

●Play Song (name)

Allows user to select song name to be

played

●Play Artist (name)

Allows user to select artist to be played

●Play Album (name)

Allows user to select album name to be

played

For additional information, refer to “Audio sys-

tem” in this section.

INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS

The following voice commands are available for

the information functions of the Navigation Sys-

tem:

●Traffic

●Fuel Prices

●Stocks

●Movie Listings

●Current Weather

●Weather Map

●5 — day Forecast

●6 — hour Forecast

●Connect to Voice Menu

●Additional Commands

For additional information, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS

Many Apps can be accessed using this voice

command. For additional information, refer to

“NissanConnect

Mobile Apps” in this section.

4-140 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HELP VOICE COMMANDS

The following voice commands can be spoken to

have the system provide instructions and tips for

using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system.

●List Commands

●What Can I Say?

●General Help

●Quit

●Exit

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice

commands without difficulty. If problems are en-

countered, follow the solutions given in this guide

for the appropriate error. Where the solutions are

listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting

with number one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message Solution

The system responds “Command Not

Recognized” or the system fails to rec-

ognize the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help” menu.

2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.

3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.

4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-141

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving................5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................5-2

Three-way catalyst (if so equipped) ...............5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........5-3

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions ....................................5-6

Avoiding collision and rollover. . ..................5-7

Off-road recovery...............................5-7

Rapid air pressure loss ..........................5-7

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving................5-8

Driving safety precautions .......................5-8

Push-Button Ignition Switch .......................5-10

Operating range...............................5-11

Push-button ignition switch positions . . . .........5-12

Emergency engine shut off .....................5-13

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge.......5-13

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.............5-14

Before starting the engine .........................5-14

Starting the engine (gasoline engine only) ...........5-14

Remote start (if so equipped) ...................5-15

Starting the engine (diesel only) ....................5-16

Driving the vehicle ................................5-16

Engine protection mode ........................5-16

Automatic transmission.........................5-17

Parking brake ....................................5-22

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) .........5-22

BSW system operation ........................5-24

How to enable/disable the BSW system .........5-25

BSW system limitations ........................5-26

BSW driving situations.........................5-27

System temporarily unavailable..................5-30

System maintenance...........................5-31

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) .....5-32

RCTA system operation ........................5-33

How to enable/disable the RCTA system .........5-35

RCTA system limitations........................5-36

System temporarily unavailable..................5-38

System maintenance...........................5-39

Cruise control....................................5-40

Precautions on cruise control ...................5-40

Cruise control operations.......................5-41

Break-in schedule ................................5-42

Fuel efficient driving tips...........................5-42

Increasing fuel economy...........................5-43

Using 4–wheel drive (4WD) (if so equipped) ........5-44

Transfer case shifting procedures . . .............5-45

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system

(if so equipped) ..................................5-51

Eco Drive Report (if so equipped) . . ................5-52

Parking/parking on hills............................5-53

Power steering . . .................................5-54

Brake system ....................................5-54

Brake precautions .............................5-54

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).................5-55

Brake assist ..................................5-56

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .............5-56

Brake force distribution ........................5-57

Hill Descent Control System (if so equipped) ........5-59

Hill start assist system ............................5-59

Front and Rear Sonar System (if so equipped) .......5-60

System operation..............................5-61

How to enable/disable the Sonar system . ........5-63

Sonar limitations...............................5-63

System maintenance...........................5-64

Cold weather driving..............................5-64

Freeing a frozen door lock ......................5-64

Antifreeze.....................................5-64

Battery .......................................5-64

Draining of coolant water .......................5-64

Tire equipment . . ..............................5-65

Special winter equipment.......................5-65

Driving on snow or ice .........................5-65

Engine block heater (if so equipped).............5-66

WARNING

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

●Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-

ous. It can cause unconsciousness or

death.

●If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all win-

dows fully open, and have the vehicle

inspected immediately.

●Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

●Do not park the vehicle with the engine

running for any extended length of time.

●Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,

doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)

closed while driving, otherwise exhaust

gases could be drawn into the passen-

ger compartment. If you must drive with

one of these open, follow these

precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dial to

high to circulate the air.

●If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer through

the seal on the liftgate or the body,

follow the manufacturer’s recommen-

dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-

try into the vehicle.

●The exhaust system and body should be

inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering into the passenger

compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system, un-

derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST (if so

equipped)

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at

high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

●The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, animals

or flammable materials away from the

exhaust system components.

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

CAUTION

●Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to

help reduce exhaust pollutants.

●Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-

ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-

able loss of performance or other un-

usual operating conditions are

detected. Have the vehicle inspected

promptly. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause

the engine to misfire, damaging the

three-way catalyst.

●Do not race the engine while warming it

up.

●Do not push or tow your vehicle to start

the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and in-

flated to the inflation pressure recommended by

the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has

tires of a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,

you should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and

check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-

cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-

heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation

also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and

may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping

ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level to

trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the

system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-

function indicator is combined with the low tire

pressure telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-

function exists. When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly. Always

check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-

ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and

wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Starting and driving 5-3

Additional information:

●Since the spare tire is not equipped

with the TPMS, the TPMS does not

monitor the tire pressure of the spare

tire.

●The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle

is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h).

Also, this system may not detect a sudden

drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire

while driving).

●The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure

is adjusted. After your tires are inflated to the

recommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to

activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

●The Tire Pressure Low Add Air warning ap-

pears in the vehicle information display when

the low tire pressure warning light is illumi-

nated and low tire pressure is detected. The

Tire Pressure Low Add Air warning turns off

when the low tire pressure warning light

turns off.

●The Tire Pressure Low Add Air warning does

not appear if the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunc-

tion.

●Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation

and the outside temperature. Do not reduce

the tire pressure after driving because the

tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside

temperature can lower the temperature of

the air inside the tire which can cause a

lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-

nate. If the warning light illuminates, check

the tire pressure for all four tires.

●The Tire and Loading Information label (also

referred to as the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label) is located in the

driver’s door opening.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage

the tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an accident

and could result in serious personal in-

jury. Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible. (For additional information,

refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of

emergency” section for changing a flat

tire.)

5-4 Starting and driving

●Since the spare tire is not equipped with

the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted

or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will

not be indicated, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on after

1 minute. Have your tires replaced

and/or TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metal

parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This

may cause poor reception of the signals

from the tire pressure sensors, and the

TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily

interfere with the operation of the TPMS and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-

minate.

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio

frequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is

being used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near the

vehicle.

Low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in

the following cases.

●If the vehicle equipped with a wheel and tire

without TPMS.

●If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID

has not been registered.

●If the wheel is not originally specified by

NISSAN.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modification not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired op-

eration of the device.

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert

WARNING

After rotating the tires, do not use the

Easy Fill Tire Alert to adjust the tire pres-

sure. Instead use a gauge to adjust the

tires to the correct pressure in accordance

with Tire and Loading Information label.

Starting and driving 5-5

When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides visual and

audible signals outside the vehicle to help you

inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire

pressure.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift

lever to the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch to the ON position.

Do not start the engine.

Operation

1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators

will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is reached,

the horn beeps once and the hazard indica-

tors stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

●If the tire is over-inflated more than ap-

proximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn

beeps and the hazard indicators flash

three times. To correct the pressure, push

the core of the valve stem on the tire

briefly to release pressure. When the

pressure reaches the designated pres-

sure, the horn beeps once.

●If the hazard indicator does not flash

within approximately 15 seconds after

starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that

the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not operating.

●The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill

Tire Alert under the following conditions:

– If there is interference from an external

device or transmitter.

– The air pressure from the inflation device

is not sufficient to inflate the tire.

– There is a malfunction in the TPMS sys-

tem.

– There is a malfunction in the horn or haz-

ard indicators.

– The identification code of the tires pres-

sure sensor is not registered to the sys-

tem.

– The battery of the tire pressure sensor is

low.

●If the Easy Fill Tire Alert does not operate

due to TPMS interference, move the ve-

hicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward

and try again.

If the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire

pressure gauge.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passen-

ger cars to make them capable of performing in a

variety of on-pavement and off-road applications.

This gives them a higher center of gravity than

ordinary vehicles. An advantage of higher ground

clearance is a better view of the road, allowing

you to anticipate problems. However, they are not

designed for cornering at the same speeds as

conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more

than low-slung sports cars are designed to per-

form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at

all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As

with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate

this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control

or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more likely to die than a

person wearing a seat belt.

For additional information, refer to “Driving safety

precautions” in this section.

5-6 Starting and driving

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss of

control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-

neuvers, because these driving practices could

cause you to lose control of your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,

particularly if the loss of control causes the

vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when

tired. Never drive when under the influence of

alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-

the-counter drugs which may cause drowsi-

ness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in

the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section of this manual, and also

instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-

sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is

significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side wheels

may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this

occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-

ing the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle

must be driven as appropriate based on the con-

ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-

hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed

is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-

hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle

speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the

steering wheel until both tires return to the

road surface. When all tires are on the road

surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-

propriate driving lane.

●If you decide that it is not safe to return the

vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,

road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the

vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur

if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to

hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss

can also be caused by driving on under-inflated

tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling

and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway

speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-

ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect

the tires for wear and damage. For additional

information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. If a tire

rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out” while

driving, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-

ing the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle

must be driven as appropriate based on the con-

ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

Starting and driving 5-7

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.

Losing control of the vehicle may cause a

collision and result in personal injury.

●The vehicle generally moves or pulls in

the direction of the flat tire.

●Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

●Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

●Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location

off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually

stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

contact a roadside emergency service to

change the tire. For additional information,

refer to “Changing a flat tire” in the “In case

of emergency” section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol

or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-

duces coordination, delays reaction time

and impairs judgement. Driving after

drinking alcohol increases the likelihood

of being involved in an accident injuring

yourself and others. Additionally, if you

are injured in an accident, alcohol can

increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,

you must choose not to drive under the influence

of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are

injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Al-

though the local laws vary on what is considered

to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol

affects all people differently and most people

underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! That is

true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription)

and illegal drugs too. Don’t drive if your ability to

operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol,

drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and

off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-

ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for

leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-

hicle.

Remember that 2-wheel drive models are less

capable than 4-wheel drive models for rough

road driving and extrication when stuck in deep

snow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

●Drive carefully when off the road and

avoid dangerous areas. Every person

who drives or rides in this vehicle

should be seated with their seat belt

fastened. This will keep you and your

passengers in position when driving

over rough terrain.

●Do not drive across steep slopes. In-

stead drive either straight up or straight

down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can

tip over sideways much more easily

than they can forward or backward.

5-8 Starting and driving

●Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.

If you drive up them, you may stall. If

you drive down them, you may not be

able to control your speed. If you drive

across them, you may roll over.

●Do not shift gears while driving on

downhill grades as this could cause

loss of control of the vehicle.

●Stay alert when driving to the top of a

hill. At the top there could be a drop-off

or other hazard that could cause an

accident.

●If your engine stalls or you cannot make

it to the top of a steep hill, never at-

tempt to turn around. Your vehicle could

tip or roll over. Always back straight

down in R (Reverse) gear and apply

brakes to control your speed.

●Heavy braking going down a hill could

cause your brakes to overheat and fade,

resulting in loss of control and an acci-

dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a low

gear to control your speed.

●Unsecured cargo can be thrown around

when driving over rough terrain. Prop-

erly secure all cargo so it will not be

thrown forward and cause injury to you

or your passengers.

●Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as

far forward and as low as possible. Do

not equip the vehicle with tires larger

than specified in this manual. This could

cause your vehicle to roll over.

●Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel when driving off-road.

The steering wheel could move sud-

denly and injure your hands. Instead

drive with your fingers and thumbs on

the outside of the rim.

●Before operating the vehicle, ensure

that the driver and all passengers have

their seat belts fastened.

●Lower your speed when encountering

strong crosswinds. With a higher center

of gravity, your NISSAN is more affected

by strong side winds. Slower speeds

ensure better vehicle control.

●Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires, even with 4WD

engaged.

●For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-

hicle movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

●Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped

vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer

(such as the dynamometers used by

some states for emissions testing), or

similar equipment even if the other two

wheels are raised off the ground. Make

sure you inform test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD

before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may

result in drivetrain damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage or per-

sonal injury.

●Accelerating quickly, sharp steering

maneuvers or sudden braking may

cause loss of control.

Starting and driving 5-9

●If at all possible, avoid sharp turning

maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.

Your NISSAN 4-wheel drive vehicle has

a higher center of gravity than a passen-

ger car. The vehicle is not designed for

cornering at the same speeds as pas-

senger cars. Failure to operate this ve-

hicle correctly could result in loss of

control and/or a rollover accident.

●Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,

or radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Install tire chains on the rear

wheels when driving on slippery roads

and drive carefully.

●Be sure to check the brakes immedi-

ately after driving in mud or water. For

additional information, refer to “Wet

brakes” in this section.

●Avoid parking your vehicle on steep

hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it

rolls forward, backward or sideways,

you could be injured.

●Whenever you drive off-road through

sand, mud or water as deep as the

wheel hub, more frequent maintenance

may be required. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Maintenance sched-

ules” in the “Maintenance and sched-

ules” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition

switch while driving the vehicle except in

an emergency. (The engine will stop when

the ignition switch is pushed three con-

secutive times in quick succession or the

ignition switch is pushed and held for

more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops

while the vehicle is being driven, this

could lead to a crash and serious injury

LSD2014

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

5-10 Starting and driving

When the ignition switch is pushed without de-

pressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch po-

sition will illuminate as follows:

Push center

●Once to change to ACC.

●Two times to change to ON.

●Three times to return to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically return to the

LOCK position when any door is either opened or

closed with the switch in the OFF position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch position cannot be switched to OFF until

the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to-

ward the OFF position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) posi-

tion.

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch

position will change to the ON position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF

position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,

the push-button ignition switch cannot be

moved from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are

displayed in the meter. For additional information,

refer to “Vehicle information display warnings and

indicators” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-

charged or strong radio waves are present near

the operating location, the Intelligent Key sys-

tem’s operating range becomes narrower and

may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range,

it is possible for anyone, even someone who does

not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition

switch to start the engine.

LSD2456

Starting and driving 5-11

The operating range of the engine start function

is inside of the vehicle 䊊

●The luggage area is not included in the op-

erating range, but the Intelligent Key may

function.

●If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instru-

ment panel, inside the glove box, storage bin

or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not

function.

●If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door

or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent

Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in this

position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is

pushed to the ACC position while carrying the

Intelligent Key.

The ignition switch will lock when any door is

opened or closed with the ignition switched off.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accessories,

such as the radio, when the engine is not running.

ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the

ignition switch to the OFF position after a period

of time under the following conditions:

●All doors are closed.

●Shift lever is in P (Park).

●Hazard lamps are off.

●Turn signals are off.

The battery saver feature will be canceled if any of

the following occur:

●Any door is opened.

●Shift lever is moved out of P (Park).

●Ignition switch changes position.

●Hazard lamps are turned on.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system and

electrical accessories.

ON has a battery saver feature that will turn the

ignition switch to the OFF position, if the vehicle

is not running, after some time under the follow-

ing conditions:

●All doors are closed.

●Shift lever is in P (Park).

●Hazard lamps are off.

●Turn signals are off.

The battery saver feature will be canceled if any of

the following occur:

●Any door is opened.

●Shift lever is moved out of the P (Park)

position.

●Ignition switch changes position.

●Hazard lamps are turned on.

●Turn signals are turned on.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition

switch in ACC or ON positions when the

engine is not running for an extended pe-

riod. This can discharge the battery.

OFF

The ignition switch is in the OFF position when

the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.

If equipped, the ignition switch heart beat func-

tion (pulsed illumination) may activate for a period

of time when any door is unlocked and when the

door opened/closed status changes in the OFF

and ACC positions.

5-12 Starting and driving

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation

while driving, perform the following procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch

three consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-

onds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch

for more than 2 seconds.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

BATTERY DISCHARGE

If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is

discharged, or environmental conditions interfere

with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine

according to the following procedure:

1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent

Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

After step 3 is performed, when the ignition

switch is pushed without depressing the

brake pedal, the ignition switch position will

change to ON.

4. Push the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal within ten seconds after the

chime sounds. The engine will start.

NOTE:

●When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position or the engine is started by the

above procedure, the Intelligent Key battery

discharge indicator appears in the vehicle

information display even when the Intelligent

Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a mal-

function. To turn off the Intelligent Key bat-

tery discharge indicator, touch the ignition

switch with the Intelligent Key again.

●If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indi-

cator appears, replace the battery as soon

as possible. For additional information, refer

to “Battery Replacement” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

SSD0860

Starting and driving 5-13

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automatic payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following pro-

cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position, and wait approximately 10 sec-

onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-

ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-

rate key ring to avoid interference from other

devices.

●Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

●Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-

ant, brake fluid, DEF (Diesel only) and

windshield-washer fluid as frequently as

possible, or at least whenever you refuel.

●Check that all windows and lights are clean.

●Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

●Check that all doors are closed.

●Position seat and adjust head

restraints/headrests.

●Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

●Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

●Check the operation of warning lights when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion. For additional information, refer to

“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral). P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to operate

unless the shift lever is in either P

(Park) or N (Neutral).

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

Depress the brake pedal and push the igni-

tion switch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push and

release the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal with the ignition switch in

any position.

●If the engine is very hard to start in ex-

tremely cold weather or when restarting,

depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-

proximately 1/3 to the floor) and while

holding, crank the engine. Release the

accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

●If the engine is very hard to start because

it is flooded, depress the accelerator

pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion to start cranking the engine. After five

or six seconds, stop cranking by pushing

the ignition switch to LOCK. After crank-

ing the engine, release the accelerator

pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE (gasoline

engine only)

5-14 Starting and driving

the accelerator pedal by depressing the

brake pedal and pushing the push-button

ignition switch to start the engine. If the

engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the

above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does

not start, push the ignition switch to the

OFF position and wait 10 seconds before

cranking again, otherwise the starter

could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-

onds after starting. Do not race the engine

while warming it up. Drive at moderate

speed for a short distance first, especially in

cold weather. In cold weather, keep the en-

gine running for a minimum of two to three

minutes before shutting it off. Starting and

stopping the engine over a short period of

time may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever into

the P (Park) position and push the ignition

switch to the OFF position.

In preparation for the next engine start, the engine

may have a slightly delayed shutoff after placing

the ignition switch in the OFF position, depend-

ing on the driving conditions.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic

accessories that consume battery power

when the engine is not running (Phone char-

gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only

driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health.

REMOTE START (if so equipped)

Vehicles started with the remote start require the

ignition switch to be placed in the ON position

before the shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position. To place the ignition switch to the

ON position, follow these steps:

1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you.

2. Apply the brake.

3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON

position.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

Starting and driving 5-15

For additional information on starting your diesel

engine, refer to your “Titan Diesel Owner’s

Manual.”

ENGINE PROTECTION MODE

The engine has an engine protection mode to

reduce the chance of damage if the coolant tem-

perature becomes too high (for example, when

climbing steep grades in high temperature with

heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer).

When the engine temperature reaches a certain

level:

●The engine coolant temperature gauge will

move toward the H position.

●Engine power may be reduced.

●The air conditioning cooling function may be

automatically turned OFF for a short time

(the blower will continue to operate).

Engine power and, under some conditions, ve-

hicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speed can be

controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the

vehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed.

The transmission will downshift or upshift as it

reaches prescribed shift points. You can also

shift manually.

As driving conditions change and engine coolant

temperature is reduced, vehicle speed can be

increased using the accelerator pedal, and air

conditioning cooling function will automatically

be turned back ON.

If:

1. The engine coolant temperature is not re-

duced.

2. The air conditioning cooling function does

not turn back ON.

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may also

come ON. If only it remains on, you do not need

to have your vehicle towed, but have it inspected

soon. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for servicing. For additional information,

refer to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the

“Instruments and controls ” section of this

manual.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced engine

power and vehicle speed. The reduced

speed may be lower than other traffic,

which could increase the chance of a col-

lision. Be especially careful when driving.

If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-

ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a

safe area. Allow the engine to cool and

return to normal operation. For additional

information, refer to “If your vehicle over-

heats” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual.

STARTING THE ENGINE (diesel only) DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-16 Starting and driving

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause se-

rious damage to the engine almost imme-

diately. Such damage is not covered by

warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it

is safe to do so.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING

●Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), or D (Drive). Always

depress the brake pedal until shifting is

completed. Failure to do so could cause

you to lose control and have an

accident.

●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward or

reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

●Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident or

damage the transmission.

●Except in an emergency, do not shift to

the N (Neutral) position while driving.

Coasting with the transmission in the N

(Neutral) position may cause serious

damage to the transmission.

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

CAUTION

To avoid possible damage to your vehicle,

when stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by depress-

ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake

should be used for this purpose

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is

electronically controlled to produce maximum

power and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for this

transmission are shown on the following pages.

Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle

performance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

WARNING

●Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), or D (Drive). Always

depress the brake pedal until shifting is

completed. Failure to do so could cause

you to lose control and have an

accident.

●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward or

reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

●Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident or

damage the transmission.

●Except in an emergency, do not shift to

the N (Neutral) position while driving.

Coasting with the transmission in the N

(Neutral) position may cause serious

damage to the transmission.

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

Starting and driving 5-17

CAUTION

To avoid possible damage to your vehicle,

when stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by depress-

ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake

should be used for this purpose

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shift

lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

move the shift lever into a driving gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start

the vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designed so

the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed

before shifting from P (Park) to any drive

position while the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of the

P (Park) position and into any of the other

gear positions if the ignition switch is

placed in the LOCK or OFF position.

To move the shift lever:

: Shift while depressing the brake pedal

: Shift without depressing brake pedal

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal and move the shift lever out of the P (Park)

position.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is

in any position while the engine is not

running. Failure to do so could cause the

vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away

and result in serious personal injury or

property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACC

position for any reason while the vehicle is in N

(Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the ignition

switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, then

the ignition switch can be turned to LOCK.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

P (Park) position only when the vehicle is

completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the

vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.

The brake pedal should be depressed to

move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or any

drive position to P (Park).

LSD2468

5-18 Starting and driving

Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill,

apply the parking brake first, then move the shift

lever into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle

is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make

sure the vehicle is completely stopped before

selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake

pedal must be depressed to move the shift

lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive

position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The

engine can be started in this position. You may

shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine

while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Manual shift mode

When the manual shift mode button is pressed

while driving, the transmission enters the manual

shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu-

ally.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis-

played on the position indicator in the meter. After

pressing the manual shift mode button, the posi-

tion indicator varies depending on the gear posi-

tion and vehicle speed.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6

←→ M7* ←→ D

*If so equipped

M7 (Seventh) (if so equipped)

Use this position for all normal forward driving at

highway speeds.

M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6

←→ M7

M7 will be displayed on the position indicator in

the meter.

M6 (Sixth)

Use this position for all normal forward driving at

highway speeds.

M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6

M6 will be displayed on the position indicator in

the meter

M5 (Fifth)

Use this position for all normal forward driving at

highway speeds.

M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5

M5 will be displayed on the position indicator in

the meter.

LSD2457

Starting and driving 5-19

M4 (Fourth)

For driving up or down long slopes where engine

braking would be advantageous.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4

M4 will be displayed on the position indicator in

the meter.

M3 (Third)

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill

grades.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3

M3 will be displayed on the position indicator in

the meter.

M2 (Second)

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill

grades.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

M1 ←→ M2

M2 will be displayed on the position indicator in

the meter.

M1 (First)

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly

or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or

mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep

downhill grades.

M1 will be displayed on the position indicator on

the meter.

●Remember not to drive at high speeds for

extended periods of time in lower than M4

range. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting up

Press the shift switch to the + (up) side. (Shifts to

higher range.)

When shifting down

Press the shift switch to the ⫺(down) side.

(Shifts to lower range.)

●The transmission will automatically down-

shift the gears. (For example, if you select the

3rd range, the transmission will shift down

between the 3rd and 1st gears.)

●Pressing the shift switch rapidly will shift the

ranges in succession.

When canceling the manual shift mode

Press and hold the +(UP) button to return the

transmission to the normal driving mode.

●In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected gear

immediately because of vehicle speed.

The transmission will up or down shift

when vehicle speed matches the pro-

grammed transmission shift points.

This helps maintain driving perfor-

mance and reduces the chance of ve-

hicle damage or loss of control.

●In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion will not up shift to a higher gear

than is manually selected. When the

vehicle speed decreases, the transmis-

sion automatically shifts down and

shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle

comes to a stop.

5-20 Starting and driving

Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift lever may not

be moved from the P (Park) position even with the

brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift lever, release the shift lock. The

shift lever can be moved to N (Neutral). However,

for models without the NISSAN Vehicle Immobi-

lizer System, the steering wheel will be locked

unless the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position. This allows the vehicle to be moved if

the battery is discharged.

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-

lowing procedure:

Place the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover. If a

screwdriver is used to remove the cover, it

should be wrapped in a protective cloth to

prevent damage to the cover and surround-

ing plastic.

4. Insert a small object or finger in the shift lock

release slot and push.

5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) posi-

tion while holding the shift lock release.

6. Now the vehicle may be moved to the de-

sired location.

If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park),

have the automatic transmission system checked

as soon as possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the

P (Park) position while the engine is run-

ning and the brake pedal is depressed, the

stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning

stop lights could cause an accident injur-

ing yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift

— in D (Drive) position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-

erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-

sion down into a lower gear, depending on the

vehicle speed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, please note

that the transmission will be locked in any of the

forward gears according to the condition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-

ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning

and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe

system may be activated. This will occur

even if all electrical circuits are functioning

properly. In this case, turn the ignition

switch OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then

turn the ignition switch back to the ON

position. The vehicle should return to its

normal operating condition. If it does not

return to its normal operating condition,

have the transmission checked and re-

paired, it if necessary. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

LSD2594

Starting and driving 5-21

WARNING

●Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

●Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

●Do not use the shift lever in place of the

parking brake. When parking, be sure

the parking brake is fully engaged.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and /or its systems, do not leave

children, people who require the assis-

tance of others or pets unattended in

your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-

ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it

will release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the BSW system

could result in serious injury or death.

●The BSW system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is not

designed to prevent contact with ve-

hicles or objects. When changing lanes,

always use the side and rear mirrors

and turn and look in the direction your

vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to

change lanes. Never rely solely on the

BSW system.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of other

vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.

LSD0158

PARKING BRAKE BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so

equipped)

5-22 Starting and driving

The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊

1in-

stalled near the rear bumper to detect other ve-

hicles in an adjacent lane.

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either

side of your vehicle within the detection zone

shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts

from the outside mirror of your vehicle and ex-

tends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear

bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) side-

ways.

LSD2619

Detection zone

SSD1030

Starting and driving 5-23

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

The BSW system operates above approximately

20 mph (32 km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detec-

tion zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1)

illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the

system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA

indicator light flashes. The BSW/RCTA indicator

light continues to flash until the detected vehicles

leaves the detection zone.

The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates

for a few seconds when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

The brightness of the BSW/RCTA indicator light

is adjusted automatically depending on the

brightness of the ambient light.

If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after

the driver activates the turn signal, then only the

side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no

chime sounds. For additional information, refer to

“BSW driving situations” in this section.

LSD2605

5-24 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

BSW SYSTEM

When the BSW system is enabled in the vehicle

information display, the system can be turned off

temporarily by pushing the warning systems

switch. For additional information, refer to “Warn-

ing systems switch” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

Perform the following steps to enable or disable

the BSW system.

1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display. Use

the button to select “Driver Assis-

tance” and press ENTER. Select “Driving

Aids” and press ENTER.

2. Select “Blind Spot (BSW)” and press the

ENTER button.

NOTE:

●When enabling/disabling the system, the

system will retain current settings even if the

engine is restarted.

●When the BSW system is turned on, the

BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle

information display illuminates.

LSD2607

Starting and driving 5-25

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the BSW system. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

●The BSW system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions.

●The radar sensors may not be able to

detect and activate BSW when certain

objects are present such as:

– Pedestrians, bicycles, animals.

– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low

height vehicles, or high ground clear-

ance vehicles.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Vehicles remaining in the detection

zone when you accelerate from a

stop.

– A vehicle merging into an adjacent

lane at a speed approximately the

same as your vehicle.

– A vehicle approaching rapidly from

behind.

– A vehicle which your vehicle over-

takes rapidly.

– A vehicle that passes through the de-

tection zone quickly.

– When overtaking several vehicles in

a row, the vehicles after the first ve-

hicle may not be detected if they are

traveling close together.

●The radar sensors’ detection zone is

designed based on a standard lane

width. When driving in a wider lane,

the radar sensors may not detect ve-

hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv-

ing in a narrow lane, the radar sen-

sors may detect vehicles driving two

lanes away.

●The radar sensors are designed to

ignore most stationary objects, how-

ever objects such as guardrails,

walls, foliage and parked vehicles

may occasionally be detected. This is

a normal operation condition.

●The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice/frost/snow build-up on the

vehicle

– Dirt build-up on the vehicle

●Do not attach stickers (including trans-

parent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the radar

sensors. These conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles.

●Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume, open vehicle window)

will interfere with the chime sound, and

it may not be heard.

5-26 Starting and driving

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator

off

Indicator

flashing

Another vehicle approaching from

behind

Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator

light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection

zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn

signal when another vehicle is in the detection

zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the

side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

●The radar sensors may not detect vehicles

which are approaching rapidly from behind.

●If the driver activates the turn signal before a

vehicle enters the detection zone, the side

indicator light will flash but no chime will

sound when the other vehicle is detected.

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

LSD2299

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind

LSD2300

Starting and driving 5-27

Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 3: The side indicator light illumi-

nates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle

stays in the detection zone for approximately

2 seconds.

Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn

signal while another vehicle is in the detection

zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the

side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

●When overtaking several vehicles in a row,

the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be

detected if they are traveling close together.

●The radar sensors may not detect slower

moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

●If the driver activates the turn signal before a

vehicle enters the detection zone, the side

indicator light will flash but no chime will

sound when the other vehicle is detected.

Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle

LSD2302

Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle

LSD2303

5-28 Starting and driving

Entering from the side

Illustration 5: The side indicator light illumi-

nates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from

either side.

Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn

signal while another vehicle is in the detection

zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the

side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

●If the driver activates the turn signal before a

vehicle enters the detection zone, the side

indicator light will flash but no chime will

sound when the other vehicle is detected.

●The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle

which is traveling at about the same speed

as your vehicle when it enters the detection

zone.

Illustration 5 – Entering from the side

LSD2305

Illustration 6 – Entering from the side

LSD2308

Starting and driving 5-29

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the system will

be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar

Obstruction” warning message will appear and

the blind spot indicator (white) will blink 䊊

Ain the

vehicle information display.

The system is not available until the conditions no

longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary

ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist

or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing

the radar sensors.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist, the

system will resume automatically.

Malfunction

If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn off

automatically. The system malfunction warning

message with the BSW/RCTA indicator (orange)

will appear in the vehicle information display.

LSD2608

5-30 Starting and driving

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA

system (if so equipped) will also stop work-

ing.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off

and restart the engine. If the message continues

to appear, have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors 䊊

1for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper.

Always keep the area near the radar sensors

clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary

ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist

or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by

objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the

radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing the

area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent ma-

terial), install accessories or apply additional

paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the

radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sen-

sors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC : OAYSRR2B

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment

LSD2619

Starting and driving 5-31

For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

Frequency bands: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the RCTA could

result in serious injury or death.

●The RCTA system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is not

designed to prevent contact with ve-

hicles or objects. When backing out of a

parking space, always use the side and

rear mirrors and turn and look in the

direction you will move. Never rely

solely on the RCTA system.

The RCTA will assist you when backing out from

a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse,

the system is designed to detect other vehicles

approaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If

the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)

(if so equipped)

5-32 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION

The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an

approaching vehicle when the driver is backing

out of a parking space.

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the

vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational.

If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from

the side, the system chimes a sound (single

beep) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light on

the side of the vehicle is approaching from

flashes.

LSD2605

Starting and driving 5-33

The RCTA system uses radar sensors 䊊

1in-

stalled on both sides near the rear bumper to

detect an approaching vehicle.

The radar sensors 䊊

1can detect an approaching

vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)

away.

If the radar detects a vehicle approaching from

the side, the system gives visual and audible

warnings.

LSD2216 LSD2619

5-34 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

RCTA SYSTEM

When the RCTA system is enabled in the vehicle

information display, the system can be turned off

temporarily by pushing the parking sensor (so-

nar) system OFF switch. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Parking sensor (sonar) system OFF

switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

Perform the following steps to enable or disable

the RCTA system.

1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display. Use

the button to select “Driver Assis-

tance” and press ENTER. Select “Driving

Aids” and press ENTER.

2. Select “Blind Spot (BSW)” and press the

ENTER button.

NOTE:

When enabling/disabling the system, the

system setting will be retained even if the

engine is restarted.

LSD2607

Starting and driving 5-35

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING

●

Listed below are the system limitations

for RCTA. Failure to operate the vehicle in

accordance with these system limitations

could result in serious injury or death.

●

Always check surroundings and turn to

check what is behind you before backing

up. The radar sensors detect approaching

(moving) vehicles. The radar sensors can-

not detect every object such as:

– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,

animals or child-operated toy

vehicles

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

greater than approximately 19 mph

(30 km/h)

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

lower than approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h)

●The radar sensors may not detect ap-

proaching vehicles in certain situations:

– Illustration a: When a vehicle parked

next to you obstructs the beam of the

radar sensor.

– Illustration b: When the vehicle is

parked in an angled parking space.

– Illustration c: When the vehicle is

parked on inclined ground.

– Illustration d: When an approaching

vehicle turns into your vehicle’s park-

ing lot aisle.

LSD2173

5-36 Starting and driving

– Illustration e: When the angle formed

by your vehicle and approaching ve-

hicle is small

●The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice build-up on the vehicle

– Frost build-up on the vehicle

– Dirt build- up on the vehicle

●Do not attach stickers (including trans-

parent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the radar

sensors. These conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles

●Do not use the RCTA systems when

towing a trailer.

●Excessive noise (e.g. audio system vol-

ume, open vehicle window) will inter-

fere with the chime sound, and it may

not be heard.

NOTE:

●In the case of several vehicles approaching

in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite

direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be

sounded by the RCTA system after the first

vehicle passes the sensors.

Illustration 1

LSD2043

Illustration 2

LSD2044

Starting and driving 5-37

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the system will

be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar

Obstruction” warning message will appear and

the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink 䊊

Ain

the vehicle information display.

The systems are not available until the conditions

no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary

ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist

or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by

objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the

radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA

system will also stop working.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist, the

system will resume automatically.

LSD2608

5-38 Starting and driving

Malfunction

When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn

off automatically. The system malfunction warn-

ing message with the BSW/RCTA indicator (or-

ange) will appear in the vehicle information dis-

play.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA

system (if so equipped) will also stop work-

ing.

Action to take

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off

and restart the engine. If the message continues

to appear, have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors 䊊

1for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper.

Always keep the area near the radar sensors

clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary

ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist

or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by

objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the

radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing the

area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent ma-

terial), install accessories or apply additional

paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the

radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sen-

sors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC : OAYSRR2B

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment

LSD2619

Starting and driving 5-39

For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

Frequency bands: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

1. CANCEL switch

2. ACCEL/RES switch

3. COAST/SET switch

4. ON/OFF switch

●If the cruise control system malfunctions, it

cancels automatically. The (green) or

SET indicator light illuminates in the vehicle

information display then blinks to warn the

driver. For additional information, refer to

“Vehicle information display” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

●If the (green) or SET indicator light

blinks, push the cruise control ON/OFF

switch off and have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

●The (green) or SET indicator light may

blink when the cruise control ON/OFF

switch is pushed ON while pushing the

ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or CANCEL

switch. To properly set the cruise control

system, use the following procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving

under the following conditions:

●When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

●In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in

speed.

●On winding or hilly roads.

LSD2464

CRUISE CONTROL

5-40 Starting and driving

●On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

●In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-

tween 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without

keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

ON/OFF switch on. The (white) or

CRUISE indicator light in the vehicle information

display will illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to

the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch

and release it. The (green) or SET indica-

tor light in the vehicle information display will

illuminate. Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.

●To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously

set speed.

●The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

when going up or down steep hills. If this

happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods:

●Push the CANCEL switch; the or SET

indicator light in the vehicle information dis-

play goes out.

●Tap the brake pedal; the or SET indi-

cator light goes out.

●Push the ON/OFF switch off. The in-

dicator light or both the CRUISE indicator

light and SET indicator light in the vehicle

information display go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled and

the or SET light in the vehicle information

display goes out if:

●You depress the brake pedal while pushing

the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.

The preset speed is deleted from memory.

●The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph

(13 km/h) below the set speed.

●You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of

the following three methods:

●Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the COAST/SET switch.

●Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you de-

sire, release the switch.

●Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed in-

creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

●Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it.

●Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-

lease the switch when the vehicle slows to

the desired speed.

●Push and release the COAST/SET switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed de-

creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-

turns to the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-41

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to obtain

maximum engine performance and ensure

the future reliability and economy of your

new vehicle. Failure to follow these rec-

ommendations may result in shortened

engine life and reduced engine

performance.

●Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the

engine over 4,000 RPM.

●Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

●Avoid quick starts.

●Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

●Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 mi

(805 km). Your engine, axle or other parts

could be damaged.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving

Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy

from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake

Pedal Application

●Avoid rapid starts and stops.

●Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible.

●Maintain constant speed while commut-

ing and coast whenever possible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

●Look ahead to try and anticipate and mini-

mize stops.

●Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your number

of stops.

●Maintaining a steady speed can minimize

red light stops and improve fuel effi-

ciency.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher

Vehicle Speeds

●Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more effi-

cient to open windows to cool the vehicle

due to reduced engine load.

●Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more effi-

cient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to

increased aerodynamic drag.

●Recirculating the cool air in the cabin

when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-

tances

●Observing the speed limit and not ex-

ceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally

allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due

to reduced aerodynamic drag.

●Maintaining a safe following distance be-

hind other vehicles reduces unnecessary

braking.

●Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate

changes in speed permits reduced brak-

ing and smooth acceleration changes.

●Select a gear range suitable to road con-

ditions.

5. Use Cruise Control

●Using cruise control during highway driv-

ing helps maintain a steady speed.

●Cruise control is particularly effective in

providing fuel savings when driving on flat

terrains.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

5-42 Starting and driving

6. Plan for the Shortest Route

●Utilize a map or navigation system to de-

termine the best route to save time.

7. Avoid Idling

●Shutting off your engine when safe for

stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves

fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads

●Automated passes permit drivers to use

special lanes to maintain cruising speed

through the toll and avoid stopping and

starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

●Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel

economy.

●

Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to effec-

tively circulate the engine oil before driving.

●Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating

temperature more quickly while driving

versus idling.

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

●Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever possible.

●When entering a hot vehicle, opening the

windows will help to reduce the inside

temperature faster, resulting in reduced

demand on your A/C system.

●Keep your engine tuned up.

●Follow the recommended scheduled main-

tenance.

●Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-

sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

●Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-

proper alignment increases tire wear and

lowers fuel economy.

●For vehicles equipped with , use 4H

or 4L position only when necessary. Four-

wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy.

●Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.

For additional information, refer to “Engine

oil and oil filter recommendations” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

Starting and driving 5-43

WARNING

●For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-

hicle movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

●Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped

vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer

(such as the dynamometers used by

some states for emissions testing), or

similar equipment even if the other two

wheels are raised off the ground. Make

sure you inform test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD

before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may

result in drivetrain damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage or per-

sonal injury.

CAUTION

●Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO

position on dry hard surface roads. Driv-

ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO

may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear

and increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light or vehicle in-

formation display warning message

turns on when you are driving on dry

hard surface roads:

– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,

move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position with the brake pedal de-

pressed, and shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

●If the warning light or vehicle informa-

tion display warning message is still on

after the above operation, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It

is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

USING 4–WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (if so

equipped)

5-44 Starting and driving

TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING

PROCEDURES

The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions

(2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select the

desired drive mode according to the driving con-

ditions.

2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD Shift Switch Position Wheels Driven Indicator Light Use Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure

4WD shift Transfer 4LO position

2WD

Rear wheels For driving on dry, paved roads

(Economy drive)

Move the 4WD switch.

2WD <—> 4H

4WD shift indicator light will indicate

transfer shift position engaged.

IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE

THE SHIFT SELECT TO THE N POSI-

TION IN THIS OPERATION. PER-

FORM THIS OPERATION WHEN

DRIVING STRAIGHT.

4 wheels For driving on rocky, sandy or snow-

covered roads

(N) Neutral

May blink

(N) Neutral disengages the automatic

transmission mechanical parking lock,

which will allow the vehicle to roll. Do

not leave the transfer shift position in

(N) Neutral.*2

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. With the brake pedal depressed,

move the shift lever to the N

position.

3. With the brake pedal depressed,

depress and turn the 4WD shift

switch to 4LO or 4H.

THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT

ENGAGE BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO

(OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOU

HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VE-

HICLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE

PEDAL AND MOVED THE SHIFT LE-

VER TO (N) NEUTRAL. *3

4LO

4 wheels

Illuminated

For use when maximum power and

traction is required (for example: on

steep grades or rocky, sandy, muddy

roads)

Starting and driving 5-45

*1: Before moving the shift lever from (N) Neutral, wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift procedure is completed

and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind,

not engage correctly or stay in the (N) Neutral position.

- If the 4WD warning light or vehicle information display warning message illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to

correct operating condition.

1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch ⬙OFF⬙.

2. Start the engine.

- Check that the 4WD warning light or vehicle information display warning message turns off. If the 4WD light illuminates, have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

3. Apply the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to (N) Neutral position.

4. With the brake pedal depressed, move the 4WD shift switch to desired mode.

- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift lever from (N) Neutral position.

*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator

lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light will also turn on when

4LO is selected. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in this section.

5-46 Starting and driving

The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to

select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the

driving conditions. There are three types of drive

modes available, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the

transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to

move between each mode, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle

MUST be stationary, shift the shift lever to

(N) Neutral, and depress the brake pedal.

The switch must be pushed and turned to

select 4LO.

WARNING

●When parking, apply the parking brake

before stopping the engine and make

sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is

on and the ATP warning light goes off.

Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpect-

edly move even if the automatic trans-

mission is in the P position.

●The 4LO indicator light must stop blink-

ing and remain illuminated or turn off

before shifting the transmission into

gear. If the shift lever is shifted from the

“N” position to any other gear when the

4LO indicator light is blinking, the ve-

hicle may move unexpectedly.

CAUTION

●Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-

tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

●The 4H position provides greater trac-

tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it will

cause increased fuel consumption and

higher oil temperatures, and could

damage drivetrain components. Speeds

over 62 mph (100 km/h) in 4H is not

recommended.

●The 4LO position provides maximum

power and traction. Avoid raising ve-

hicle speed excessively, as the maxi-

mum speed is approximately 31 mph

(50 km/h).

●When driving straight, shift the 4WD

shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.

Do not move the 4WD shift switch when

making a turn or reversing.

●Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-

tween 2WD and 4H) while driving on

steep downhill grades. Use the engine

brake and low automatic transmission

gears (D1 or D2) for engine braking.

●Do not operate the 4WD shift switch

(between 2WD and 4H) with the rear

wheels spinning.

●Do not drive on dry hard surface roads

in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dry

hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause

unnecessary noise and tire wear.

NISSAN recommends driving in the

2WD position under these conditions.

●The 4WD transfer case may not be

shifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-

bient temperatures and the transfer

4LO position indicator light may blink

even when the 4WD shift switch is

shifted. After driving for a while you can

change the 4WD transfer case between

4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,

●Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

●Drive carefully according to the road surface

conditions.

When the vehicle is stuck,

●Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

●Place stones or wooden blocks under the

tires to free the vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-47

●Use the Electronic Locking Rear Differential

(E-Lock) system (if so equipped). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Electronic lock-

ing rear differential (E-lock) system” in this

section for further explanation and system

limitations.

●If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock the

vehicle back and forth between reverse and

drive gears.

●If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place

stones or wooden blocks under the tires.

Then try the recovery procedures above. Tire

chains may be effective.

CAUTION

●Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires

will sink deep into the mud, making it

difficult to free the vehicle.

●Avoid shifting gears with the engine

running at high speeds as this may

cause malfunction.

4WD shift switch operations

●Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the

2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending on

driving conditions.

●If the 4WD shift switch is operated

while making a turn, accelerating or

decelerating or if the key switch is

turned off while in the 4H or 4LO, you

may feel a jolt. This is not abnormal.

●You may hear some noise as the sys-

tem shifts or engages. This is not ab-

normal.

CAUTION

●When driving straight, shift the 4WD

shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.

Do not move the 4WD shift switch when

making a turn or reversing.

●Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while

driving on steep downhill grades. Use

the engine brake and low automatic

transmission gears (D1 or D2) for en-

gine braking.

●Do not operate the 4WD shift switch

with the rear wheels spinning.

●Before placing the 4WD shift switch in

the 4H position from 2WD, ensure the

vehicle speed is less than 62 mph

(100 km/h). Failure to do so can damage

the 4WD system.

●Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-

tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

LSD2463

5-48 Starting and driving

4WD shift indicator light

The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the

vehicle information display.

The light should turn off within 1 second after

turning the ignition switch to the ON position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-

cator light will illuminate the position selected by

the 4WD shift switch.

●The 4WD shift indicator light may come

on while shifting from one drive mode

to the other. When the shifting is com-

pleted, the 4WD shift indicator light will

stay on.

●If the 4WD warning light or the vehicle infor-

mation display warning message comes on,

the 4WD indicator light goes out.

CAUTION

●If the 4WD shift indicator light indica-

tion changes to 2WD when the 4WD

shift switch is shifted to the 4H position

at low ambient temperatures, the 2WD

mode may be being engaged due to

malfunctioning drive system. If the indi-

cator does not return to normal and the

4WD warning light or the vehicle infor-

mation display warning message

comes on, have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD2328

Starting and driving 5-49

Warning light or warning message

Warning light (if so

equipped)

Warning message Warning light or warning

message comes on when:

Trip computer (if so

equipped)

Vehicle information display

Illuminates

4WD ERROR

4WD Error: See Owner’s

Manual

There is a malfunction in

the 4–wheel drive system

— 4WD TIRES FRT & RR tire size differ-

ence: See Owner’s Manual

The difference in wheel ro-

tation is large

The 4WD warning light comes on when the key

switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the

engine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system

when the key switch is ON, the warning light will

either remain illuminated or blink.

If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD

shift indicator light goes out.

If the “4WD TIRES” warning message comes on,

change the 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do

not drive fast.

CAUTION

●If the warning light or warning message

comes on during operation or rapidly

after stopping the vehicle for a while,

have your vehicle checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not

recommended when the 4WD warning

light or warning message turns on.

●

When the warning light or warning mes-

sage comes on, the 2WD mode may be

engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is in

4H. Be especially careful when driving. If

corresponding parts are malfunctioning,

the 4WD mode will not be engaged even

if the 4WD shift switch is shifted.

5-50 Starting and driving

●Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO

position on dry hard surface roads. Driv-

ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO

may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear

and increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light or warning

message turn on when you are driving

on dry hard surface roads:

– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,

move the automatic transmission

shift lever to the N position with the

brake pedal depressed, and shift the

4WD shift switch to 2WD.

●If the warning light or warning message

is still on after the above operation,

have your vehicle checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●The transfer case may be damaged if

you continue driving with the warning

light or warning message on.

The E-Lock system can provide additional trac-

tion and should only be used when a vehicle has

become or is becoming stuck. This system oper-

ates by electronically “locking” the two rear drive

wheels together, allowing them to turn at the

same speed. The system is used when it is not

possible to free a stuck vehicle even when using

the 4LO position (4-wheel drive vehicles).

When added traction is required, activate the

E-Lock system by pushing the switch on. For

additional information, refer to “Electronic locking

rear differential (E-Lock) system switch” in the

“Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

Once the system fully engages, the indicator light

in the instrument panel will remain on. When the

system is activated, both rear wheels will engage,

providing added traction.

The rear wheels may momentarily slip or move to

engage the system, and the system will only

engage up to approximately 4 mph (7 km/h).

Once the vehicle is free, the system should be

turned off and driving resumed.

The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabled

and the ABS light illuminates when the E-Lock

system is on. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system is disabled and the light

illuminates when the E-Lock system is on.

WARNING

●Never leave the E-lock system on when

driving on paved or hard-surfaced

roads. Turning the vehicle may result in

the rear wheels slipping and result in an

accident and personal injury. After us-

ing the E-lock system to free the ve-

hicle, turn the system off.

●Use the E-lock system only in an emer-

gency when it is not possible to free a

struck vehicle even when using 4LO.

Never use the E-Lock system on a slip-

pery road surface such as snow or ice

surface. Using the E-Lock system when

driving in these road conditions may

cause unexpected movement of the ve-

hicle during engine braking, accelerat-

ing or turning, which may result in an

accident and serious personal injury.

●Observe the above warnings. Other-

wise, loss of normal steering control

may result. This may result in an acci-

dent and serious personal injury.

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR

DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-51

CAUTION

●After using the E-lock system, or during

normal driving, turn the switch off to

prevent possible damage to driveline

components from extended use.

●Avoid quick starts while the E-lock sys-

tem is in operation. Otherwise, the

power train system parts could be

damaged.

●When the E-lock system is in operation,

turning the vehicle becomes difficult.

This can be dangerous, especially at

high speeds. Doing so could damage

drivetrain components.

●Do not operate the E-lock system when

the vehicle is turning or when one side

wheel is rotating. Otherwise, the power

train system parts could be damaged.

●The E-lock system operates only when

the engine is running.

●In 4H mode, the E-lock system does not

operate when the E-lock system switch

is turned to the ON position. (The E-lock

system indicator light will flash.)

●Observe the above cautions. Otherwise,

loss of normal steering control may

result.

When the ignition switch is in the OFF position,

ECO management display appears.

䊊

1Previous 5 times (History)

䊊

2Current fuel economy

䊊

3Best fuel economy

The result of ECO evaluation is displayed 30 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position and the vehicle is driven at least

1/3 miles (500 meters).

䊊

1The average fuel economy for the previous 5

times will be displayed.

䊊

2The average fuel economy since the last

reset will be displayed.

䊊

3The best fuel economy of the past history will

be displayed.

The ECO drive report can be set to be ON or

OFF.

LSD2472

ECO DRIVE REPORT (if so equipped)

5-52 Starting and driving

WARNING

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

●Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park). Fail-

ure to do so could cause the vehicle to

move unexpectedly or roll away and re-

sult in an accident. Make sure the shift

lever has been pushed as far forward as

it can go and cannot be moved without

depressing the foot brake pedal.

●Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave

children, people who require the assis-

tance of others or pets unattended in

your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-

ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good

practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

●HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the

vehicle forward until the curb side wheel

gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road

so the vehicle will move away from the cen-

ter of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

Starting and driving 5-53

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic

pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you

will still have control of the vehicle. However,

much greater steering effort is needed, especially

in sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned off

while driving, the power assist for the

steering will not work. Steering will be

harder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the

brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

●While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-

erating could cause the wheels to skid

and result in an accident.

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the brakes will not work. Braking will be

harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to

heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return

to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high

speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the

stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened

or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or

drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the

best braking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle service

manual. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

5-54 Starting and driving

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM

(ABS)

WARNING

●The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it

cannot prevent accidents resulting from

careless or dangerous driving tech-

niques. It can help maintain vehicle con-

trol during braking on slippery surfaces.

Remember that stopping distances on

slippery surfaces will be longer than on

normal surfaces even with ABS. Stop-

ping distances may also be longer on

rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or

if you are using tire chains. Always

maintain a safe distance from the ve-

hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the

driver is responsible for safety.

●Tire type and condition may also affect

braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and type

as specified on the Tire and Loading

Information label. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Tire and loading

information label” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section

of this manual.

– For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do

not lock during hard braking or when braking on

slippery surfaces. The system detects the rota-

tion speed at each wheel and varies the brake

fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking

and sliding. By preventing each wheel from lock-

ing, the system helps the driver maintain steering

control and helps to minimize swerving and spin-

ning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-

press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,

but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-

ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric

pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that

tests the system each time you start the engine

and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or

reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear

a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a

malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-

tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the

ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The

brake system then operates normally, but without

anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the

self-test or while driving, have the vehicle

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above3-6mph(5

- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road

conditions.

Starting and driving 5-55

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels

are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly ap-

plies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action

is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You

may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a

noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from

the actuator when it is operating. This is normal

and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.

However, the pulsation may indicate that road

conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-

quired while driving.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal ex-

ceeds a certain level, the brake assist is activated

generating greater braking force than a conven-

tional brake booster even with light pedal force.

WARNING

The brake assist is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. it is the driv-

ers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely

and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses

various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-

hicle motion. Under certain driving conditions,

the VDC System helps to perform the following

functions:

●Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel

slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is

transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on

the same axle.

●Controls brake pressure and engine output

to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle

speed (traction control function).

●If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LO

the indicator light will come on and

the VDC system will be turned off. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Using 4-wheel

drive (4WD)” in this section.

●Controls brake pressure at individual wheels

and engine output to help the driver maintain

control of the vehicle in the following condi-

tions:

– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow

the steered path despite increased steer-

ing input)

– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to

certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to maintain

control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of

vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the indi-

cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the

following:

●The road may be slippery or the system may

determine some action is required to help

keep the vehicle on the steered path.

●You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal

and hear a noise or vibration from under the

hood. This is normal and indicates that the

VDC system is working properly.

●Adjust your speed and driving to the road

conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator

light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light” in the ”Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

indicator light will come on in the instrument

panel. The VDC system automatically turns off

when these indicator lights are off.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC

system. The indicator illuminates to indi-

cate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off the

system, the VDC system still operates to prevent

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

5-56 Starting and driving

one drive wheel from slipping by transferring

power to a non slipping drive wheel. The

indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC

functions are off and the indicator will not

flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to ON

when the ignition switch is placed in the off

position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start the

engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse

at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you

may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in

the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an

indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

●The VDC system is designed to help the

driver maintain stability but does not

prevent accidents due to abrupt steer-

ing operation at high speeds or by care-

less or dangerous driving techniques.

Reduce vehicle speed and be especially

careful when driving and cornering on

slippery surfaces and always drive

carefully.

●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,

bushings and wheels are not NISSAN

recommended for your vehicle or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly. This could

adversely affect vehicle handling per-

formance, and the indicator may

flash or the indicator light may

illuminate.

●If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the VDC system may not

operate properly and the indica-

tor light may illuminate.

●If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the indicator light

may illuminate.

●When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners,

the VDC system may not operate prop-

erly and the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illuminate.

Do not drive on these types of roads.

●When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illuminate.

This is not a malfunction. Restart the

engine after driving onto a stable

surface.

●If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN

recommended ones are used, the VDC

system may not operate properly and

the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illuminate.

●The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

During braking while driving through turns, the

system optimizes the distribution of force to each

of the four wheels depending on the radius of the

turn.

Starting and driving 5-57

WARNING

●The VDC system is designed to help the

driver maintain controllability but can-

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or by

careless or dangerous driving tech-

niques. Reduce vehicle speed and be

especially careful when driving and cor-

nering on slippery surfaces and always

drive carefully.

●The active trace control and brake force

distribution systems may not be effec-

tive depending on the driving condition.

Always drive carefully and attentively.

●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,

bushings and wheels are not NISSAN

recommended for your vehicle or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly. This could

adversely affect vehicle handling per-

formance, and the VDC warning light

may illuminate.

●If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the VDC system may not

operate properly and the VDC warning

light may illuminate.

●If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the VDC warning light may

illuminate.

●When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners,

the VDC system may not operate prop-

erly and the VDC warning light may illu-

minate. Do not drive on these types of

roads.

●When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the VDC warning light may illumi-

nate. This is not a malfunction. Restart

the engine after driving onto a stable

surface.

●If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN

recommended ones are used, the VDC

system may not operate properly and

the VDC warning light may illuminate.

●The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

5-58 Starting and driving

WARNING

●Never rely solely on the hill descent

control system to control vehicle speed

when driving on steep downhill grades.

Always drive carefully and attentively

when using the hill descent control sys-

tem and decelerate the vehicle speed by

depressing the brake pedal if neces-

sary. Be especially careful when driving

on frozen, muddy or extremely steep

downhill roads. Failure to control ve-

hicle speed may result in a loss of con-

trol of the vehicle and possible serious

injury or death.

●The hill descent control may not control

the vehicle speed on a hill under all load

or road conditions. Always be prepared

to depress the brake pedal to control

vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re-

sult in a collision or serious personal

injury.

The hill descent control system can only be acti-

vated when the 4H or 4LO switch is engaged.

The hill descent control system helps maintain

vehicle speed when driving under 15 mph

(25 km/h) on steeper downhill grades. Hill de-

scent control is useful when engine braking alone

cannot control vehicle speed. Hill descent con-

trol applies the vehicle brakes to control vehicle

speed allowing the driver to concentrate on

steering while reducing the burden of brake and

accelerator operation.

If the hill descent control light is blinking, the hill

descent control is engaged; however, the hill de-

scent control will not control the vehicle speed.

●Once the system is activated, the indicator

light will remain on in the instrument panel.

For additional information, refer to “Hill de-

scent control system on indicator light”in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

●You may hear a noise from under the hood or

feel a vibration from the actuator when it is

operating. This indicates that the HDC sys-

tem is working properly.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed

while the hill descent control system is on, the

system will stop operating temporarily. As soon

as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the

hill descent control system begins to function

again if the hill descent control operating condi-

tions are fulfilled.

For the best results, when descending steep

downhill grades, the hill descent control switch

should be ON and the shift lever in M1 (First) for

engine braking.

WARNING

●Never rely solely on the hill start assist

system to prevent the vehicle from mov-

ing backward on a hill. Always drive

carefully and attentively. Depress the

brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped

on a steep hill. Be especially careful

when stopped on a hill on frozen or

muddy roads. Failure to prevent the ve-

hicle from rolling backwards may result

in a loss of control of the vehicle and

possible serious injury or death.

●The hill start assist system is not de-

signed to hold the vehicle at a standstill

on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when

the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill.

Failure to do so may cause the vehicle

to roll backwards and may result in a

collision or serious personal injury.

●The hill start assist may not prevent the

vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill

under all load or road conditions. Al-

ways be prepared to depress the brake

pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling

backwards. Failure to do so may result

in a collision or serious personal injury.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-59

When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill start

assist system automatically keeps the brakes ap-

plied. This helps prevents the vehicle from rolling

backward in the time it takes the driver to release

the brake pedal and apply the accelerator when

the vehicle is stopped on a hill.

Hill start assist will operate automatically under

the following conditions:

●The shift lever is shifted to a forward or

reverse gear.

●The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill

by applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After

2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and

hill start assist will stop operating completely.

Hill start assist will not operate when the shift

lever is shifted into N (Neutral) or P (Park) or on a

flat and level road. When the VDC warning light

illuminates in the meter, the hill start assist system

will not operate.

The sonar (parking sensor) system sounds a tone

to inform the driver of obstacles near the bumper.

When the “DISPLAY” key is ON, the sonar view

will automatically appear in the meter.

WARNING

●The sonar (parking sensor) system is a

convenience but it is not a substitute for

proper parking.

●The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other maneu-

vers. Always look around and check that

it is safe to do so before parking.

●Read and understand the limitations of

the sonar (parking sensor) system as

contained in this section. The colors of

the corner sonar indicator and the dis-

tance guide lines in the front/rear view

indicate different distances to the

object.

●Inclement weather or ultrasonic

sources such as an automatic car wash,

a truck’s compressed-air brakes or a

pneumatic drill may affect the function

of the system; this may include reduced

performance or a false activation.

●This function is designed as an aid to

the driver in detecting large stationary

objects to help avoid damaging the

vehicle.

●The system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

Always move slowly. The system will

not detect small objects below the bum-

per, and may not detect objects close to

the bumper or on the ground.

●The system may not detect the follow-

ing objects: Fluffy objects such as

snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.,

Thin objects such as rope, wire and

chain, etc., or wedge-shaped objects.

LSD2659

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

5-60 Starting and driving

If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper

fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing

zone may be altered causing inaccurate mea-

surement of obstacles or false alarms.

CAUTION

●Excessive noise (such as audio system

volume or an open vehicle window) will

interfere with the tone and it may not be

heard.

●Keep the sonar sensors (located on the

bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and

large accumulations of dirt. Do not

clean the sensors with sharp objects. If

the sensors are covered, the accuracy of

the sonar function will be diminished.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The system informs with a visual and audible alert

of front obstacles when the shift lever is in the D

(Drive) position and both front and rear obstacles

when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

Sonar Operation Table

FR Sensor RR Sensor

Range Sound Display Sound Display

Px†x†

Roooo

Nx†x†

Doox †

o – Display/Beep when detect

† – Display on camera view

x – No Display and Beep

The system is deactivated at speeds above

6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower

speeds.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds

when an obstacle is detected by only the corner

sensor and the distance does not change. The

tone will stop when the obstacle get away from

the vehicle.

When the object is detected, the indicator (green)

appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermit-

tently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object,

the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate

of the blinking increase. When the vehicle is very

close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and

turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.

When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to

an object, the corner sonar indicator 䊊

Aappears.

LSD2466

Starting and driving 5-61

The system indicators 䊊

Awill appear when the

vehicle moves closer to an object.

LSD2632

LSD2660

5-62 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

SONAR SYSTEM

The system is automatically activated when the

ignition is in the ON position and the shift lever is

in the R (Reverse) position.

Perform the following steps to enable or disable

the sonar system:

1. Press the sonar switch (the orange light will

go out) to turn the system off.

2. To turn the system back on, press the switch

(the orange light will illuminate) and the sys-

tem will be enabled.

NOTE:

●The system will automatically be turned on

when the engine is restarted.

SONAR LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the Sonar system. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

●The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other maneu-

vers. Always turn and look back before

backing up. The sonar system is not a

substitute for proper procedures.

●Read and understand the limitations of

the sonar system as contained in this

section. Inclement weather may affect

the function of the sonar system; this

may include reduced performance or a

false activation.

●This system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

●The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in detecting large stationary ob-

jects to help avoid damaging the ve-

hicle. The system will not detect small

objects below the bumper, and may not

detect objects close to the bumper or

on the ground.

●The system is deactivated at speeds

above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated

at lower speeds.

●Inclement weather or ultrasonic

sources such as an automatic car wash,

a truck’s compressed-air brakes or a

pneumatic drill may affect the function

of the system; this may include reduced

performance or a false activation.

●The system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

Always move slowly. The system will

not detect small objects below the bum-

per or on the ground.

●The system may not detect the follow-

ing objects: Fluffy objects such as

snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.

Thin objects such as rope, wire and

chain, etc, or wedge-shaped objects.

●The system may not detect objects at

speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may

not detect certain angular or moving

objects.

●The system is deactivated at speeds

above 6 mph (10 km/h) and is reacti-

vated at lower speeds.

Starting and driving 5-63

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sonar sensors 䊊

1are located on the front

and rear bumpers. Always keep the area near the

sonar sensors clean.

The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary

ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist

or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by

objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the

sonar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing the

area around the sonar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent ma-

terial), install accessories or apply additional

paint near the sonar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the

sonar sensors. It is recommended that you con-

sult a NISSAN dealer if the area around the sonar

sensors is damaged due to a collision.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-

icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes

frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key

hole or use the remote keyless entry key fob (if so

equipped).

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-

perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the

antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For

additional information, refer to “Engine cooling sys-

tem” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremely

cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may

freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-

mum efficiency, the battery should be checked

regularly. For additional information, refer to “Bat-

tery” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-

freeze, drain the cooling system, including the

engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “Changing

engine coolant” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

LSD2471

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-64 Starting and driving

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry pave-

ment. However, the performance of these

tires will be substantially reduced in snowy

and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-

hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-

mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL

SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and

availability information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit their

use. Check local, state and provincial laws

before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Tire chains” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

carried in the vehicle during winter:

●A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove

ice and snow from the windows and wiper

blades.

●A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the

jack to give it firm support.

●A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

●Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

●Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” under

these conditions. Try to avoid driving on

wet ice until the road is salted or

sanded.

●Whatever the condition, drive with cau-

tion. Accelerate and slow down with

care. If accelerating or downshifting too

fast, the drive wheels will lose even

more traction.

●Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

●Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

●Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of

ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-

ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,

and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

●Do not use the cruise control (if so

equipped) on slippery roads.

●Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-65

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold

temperature starting.

●Engine block heater should be used when

the outside temperature is 0F or lower.

●Engine block heaters run continuously while

plugged into correct voltage electrical out-

let.

WARNING

●Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system or

a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seri-

ously injured by an electrical shock if

you use an ungrounded connection.

●Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting

the engine. Damage to the cord could

result in an electrical shock and can

cause serious injury.

●Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-

tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug

the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded

110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the

proper extension cord or a grounded

outlet can result in a fire or electrical

shock and cause serious personal

injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block

heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a

grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension

cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-

volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in

for at least 2–4 hours, depending on outside

temperatures, to properly warm the engine

coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the

engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-

erly store the cord to keep it away from

moving parts.

5-66 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ......................6-2

Emergency engine shut off .........................6-2

Flat tire ...........................................6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........6-3

Changing a flat tire .............................6-3

Jump starting ....................................6-10

Push starting.....................................6-12

If your vehicle overheats ...........................6-12

Towing your vehicle ...............................6-13

Towing recommended by NISSAN ..............6-13

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .........6-15

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

●If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

●Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless

unusual circumstances force you to

drive so slowly that your vehicle might

become a hazard to other traffic.

●Turn signals do not work when the haz-

ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch

placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation

while driving, perform the following procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch

three consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-

onds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch

for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

6-2 In case of emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors

tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When

the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in

the vehicle information display, one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated. If

equipped, the system also displays pressure of

all tires (except the spare tire) on the display

screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being

driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti-

vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure

warning light. This system will activate only when

the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h). For additional information, refer to

“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion, and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage

the tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an accident

and could result in serious personal in-

jury. Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

●Since the spare tire is not equipped with

the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted

or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will

not be indicated, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will flash for approximately

one minute. The light will remain on

after one minute. Have your tires re-

placed and/or TPMS system reset as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these

services.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-

low:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to

signal professional road assistance person-

nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

●Make sure the parking brake is securely

applied and the shift lever is shifted into

P (Park).

●Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

●Never change tires if oncoming traffic is

close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-

sional road assistance.

A. Tire stoppers

B. Flat Tire

Blocking wheels

Place tire stoppers, supplied with jack, at both

the front and back of the wheel diagonally oppo-

site the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving

when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools

1. Fold up the right rear bench seat. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Folding the rear

bench seat” in the “Safety–Seats, seat belts

and supplemental restraint system” section

of this manual.

LCE2142

6-4 In case of emergency

2. Remove the tire stopper bag 䊊

3. Release the straps 䊊

4. Collapse the jack to remove it from the stor-

age location. Loosen the jack with your fin-

gers until the jack is free.

5. Remove the jack and tool kit 䊊

6. Assemble the pieces of the jack rod. Find the

oval-shaped opening above the license

plate, slightly to the left of the middle (driv-

er’s side). Pass the T-shaped end of the jack

rod through the opening and direct it toward

the spare tire winch, located directly above

the spare tire.

CAUTION

Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is

designed to be inserted at an angle as

shown.

7. Fit the square end of the jack rod into the

square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form

a handle.

8. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod into

the T-shaped opening of the tire winch. Ap-

ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in

the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod

counterclockwise to lower the spare tire.

9. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,

reach under the vehicle, remove the retainer

chain and carefully slide the tire from under

the rear of the vehicle.

LCE2257 WCE0150 WCE0151

In case of emergency 6-5

10. Securely store the flat tire beneath the ve-

hicle, from where the full size spare was

removed.

11. To reinstall the jack and tool kit, reverse

steps 1 through 5.

CAUTION

Be sure to center the spare tire suspend-

ing plate on the wheel and then lift the

spare tire.

Jacking up vehicle and removing the

damaged tire

WARNING

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

●Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the

jack provided with your vehicle on other

vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting

only your vehicle during a tire change.

●Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for jack

support.

●Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

●Never use blocks on or under the jack.

●Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. This is especially true

for vehicles with limited slip

differentials.

●Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

●Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off

the ground. It may cause the vehicle to

move.

6-6 In case of emergency

Always refer to the illustration for the correct

placement and jack-up points for your specific

vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached to

the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut

wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts

until the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.

Align the jack head between the two

notches in the front or the rear as shown.

Also fit the groove of the jack head between

the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm and

level ground.

WCE0152

In case of emergency 6-7

3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack

as shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever

and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the

tire clears the ground.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the

tire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-

tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence

illustrated (䊊

1,䊊

2,䊊

3,䊊

4,䊊

5,䊊

6) until they

are tight.

LCE0087

WCE0063

6-8 In case of emergency

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the wheel

nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely

in the sequence illustrated

(䊊

1,䊊

2,䊊

3,䊊

4,䊊

5,䊊

6). Lower the vehicle

completely.

WARNING

●Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

●Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts

to become loose.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-

hicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts

to the specified torque with a torque

wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

131 ft-lb (177 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been

parked for 3 hours or more or driven less

than 1 mi. (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label affixed to

the driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD

tire pressure, the display(if so equipped) of

the tire pressure information may show

higher pressure than the COLD tire pres-

sure after the vehicle has been driven more

than 1 mi. (1.6 km). This is because the tire

pressure increases as the tire temperature

rises. This does not indicate a system mal-

function.

5. Securely store the flat tire, tools and jacking

equipment in the vehicle. For additional in-

formation about storing the flat tire, refer to

the “Getting the spare tire and tools” in this

section.

WARNING

●Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly se-

cured after use. Such items can become

dangerous projectiles in an accident or

sudden stop.

●The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. For additional information,

refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

In case of emergency 6-9

To start your engine with a booster battery, the

instructions and precautions below must be fol-

lowed.

WARNING

●If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting in

severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

●Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-

ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all

sparks and flames away from the

battery.

●Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-

rosive sulfuric acid solution which can

cause severe burns. If the fluid should

come into contact with anything, imme-

diately flush the contacted area with

water.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

●The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

●Whenever working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protectors (for

example, goggles or industrial safety

spectacles) and remove rings, metal

bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean

over the battery when jump starting.

●Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause se-

rious injury.

JUMP STARTING

6-10 In case of emergency

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Fail-

ure to do so could result in damage to the

charging system and cause personal

injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,

position the two vehicles to bring their bat-

teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever

to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary elec-

trical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner,

etc.).

3. Ensure the vent caps are level and tight.

4. Remove the fuse/fusible link box and con-

nect jumper cables in the sequence illus-

trated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D).

CAUTION

●Always connect positive (⫹) to positive

(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for

example, strut mounting bolt, engine

lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

●Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine com-

partment and that the cable clamps do

not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and

let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-

hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-

gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for

more than 10 seconds. If the engine does

not start right away, turn the key off and

wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-

nect the negative cable and then the positive

cable.

LCE2223

In case of emergency 6-11

CAUTION

●Do not push start this vehicle. The

three-way catalyst or engine may be

damaged.

●Automatic transmission models cannot

be push-started or tow-started. At-

tempting to do so may cause transmis-

sion damage.

●Three way catalyst equipped models

should not be started by pushing since

the three way catalyst may be damaged.

●Never try to start the vehicle by towing

it; when the engine starts, the forward

surge could cause the vehicle to collide

with the tow vehicle.

WARNING

●Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause engine

damage or a vehicle fire.

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap while the engine is still

hot. When the radiator or coolant reser-

voir cap is removed, pressurized hot

water will spurt out, possibly causing

serious injury.

●Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an

extremely high temperature gauge reading and

the illumination of the engine oil pressure/engine

coolant temperature high indicator light), or if you

feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal

noise, etc. take the following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply

the parking brake and move the shift lever to

P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air conditioner

temperature control to maximum hot and fan

control to high speed.

3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing a

long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast

idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the tem-

perature gauge indication returns to normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator

before opening the hood. If steam or coolant

is escaping, turn off the engine. Do not open

the hood further until no steam or coolant

can be seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-

gine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

6. Visually check drive belts for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is

running. The radiator hoses and radiator

should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,

the water pump belt is missing or loose, or

the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-

gine.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-12 In case of emergency

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or the

engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan

can start at any time.

7. After the engine cools down, check the cool-

ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank

with the engine running. Add coolant to the

engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional and

local regulations for towing must be followed.

Incorrect towing equipment could damage your

vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a

NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are gen-

erally familiar with the applicable laws and proce-

dures for towing. To assure proper towing and to

prevent accidental damage to your vehicle,

NISSAN recommends having a service operator

tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the ser-

vice operator carefully read the following precau-

tions:

WARNING

●Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

●Never get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by a tow truck.

●If your vehicle has front recovery hooks

as original factory equipment, do not

remove or modify them. If it was not

equipped with front recovery hooks, do

not install them. Either action could af-

fect proper operation of the front air

bag system resulting in injury or death.

CAUTION

●When towing, make sure that the trans-

mission, axles, steering system and

powertrain are in working condition. If

any of these conditions apply, dollies or

a flatbed tow truck must be used.

●Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For additional information about towing your ve-

hicle behind a Recreational Vehicle (RV), refer to

“Flat towing” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle based

upon the type of drivetrain. Please refer to the

diagrams in this section to ensure that your ve-

hicle is properly towed.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

In case of emergency 6-13

Rear-Wheel Drive models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed

with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or

place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

●Never tow automatic transmission

models with the rear wheels on the

ground or four wheels on the ground

(forward or backward), as this may

cause serious and expensive damage to

the transmission. If it is necessary to

tow the vehicle with the front wheels

raised always use towing dollies under

the rear wheels.

●When towing automatic transmission

models with the front wheels on the

ground or on towing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position and secure the steering

wheel in a straight-ahead position

with a rope or similar device. Never

secure the steering wheel by placing

the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion. This may cause damage to the

lock mechanism (if so equipped).

When towing long distances or speeds in excess

of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the propeller shaft

before towing to prevent damage to the transmis-

sion. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for more information.

LCE2140

6-14 In case of emergency

Four-Wheel Drive models (if so

equipped)

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be

used when towing your vehicle or place the ve-

hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models with any of the

wheels on the ground as this may cause

serious and expensive damage to the

transfer case and transmission.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck

vehicle)

There are two options to recover a stuck vehicle:

pulling and rocking. For additional information

regarding these options, please refer to the fol-

lowing sections.

Pulling a stuck vehicle

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal

injury or death when recovering a stuck

vehicle:

●

Contact a professional towing service to

recover the vehicle if you have any ques-

tions regarding the recovery procedure.

●Attach recovery devices only to main

structural members of the vehicle or the

recovery hooks.

●Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow

of free a stuck vehicle.

●Only use devices specifically designed

for vehicle recovery and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions.

●Always pull the recovery device straight

out from the front of the vehicle. Never

pull at an angle.

●Route recovery devices so they do not

touch any part of the vehicle except the

attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use

a tow strap or other device designed specifically

for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufactur-

er’s instructions for the recovery device.

LCE2141

In case of emergency 6-15

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

●Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

●Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system.

2. Activate the Electronic Locking Rear Differ-

ential (E-Lock) System (if so equipped). For

additional information, refer to “Electronic

Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock) system”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

3. Make sure the area in front and behind the

vehicle is clear of obstructions.

4. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear

an area around the front tires.

5. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-

ward.

●Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)

and D (Drive).

●Apply the accelerator as little as possible

to maintain the rocking motion.

●Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R (Reverse) and D

(Drive).

●Do not spin the tires above 34 mph

(55 km/h) or above 12 mph (20 km/h) if

the E–Lock System (if so equipped) is

engaged.

6. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing service

to remove the vehicle.

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ..................................7-2

Washing ......................................7-2

Waxing ........................................7-2

Removing spots ................................7-3

Underbody ....................................7-3

Glass .........................................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) ...........7-3

Chrome parts ..................................7-3

Tire dressings ..................................7-3

Cleaning interior...................................7-4

Air fresheners ..................................7-4

Floor mats (if so equipped) ......................7-5

Seat belts .....................................7-6

Corrosion protection ...............................7-7

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion ......................................7-7

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion ......................................7-7

Protect your vehicle from corrosion...............7-7

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-

hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

●after a rainfall to prevent possible damage

from acid rain

●after driving on coastal roads

●when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-

pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get

on the paint surface

●when dust or mud builds up on the surface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of

water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild

soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose

dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm

(never hot) water.

CAUTION

●Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, espe-

cially brushless ones, use some acid for

cleaning. The acid may react with some

plastic vehicle components, causing

them to crack. This could affect their

appearance, and also could cause them

not to function properly. Always check

with your car wash to confirm that acid

is not used.

●Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical deter-

gents, gasoline or solvents.

●Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot, as

the surface may become water-spotted.

●Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean

water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to

avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is

recommended to remove built-up wax residue

and to avoid a weathered appearance before

re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the

proper product.

●Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-

ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the

wax.

●Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may

damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing

on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the

finish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,

and tree sap as quickly as possible from the

surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or

staining. Special cleaning products are available

at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory

store. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is

necessary to clean the underbody regularly in

order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and

causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-

derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-

riod and again in the spring, the underseal must

be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film

from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to

become coated with a film after the vehicle is

parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft

cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,

do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive

cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant

cleaners. They could damage the electrical

conductors, radio antenna elements or

rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so

equipped)

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-

ened in a mild soap solution, especially during

winter months in areas where road salt is used. If

not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

●Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

●Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as am-

bient temperature.

●Do not use chrome cleaner on any

wheel. Doing so can damage the

chrome-like coating on the wheel.

●Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after the

cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

CAUTION

Do not use chrome cleaner on any wheel.

Doing so can damage the chrome-like

coating on the wheel.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to

the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-

ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may

react with the coating and form a compound. This

compound may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

Appearance and care 7-3

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

●Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-

ing on the tire dissolves more easily than

with an oil-based tire dressing.

●Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to

remove).

●Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-

pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

●Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and

leather surfaces (if so equipped) with a clean,

soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then

wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to

maintain the appearance of the leather (if so

equipped).

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-

facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-

tectors contain chemicals that may stain or

bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can dam-

age the seat or occupant classification

sensor (if so equipped). This can also af-

fect the operation of the air bag system

and result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION

●Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-

lar material.

●Small dirt particles can be abrasive and

damaging to leather surfaces and

should be removed promptly. Do not

use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,

oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-

gents or ammonia-based cleaners as

they may damage the leather’s natural

finish.

●Never use fabric protectors unless rec-

ommended by the manufacturer.

●Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-

age the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect

the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,

take the following precautions:

●Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-

manent discoloration when they contact ve-

hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-

ener in a location that allows it to hang free

and not contact an interior surface.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

●Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on

the vents. These products can cause imme-

diate damage and discoloration when

spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions before using the air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference that

may result in a collision, injury or death:

●NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-

other floor mat in the driver front posi-

tion or install them upside down or

backwards.

●Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, or

equivalent floor mats, that are specifi-

cally designed for use in your vehicle

model and model year.

●Properly position the mats in the floor-

well using the floor mat positioning

hook. For additional information, refer

to ⴖFloor mat installationⴖin this

section.

●Make sure the floor mat does not inter-

fere with pedal operation.

●Periodically check the floor mats to

make sure they are properly installed.

●After cleaning the vehicle interior,

check the floor mats to make sure they

are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-

tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they

become excessively worn.

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat position-

ing hook(s). The number and shape of the floor

mat positioning hooks for each seating position

varies depending on the vehicle.

LPD2417

Appearance and care 7-5

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats fol-

low the installation instructions provided with the

mat and the following:

1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell so that

the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with

the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s)

and ensure that the floor mat is properly

positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere

with pedal operation. With the ignition in the

OFF position, the selector lever in the P

(Park) position (Automatic Transmission

models) or the shift lever in the N (Neutral)

position (Manual Transmission models) fully

apply and release all pedals. The floor mat

must not interfere with pedal operation or

prevent the pedal from returning to its nor-

mal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for details about installing the floor mats in your

vehicle.

The illustration shows the location of the floor mat

positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade

before using them. For additional information,

refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety-

–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the

retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,

since these materials may severely

weaken the seat belt webbing.

Positioning hooks

LAI2039

7-6 Appearance and care

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

●the accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities,

and other areas

●damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or

minor traffic collisions

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-

hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.

Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside

the vehicle and should be removed for drying to

avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing and where

atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is

used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-

sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air

in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-

ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-

erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

●Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

●Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible.

●Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

●Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water

as soon as possible.

CAUTION

●NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compartment

by washing it out with a hose. Remove

dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

●Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,

brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-

sion, which may be required in some areas, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-7

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions ...........................8-2

Engine compartment check locations ................8-3

Engine cooling system .............................8-4

Checking engine coolant level ...................8-5

Changing engine coolant ........................8-5

Engine oil.........................................8-6

Checking engine oil level ........................8-6

Changing engine oil ............................8-7

Changing engine oil filter ........................8-8

Fuel filter (CUMMINS 5.0L) .........................8-9

Fuel filter replacement (stage 1) ..................8-9

Fuel filter replacement (stage 2) ..................8-9

Draining water .................................8-9

Fuel system priming.............................8-9

Diesel particulate filter (DPF).......................8-10

Automatic regeneration ........................8-10

6-speed automatic transmission fluid (ATF)

(diesel engine only) ...............................8-10

7-speed automatic transmission fluid (ATF)

(gasoline engine only) .............................8-10

Power steering fluid...............................8-11

Brake fluid .......................................8-11

Windshield-washer fluid...........................8-12

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . .............8-12

Battery ..........................................8-13

Jump starting .................................8-14

Variable voltage control system (if so equipped)......8-15

Drive belt ........................................8-15

Spark plugs (gasoline engine only) .................8-16

Replacing spark plugs .........................8-16

Air cleaner .......................................8-17

In-cabin microfilter.............................8-17

Windshield wiper blades ..........................8-18

Cleaning .....................................8-18

Replacing ....................................8-18

Brakes ..........................................8-19

Fuses ...........................................8-20

Engine compartment...........................8-20

Passenger compartment .......................8-22

Battery replacement ..............................8-24

NISSAN Intelligent Key® .......................8-24

Lights ...........................................8-26

Headlights....................................8-26

Fog lights (if so equipped) ......................8-26

Daytime running light (DRL) (if so equipped)......8-27

Exterior and interior lights.......................8-28

Wheels and tires .................................8-31

Tire pressure..................................8-31

Tire labeling. . .................................8-35

Types of tires..................................8-37

Tire chains . . . .................................8-38

Changing wheels and tires .....................8-38

When performing any inspection or maintenance

work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent

serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to

the vehicle. The following are general precau-

tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

●Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the vehicle

from moving. Move the shift lever to P

(Park)

●Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF

or LOCK position when performing any

parts replacement or repairs.

●If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans, belts

and any other moving parts.

●It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jewelry,

such as rings, watches, etc. before

working on your vehicle.

●Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

●The automatic engine cooling fan (if so

equipped) may come on at any time

without warning, even if the ignition

switch is in the OFF position and the

engine is not running. To avoid injury,

always disconnect the negative battery

cable before working near the fan.

●If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure

there is proper ventilation for exhaust

gases to escape.

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, support

it with safety stands.

●Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

●Because the fuel lines on gasoline en-

gine models are under high pressure

even when the engine is off, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.

CAUTION

●Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

●Avoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle

fluids can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations for

disposal of vehicle fluid.

●Never leave the engine or automatic

transmission related component har-

nesses disconnected while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

●Never connect or disconnect the battery

or any transistorized component while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instructions

regarding only those items which are relatively

easy for an owner to perform.

A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-

able. For additional information, refer to “Owner’s

Manual/Service Manual order information” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improper

servicing may result in operating difficulties or

excessive emissions, and could affect warranty

coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it

is recommended that you have it done by a

NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

VK56VD engine

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

2. Fuse box

3. Engine oil dipstick

4. Power steering fluid reservoir

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8. Fuse/Fusible link box

9. Drive belt location

10. Radiator cap

11. Battery

12. Engine coolant reservoir

For additional information on the Cummins 5.0L

engine, refer to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s

Manual”.

LDI3003

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

Do-it-yourself 8-3

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory

with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and

50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and

coolant protection. The antifreeze solution con-

tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional en-

gine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

●Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool

down. Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator. For additional information

on precautions, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” found in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

●The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-

gine damage, it is recommended that

you use only a Genuine NISSAN radia-

tor cap.

CAUTION

●Never use any cooling system additives

such as radiator sealer. Additives may

clog the cooling system and cause dam-

age to the engine, transmission and/or

cooling system.

●When adding or replacing coolant, it is

recommended that you use only Genu-

ine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equiva-

lent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted

to provide antifreeze protection to -34°

F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection

is needed due to weather where you

operate your vehicle, add Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) concentrate following the direc-

tions on the container. If an equivalent

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is

used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s

instructions to maintain minimum anti-

freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The

use of other types of coolant solutions

other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent

may damage the engine cooling

system.

●The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or

7 years. Mixing any other type of cool-

ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-

ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use

of non-distilled water may reduce the

life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-

ant. For additional information, refer to

the ⴖMaintenance and schedulesⴖsec-

tion of this manual.

For additional information on the Cummins 5.0L

engine cooling system, refer to the “Titan Diesel

Owner’s Manual”.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-4 Do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when

the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below

the MIN level 䊊

B, add coolant to the MAX level

䊊

A. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant

level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If

there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the

radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and

also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level 䊊

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of

the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles

(168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of

coolant or the use of non-distilled water may

reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-

ant. For additional information, refer to “Mainte-

nance and schedules” section of this manual.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

For additional information on the location of the

engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine com-

partment check locations” in this section.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.

The service procedure can be found in the

NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheat-

ing.

WARNING

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the en-

gine is hot.

●Never remove the radiator or engine

coolant reservoir cap when the engine

is hot. Serious burns could be caused by

high pressure fluid escaping from the

radiator.

●Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as

soon as possible.

●Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

For additional information on changing the Cum-

mins 5.0L engine coolant, refer to the “Titan

Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

VK56VD engine

LDI3004

Do-it-yourself 8-5

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than

15 minutes for the oil to drain back into

the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-

insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. It should be between the H (High) and

L (Low) marks 䊊

B. This is the normal oper-

ating oil level range. If the oil level is below

the L (Low) mark 䊊

A, remove the oil filler cap

and pour recommended oil through the

opening. Do not overfill 䊊

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period, depending on the severity

of operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-

erating the engine with an insufficient

amount of oil can damage the engine, and

such damage is not covered by warranty.

For additional information on checking the Cum-

mins 5.0L engine oil level, refer to the “Titan

Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

VK56VD engine

LDI2956

VK56VD engine

LDI0371

ENGINE OIL

8-6 Do-it-yourself

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait more than

15 minutes.

4. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊

Aby turning it

counterclockwise.

5. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug

䊊

6. Remove the drain plug 䊊

Bwith a wrench by

turning it counterclockwise and completely

drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and

replace it at this time. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Changing engine oil filter” in

this section.

●Waste oil must be disposed of prop-

erly.

●Check your local regulations.

WARNING

●Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

●Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as

soon as possible.

●Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

7. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new

washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with

a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

25 ft-lb (34 N·m)

8. Refill engine with recommended oil through

the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler

cap securely.

For additional information on drain and refill

capacity, refer to “Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

The drain and refill capacity depends on the

oil temperature and drain time. Use these

specifications for reference only. Always use

the dipstick to determine when the proper

amount of oil is in the engine.

9. Start the engine. Check for leakage around

the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-

quired.

VK56VD engine

LDI2957

Do-it-yourself 8-7

10. Turn the engine off and wait more than

15 minutes. Check the oil level with the

dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

For additional information on changing the Cum-

mins 5.0L engine oil, refer to the “Titan Diesel

Owner’s Manual”.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Remove bolts 䊊

Aand skid plate.

Skid plate (Type A) (if so equipped)

LDI3005

Skid plate (Type B) (if so equipped)

LDI2875

8-8 Do-it-yourself

4. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter 䊊

5. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench

by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove

the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with

a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket material

remaining on the sealing surface of the

engine. Failure to do so could lead to an

oil leak and engine damage.

7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean

engine oil.

8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance

is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

13 ft-lb (18 N·m)

9. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

10. Install skid plate in reverse order of removal.

11. Turn the engine off and wait more than

15 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine

oil if necessary.

FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT (stage

For additional information, refer to the “Titan Die-

sel Owner’s Manual”.

FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT (stage

For additional information, refer to the “Titan Die-

sel Owner’s Manual”.

DRAINING WATER

For additional information, refer to the “Titan Die-

sel Owner’s Manual”.

FUEL SYSTEM PRIMING

For additional information, refer to the “Titan Die-

sel Owner’s Manual”.

VK56VD engine

LDI2958

FUEL FILTER (CUMMINS 5.0L)

Do-it-yourself 8-9

For additional information, refer to the “Titan Die-

sel Owner’s Manual”.

AUTOMATIC REGENERATION

For additional information, refer to the “Titan Die-

sel Owner’s Manual”.

When checking or replacement is required, we

recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION

●NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN Matic K ATF. Do not mix with

other fluids.

●Do not use CVT fluid or manual trans-

mission fluid in this transmission. Dam-

age caused by the use of fluids other

than as recommended is not covered

under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

●Using fluids that are not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF may also

damage the transmission. Damage

caused by the use of fluids other than as

recommended is not covered under

NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is also

described on caution labels located in the engine

compartment.

When checking or replacement is required, we

recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION

●NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN Matic S ATF. Do not mix with

other fluids.

●Do not use CVT fluid or manual trans-

mission fluid in this transmission. Dam-

age caused by the use of fluids other

than as recommended is not covered

under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

●Using fluids that are not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF may also

damage the transmission. Damage

caused by the use of fluids other than as

recommended is not covered under

NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is also

described on caution labels located in the engine

compartment.

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) (diesel

engine only)

7-SPEED AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF)

(gasoline engine only)

8-10 Do-it-yourself

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT

MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir

at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -

80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the

power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-

tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genu-

ine NISSAN PSF or equivalent, to HOT MAX or

COLD MAX depending on system fluid tempera-

ture. Remove the cap and fill through the open-

ing.

CAUTION

●DO NOT OVERFILL.

●Recommended fluid is Genuine

NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

WARNING

●Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated

fluid may damage the brake system.

The use of improper fluids can damage

the brake system and affect the vehi-

cle’s stopping ability.

●Clean the filler cap before removing.

●Brake fluid is poisonous and should be

stored carefully in marked containers

out of reach of children.

WDI0256 LDI2878

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID

Do-it-yourself 8-11

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is

spilled, immediately wash the surface with

water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the brake

fluid is below the MIN line 䊊

B, the brake warning

light will illuminate. Add brake fluid up to the MAX

line 䊊

A. For additional information on recom-

mended type of brake fluid, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities⬙in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the

brake system should be thoroughly checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-

cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low

windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift

the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-

washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better

cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-

washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving

conditions require an increased amount of

windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-

shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-

freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

●Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for windshield-washer fluid.

This may result in damage to the paint.

●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl al-

cohol based washer fluid concentrates

may permanently stain the grille if

spilled while filling the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir.

●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the windshield-washer fluid reser-

voir. Do not use the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid

concentrate and water.

LDI2879

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

8-12 Do-it-yourself

●If the battery is labeled ⬙do not open⬙it is

maintenance free and battery fluid should

not be checked. See a qualified specialist

workshop to confirm the battery’s perfor-

mance.

●Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking

soda and water.

●Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

●Push the ignition switch to the OFF position

and wait 2 minutes before disconnecting the

battery.

●If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery

terminal cable to prevent discharge.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic

accessories that consume battery power

when the engine is not running (Phone char-

gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only

driven short distances. In these cases, the

battery may need to be charged to maintain

battery health.

WARNING

●Do not expose the battery to flames, an

electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen

gas generated by the battery is explo-

sive. Explosive gases can cause blind-

ness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid

to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or

painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can

cause blindness or injury. After touch-

ing a battery or battery cap, do not

touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly

wash your hands. If the acid contacts

your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 minutes

and seek medical attention.

●Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in

the battery is low. Low battery fluid can

cause a higher load on the battery

which can generate heat, reduce battery

life, and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

●When working on or near a battery, al-

ways wear suitable eye protection and

remove all jewelry.

●Battery posts, terminals and related ac-

cessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds. Wash hands after handling.

●This vehicle uses a special battery. If the

12-volt battery needs to be replaced,

use a 12-volt battery of the same

design.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

●Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent

caps tight and the battery level.

BATTERY

Do-it-yourself 8-13

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as

shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery

case.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level up to the bottom of

the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall

the vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump start-

ing” in the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual. If the engine does not start by jump

starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

WDI0224

WDI0529

8-14 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

●Do not ground accessories directly to

the battery terminal. Doing so will by-

pass the variable voltage control sys-

tem and the vehicle battery may not

charge completely.

●Use electrical accessories with the en-

gine running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage

control system. This system measures the

amount of electrical discharge from the battery

and controls voltage generated by the generator.

The current sensor 䊊

Ais located near the battery

along the negative battery cable. If you add elec-

trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to

ground them to a suitable body ground such as

the frame or engine block area.

1. Power steering fluid pump pulley

2. Automatic belt tensioner pulley

3. Water pump pulley

4. Cooling fan pulley

5. Air conditioner compressor pulley

6. Crankshaft pulley

7. Generator pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or

LOCK position before servicing drive belt.

The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

LDI2959

VK56VD engine

WDI0661

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

DRIVE BELT

Do-it-yourself 8-15

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual

wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is

in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced

or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-

tion and tension in accordance with the

maintenance schedule. For additional infor-

mation, refer to the ⬙Maintenance and

schedules⬙section of this manual.

For additional information on the Cummins 5.0L

engine drive belt, refer to the “Titan Diesel Own-

er’s Manual”.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped spark

plugs as frequently as conventional type spark

plugs because they last much longer. Follow the

maintenance log shown in the “Maintenance and

schedules” section of this manual. Do not service

iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-

ping.

●Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are

off and that the parking brake is engaged

securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket

can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI2972

SPARK PLUGS (gasoline engine only)

8-16 Do-it-yourself

WARNING

●Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or oth-

ers to be burned. The air cleaner not

only cleans the air, it stops the flame if

the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and

the engine backfires, you could be

burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed, and be careful when working

on the engine with the air cleaner

removed.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body or

attempt to start the engine with the air

cleaner removed. Doing so could result

in serious injury.

To remove the filter from the air cleaner, push the

tabs and pull the cover upward.

The viscous paper type filter element should not

be cleaned and reused. Replace the air filter

according to the maintenance log shown in the

“Maintenance and schedules” section of this

manual.

When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside of

the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp

cloth.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner, make

sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the

housing and latch the tabs.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-

borne dust and pollen particles and reduces

some objectionable outside odors. The filter is

located behind the glove box. For additional in-

formation on change intervals, refer to “Gasoline

Standard Maintenance⬙or ⬙Diesel Standard

Maintenance⬙in the ⬙Maintenance and sched-

ules⬙section of this manual.

If replacement is required, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

VK56VD engine

LDI2960

AIR CLEANER

Do-it-yourself 8-17

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer

solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is

clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear

water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked

in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then

rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-

shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades

and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-

age the windshield and impair driver

vision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

2. Push and hold the release tab 䊊

A, and then

move the wiper blade down 䊊

Bthe wiper

arm to remove.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

●After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when the

hood is opened.

●Make sure the wiper blades contact the

glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-

aged from wind pressure.

LDI2725

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-18 Do-it-yourself

Be careful not to let anything get into the washer

nozzle 䊊

D. This may cause clogging or improper

windshield–washer operation. If something gets

into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small

pin 䊊

If the brakes do not operate properly, it is recom-

mended you have the brakes checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust

every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if the

brake pedal height does not return to nor-

mal. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible

wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-

placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-

ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in

motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the

brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator

sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-

sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may

be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to

moderate stops is normal and does not affect the

function or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information on the

appropriate maintenance schedule regarding

brake inspections, refer to ⬙Gasoline Standard

Maintenance⬙or ⬙Diesel Standard Maintenance⬙

in the ⬙Maintenance and schedules⬙section of

this manual.

LDI2710

BRAKES

Do-it-yourself 8-19

Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊

Aand 䊊

Bare

used in the fuse boxes in the engine compart-

ment. Type 䊊

Bis used in the passenger compart-

ment fuse box.

Type 䊊

Bfuses are provided as spare fuses. They

are stored in the passenger compartment fuse

box.

Type 䊊

Afuses can be installed in the engine

compartment and passenger compartment fuse

boxes.

If a type 䊊

Afuse is used to replace a type 䊊

Bfuse,

the type 䊊

Afuse will not be level with the fuse

pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not

affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the

fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type 䊊

Bfuses cannot be used to replace type 䊊

fuses.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of higher or lower amper-

age rating than that specified on the fuse

box cover. This could damage the electri-

cal system or electronic control units or

cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

LDI0455 LDI0457

VK56VD engine

LDI2962

FUSES

8-20 Do-it-yourself

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the

tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The

fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse

block in the passenger compartment.

5. If the fuse is open 䊊

A, replace it with a new

fuse 䊊

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

VK56VD engine

LDI2974

Cummins 5.0L engine

LDI2882

LDI2826

Do-it-yourself 8-21

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not operate and

fuses are in good condition, check the fusible

links. If any of these fusible links are melted,

replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of higher or lower amper-

age rating than that specified on the fuse

box cover. This could damage the electri-

cal system or electronic control units or

cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Open the glove box.

LDI0456 LDI2883

8-22 Do-it-yourself

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.

5. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller 䊊

A. 6. If the fuse is open 䊊

B, replace it with an

equivalent good fuse 䊊

7. Push the fuse box cover to install.

If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI2884 LDI2760

Do-it-yourself 8-23

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallow

the battery or removed parts.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-

lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-

gent Key.

2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver 䊊

Ainto

the slit 䊊

Bof the corner and twist it to sepa-

rate the upper part from the lower part. Place

a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the

casing.

LDI2001

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-24 Do-it-yourself

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 or equiva-

lent.

●Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-

tric terminals as doing so could cause a

malfunction.

●Hold the battery by the edges. Holding

the battery across the contact points will

seriously deplete the storage capacity.

●Make sure that the + side faces the bot-

tom of the lower part.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with 䊊

and 䊊

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

If you need assistance with replacement, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Note:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

LDI2637

Do-it-yourself 8-25

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb

(if so equipped)

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which

uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-

cause the headlight assembly must be removed

from the vehicle for bulb replacement, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

CAUTION

●Aiming is not necessary after replacing

the bulb. When aiming adjustment is

necessary, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Do not leave the headlight assembly

open without a bulb installed for a long

period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,

etc. entering the headlight body may

affect bulb performance. Remove the

bulb from the headlight assembly just

before a replacement bulb is installed.

●Only touch the base when handling the

bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.

Touching the glass could significantly

affect bulb life and/or headlight

performance.

●High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is scratched

or the bulb is dropped.

●Use the same number and wattage as

shown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the

exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A

temperature difference between the inside and

the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not

a malfunction. If large drops of water collect

inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for servicing.

Replacing the LED headlight bulb (if

so equipped)

If LED headlight bulb replacement is required, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

Replacing the fog light bulb

CAUTION

●High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is scratched

or the bulb is dropped.

●When handling the bulb, do not touch

the glass envelope.

●Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed as shown in the

chart.

Fog light (Type B) (if so equipped)

LDI2924

LIGHTS

8-26 Do-it-yourself

●Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light

for a long period of time as dust, mois-

ture and smoke may enter the fog light

body and affect the performance of the

fog light.

NOTE:

The fog light is accessible in front of the

front tire and behind the bumper.

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position

and wait 2 minutes.

2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

3. Disconnect the bulb connector.

4. Rotate the bulb 䊊

Acounterclockwise and

remove.

5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the fog

light assembly. Do not shake or rotate the

bulb when removing it. Do not touch the

glass envelope.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (DRL) (if

so equipped)

Replacing the daytime running light

bulb (Canada only)

NOTE:

The daytime running light is accessible in

front of the front tire and behind the bum-

per.

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position

and wait 2 minutes.

2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

3. Disconnect the daytime running light bulb

connector.

4. Rotate the daytime running light bulb 䊊

counterclockwise and remove.

5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the fog

light assembly. Do not shake or rotate the

bulb when removing it. Do not touch the

glass envelope.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Fog light assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)

(Canada only)

LDI2925

Daytime running light (if so equipped)

(Canada only)

LDI2954

Do-it-yourself 8-27

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*

Low (Halogen) 55 H11

High (Halogen) 60 HB3

Turn/Park 28/8 7444NA

Side marker 5 W5W

Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*

Low — —

High (Halogen) 60 HB3

Daytime running/Park — —

Turn 28/8 7444NA

Side marker 5 W5W

Fog light assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)

(Canada only)

Fog 35 H8

Daytime running 13 P13W

Fog light (Type B) (if so equipped) 55 H11

Daytime running light (if so equipped) (Canada only) 13 P13W

Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — —

Puddle light (if so equipped)* — —

Rear combination light (Type A) (if so equipped)*

Stop 16 PW16W

Backup (reversing) 16 921

Turn/Tail 27/7 3057K

Rear combination light (Type B) (if so equipped)*

Stop — —

Backup (reversing) 16 921

Turn/Tail 27/7 3057K

Cargo (tailgate) (if so equipped) 16 921

High-mounted stop light*

Stop — —

Cargo (roof) — —

Under rail bed light (if so equipped)* — —

License plate light* — —

Map light (if so equipped)* 8 —

Personal light* 8 —

Footwell light (if so equipped)* 3.4 158

Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* — —

Glove box light (if so equipped)* 1.4 —

* Always check with the Parts Department at a

NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for assistance.

8-28 Do-it-yourself

1. Headlight assembly

2. Map light (if so equipped)

3. Personal light

4. Door mirror turn signal light (if so

equipped)

5. Puddle light (if so equipped)

6. Fog light (if so equipped) (Canada only)

7. High-mount stop light

8. Under rail bed light (if so equipped)

9. License plate light

10. Rear combination light

LDI2890

Do-it-yourself 8-29

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When

replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp

and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

NOTE:

Rear combination light (Type B) bulb re-

placement procedure is shown. Rear com-

bination light (Type A) bulb replacement

procedure is similar.

To replace the rear combination light bulbs per-

form the following procedure:

1. Remove the two fasteners 䊊

Aand pull the

rear combination light away from the vehicle.

WDI0263

Rear combination light

LDI2951

8-30 Do-it-yourself

2. Remove harness connector and rotate stop

light bulb 䊊

Bcounterclockwise to remove.

Replace bulb if necessary.

Rotate reverse light bulb socket

䊊

counter-

clockwise to remove. Replace bulb if necessary.

4. Rotate cargo (tailgate) light bulb socket 䊊

(if so equipped) counterclockwise to re-

move. Replace bulb if necessary.

Rotate turn/tail light bulb socket

䊊

counter-

clockwise to remove. Replace bulb if necessary.

Reverse steps to install bulbs and rear combina-

tion light.

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in

the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all four tires ex-

cept the spare. When the low tire pres-

sure warning light is lit and the Tire Pres-

sure Low - Add Air warning appears in the

vehicle information display, one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated. If

equipped, the system also displays pres-

sure of all tires (except the spare tire) on

the display screen by sending a signal

from a sensor that is installed in each

wheel.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-

tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example a flat tire while driving).

For additional information, refer to “Warn-

ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-

minders”in the “Instruments and controls”

section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving”

section, and “Flat tire” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the

spare) often and always prior to long dis-

tance trips. The recommended tire pres-

sure specifications are shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label

or the Tire and Loading Information label

under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.

The Tire and Loading Information label is

affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire

pressures should be checked regularly

because:

●Most tires naturally lose air over time.

●Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other objects

or if the vehicle strikes a curb while

parking.

Rear combination light

LDI2952

WHEELS AND TIRES

Do-it-yourself 8-31

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate

speeds.

The TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert pro-

vides visual and audible signals outside

the vehicle for inflating tires to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure. For addi-

tional information, refer to “TPMS with

Easy Fill Tire Alert” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-

der inflation, may adversely affect

tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

●Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an accident.

●The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight ca-

pacity is indicated on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do

not load your vehicle beyond this

capacity. Overloading your ve-

hicle may result in reduced tire

life, unsafe operating conditions

due to premature tire failure, or

unfavorable handling character-

istics and could also lead to a

serious accident. Loading beyond

the specified capacity may also

result in failure of other vehicle

components.

●Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge

to ensure that the tire pressures

are at the specified level.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

8-32 Do-it-yourself

Tire and loading information label

䊊

1Seating capacity: The maximum num-

ber of occupants that can be seated

in the vehicle.

䊊

2Vehicle load limit: For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle loading infor-

mation” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this

manual.

䊊

3Original tire size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle at

the factory.

䊊

4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to

this pressure when the tires are cold.

Tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or more

hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The

recommended cold tire inflation is set

by the manufacturer to provide the

best balance of tire wear, vehicle

handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,

up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

䊊

5Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” in

this section.

䊊

6Spare tire size.

LDI2926

Do-it-yourself 8-33

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the

tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press too

hard or force the valve stem side-

ways, or air will escape. If the hissing

sound of air escaping from the tire is

heard while checking the pressure,

reposition the gauge to eliminate this

leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare to the specifica-

tion shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of

the valve stem briefly with the tip of

the gauge stem to release pressure.

Recheck the pressure and add or

release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure

Front Original

Tire:

265/70R18

P265/70R18

P275/70R20

P275/70R18

LT245/75R17

LT275/65R18

LT265/60R20

250 kPa, 36 psi

240 kPa, 35 psi

450 kPa, 65 psi

Size Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure

Rear Original Tire:

265/70R18

P265/70R18

P275/70R20

P275/70R18

LT245/75R17

LT275/65R18

LT265/60R20

250 kPa, 36 psi

240 kPa, 35 psi

500 kPa, 73 psi

450 kPa, 65 psi

480 kPa, 70 psi

Spare Tire:

265/70R18

P265/70R18

P275/70R20

P275/70R18

LT245/75R17

LT275/65R18

LT265/60R20

250 kPa, 36 psi

240 kPa, 35 psi

500 kPa, 73 psi

450 kPa, 65 psi

480 kPa, 70 psi

LDI0393

8-34 Do-it-yourself

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to

place standardized information on the

sidewall of all tires. This information iden-

tifies and describes the fundamental

characteristics of the tire and also pro-

vides the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in case of a

recall.

䊊

Tire size (example: LT215/65R15 95H)

1. LT: The “LT” indicates the tire is de-

signed for light truck vehicles (not all

tires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-

ber gives the width in millimeters of

the tire from sidewall edge to side-

wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the

tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number

is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a

measurement of how much weight

each tire can support. You may not

find this information on all tires be-

cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire

speed rating.

Example

WDI0394

Example

LDI2043

Do-it-yourself 8-35

䊊

2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-

ment Of Transportation”. The symbol

can be placed above, below or to the

left or right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).

5. Four numbers represent the week

and year the tire was built. For ex-

ample, the numbers 3103 means the

31st week of 2003. If these numbers

are missing then look on the other

sidewall of the tire.

䊊

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-

ers also must indicate the materials in the

tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester

and others.

䊊

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air

pressure that should be put in the tire. Do

not exceed the maximum permissible in-

flation pressure.

䊊

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load

in kilograms and pounds that can be car-

ried by the tire. When replacing the tires

on the vehicle, always use a tire that has

the same load rating as the factory in-

stalled tire.

䊊

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-

ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

䊊

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire has

radial structure.

䊊

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Example

LDI2786

8-36 Do-it-yourself

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, Intended

Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that

contains a whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on the

other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-

ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical

tire that has a particular side that must

always face outward when mounted on a

vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

●When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. A NISSAN dealer may be

able to help you with information about

tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

●Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory equipped

tires, and may not match the potential

maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed

the maximum speed rating of the tire.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the low tire pres-

sure warning system.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-

els to provide good performance all year, includ-

ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season

tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S

on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow

traction than All Season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models

to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance is substantially re-

duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have

the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four

wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings

than factory equipped tires and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-

ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same

size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all

four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires

may be used. However, some U.S. states and

Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check

local, state and provincial laws before installing

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of

studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

Do-it-yourself 8-37

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to

location. Check the local laws before installing

tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure

they are the proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on

vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-

signed to meet the minimum clearances between

the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or

body component required to accommodate the

use of a winter traction device (tire chains or

cables). The minimum clearances are determined

using the factory equipped tire size. Other types

may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners

when recommended by the tire chain manufac-

turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the

tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage to the

fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-

ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-

tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your

vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling

and performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

rear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with

chains in such conditions can cause damage to

the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to

some overstress.

Use only the 2WD range when driving on clear

paved roads.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires

every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

For additional information on tire replac-

ing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”in the “In

case of emergency” section of this

manual.

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

WDI0258

8-38 Do-it-yourself

Wheel nut tightening torque:

131 ft-lb (177 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to specifications at all times. It

is recommended that wheel nuts be

tightened to specification at each

tire rotation interval.

WARNING

●Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

●Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

●After rotating the tires, do not use

the Easy Fill Tire Alert to adjust

the tire pressure. Instead use a

gauge to adjust the tires to the

correct pressure in accordance

with Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label.

CAUTION

To ensure proper operation of the

Easy Fill Tire Alert system after a

tire rotation, re-set and register the

sensor to their new installed loca-

tions. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING

●Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bulg-

ing or objects caught in the tread.

If excessive wear, cracks, bulging

or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)

should be replaced.

WDI0259

Do-it-yourself 8-39

●The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

●Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be ob-

vious. Replace the tires as neces-

sary to prevent tire failure and

possible personal injury.

●Improper service of the spare tire

may result in serious personal in-

jury. If it is necessary to repair the

spare tire, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread

design, speed rating and load carrying capacity

as originally equipped. For additional information,

refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

●The use of tires other than those recom-

mended or the mixed use of tires of

different brands, construction (bias,

bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns

can adversely affect the ride, braking,

handling, Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system, ground clearance, body-

to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance,

speedometer calibration, headlight aim

and bumper height. Some of these ef-

fects may lead to accidents and could

result in serious personal injury.

●If your vehicle was originally equipped

with 4 tires that were the same size and

you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires,

install the new tires on the rear axle.

Placing new tires on the front axle may

cause loss of vehicle control in some

driving conditions and cause an acci-

dent and personal injury.

●If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels which

have the same off-set dimension.

Wheels of a different off-set could

cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-

hicle handling characteristics, affect the

VDC system and/or interference with

the brake discs. Such interference can

lead to decreased braking efficiency

and/or early brake pad wear. For addi-

tional information on wheel off-set di-

mensions, refer to “Wheels and tires” in

the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

●Since the spare tire is not equipped with

the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted

or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will

not be indicated, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on after

1 minute. Have your tires replaced

and/or TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

8-40 Do-it-yourself

●The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it

is not handled correctly. Be careful

when handling the TPMS sensor.

●When replacing the TPMS sensor, the

ID registration may be required. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for ID registration.

●Do not use a valve stem cap that is not

specified by NISSAN. The valve stem

cap may become stuck.

●Be sure that the valve stem caps are

correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may

be clogged up with dirt and cause a

malfunction or loss of pressure.

●Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been re-

paired. Such wheels or tires could have

structural damage and could fail with-

out warning.

●The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

Four-wheel drive models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or

radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Failure to do so may result in a

circumference difference between tires on

the front and rear axles which will cause

excessive tire wear and may damage the

transmission, transfer case and differen-

tial gears.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended

that all four tires be replaced with tires of the

same size, brand, construction and tread pattern.

The tire pressure and wheel alignment should

also be checked and corrected as necessary. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get

out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-

anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Care of wheels

●Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

●Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

wheel is changed or the underside of the

vehicle is washed.

●Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing

the wheels.

●Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of

pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

●NISSAN recommends waxing the road

wheels to protect against road salt in areas

where it is used during winter.

Do-it-yourself 8-41

MEMO

8-42 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements..........................9-2

General maintenance ...........................9-2

Scheduled maintenance.........................9-2

Where to go for service .........................9-2

General maintenance ..............................9-2

Explanation of general maintenance items .........9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items .........9-5

Emission Control System Maintenance: ...........9-5

Chassis and Body Maintenance: .................9-6

Maintenance schedules ............................9-7

Additional Maintenance Items for severe

operating conditions ............................9-7

Oil change monitor (diesel engine only) ...........9-7

Gasoline standard maintenance .....................9-8

Emission control system maintenance.............9-8

Chassis & body maintenance ...................9-10

Gasoline maintenance under severe operating

conditions .......................................9-12

Severe driving conditions.......................9-12

Diesel standard maintenance ......................9-13

Emission control system maintenance............9-13

Chassis & body maintenance ...................9-15

Diesel maintenance under severe operating

conditions .......................................9-17

Severe driving conditions.......................9-17

Oil change monitor ............................9-17

Maintenance log..................................9-18

Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-

mum maintenance requirements with long ser-

vice intervals to save you both time and money;

however, some day-to-day and regular mainte-

nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s

good mechanical condition as well as its emis-

sions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

the scheduled maintenance, as well as general

maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives proper

maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-

nance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items which

should be checked during normal day-to-day op-

eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-

eration. It is your responsibility to perform these

maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requires

minimal mechanical skill and only a few general

automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,

a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN

dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

The maintenance items listed in this section are

required to be serviced at regular intervals. How-

ever under severe driving conditions, additional

or more frequent maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle

appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and corrected. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists

who are kept up-to-date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips and in-dealership training programs. They

are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-

hicles before they work on your vehicle rather

than after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s

service department performs excellent service to

meet the maintenance requirements on your ve-

hicle — in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a

NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if

you think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-

tions” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors

and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure

that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,

latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the

hood from opening when the primary latch is

released.

When driving in areas using road salt or other

corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all

operating properly and installed securely. Also

check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking

the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,

and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if

necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every

5,000 miles (8,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often

and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-

sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the

spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully

for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the TPMS

transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap

when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle

should pull to either side while driving on a

straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or

abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at

normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to

“Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular

basis. Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-

aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair

facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks

or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when per-

forming scheduled maintenance, cleaning the ve-

hicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation and make sure the pedal does not bind

or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away

from the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) position

mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that

your vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in

the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth op-

eration. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down

further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the

vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your

vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake opera-

tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held

on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake

applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, it

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

Seats: Check seat position controls such as

seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure

they operate smoothly and all latches lock se-

curely in every position. Check that the head

restraints/headrests move up and down

smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold

securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters

and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

and are installed securely. Check the belt web-

bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering system, such as excessive freeplay, hard

steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all

warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that

the wipers and washer operate properly and that

the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in

sufficient quantity when operating the heater or

air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time you

check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* (for seviceable batteries): Check

the fluid level in each cell. It should be between

the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high

temperatures or under severe conditions require

frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not run-

ning (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake

fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on

the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level

when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive belts

are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking

the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.

Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain

back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust

pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, de-

terioration and damage. Tighten connections or

replace parts as necessary. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,

water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner after use is normal. If you should

notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident,

check for the cause and have it corrected imme-

diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check

the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine

off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,

cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the

hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose

connections.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances from the

underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor

pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the

end of winter, the underbody should be thor-

oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas

where mud and dirt may have accumulated. For

additional information, refer to the “Appearance

and care” section of this manual.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is

adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to give

you a better understanding of the scheduled

maintenance items that should be regularly

checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule

indicates at which mileage/time intervals each

item requires service.

Items marked with “*” are recommended by

NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are

not required to perform maintenance on these

items in order to maintain the warranties which

come with your NISSAN. Other maintenance

items and intervals are required.

When applicable, additional information can be

found in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

NOTE: NISSAN does not advocate the use of

non-OEM approved aftermarket flushing sys-

tems and strongly advises against performing

these services on a NISSAN product. Many of the

aftermarket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-

proved chemicals or solvents, the use of which

has not been validated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, grease,

and refrigerant, refer to “Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of this

manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE:

Drive Belts*:

Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or

cracking and for proper tension. Replace any

damaged drive belts.

Engine Air Filter:

Replace at specified intervals. When driving for

prolonged periods in dusty conditions,

check/replace the filter more frequently.

Engine Coolant*:

Replace coolant at the specified interval. When

adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For

additional information on the proper mixture for

your area, refer to Engine cooling system” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual or the “Ti-

tan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.)

NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or the use

of non-distilled water may reduce the recom-

mended service interval of the coolant.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

Engine Oil and Oil Filter:

Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified

intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscos-

ity refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities” in the “Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

Engine Valve Clearance* (gasoline engine

only):

Inspect only if valve noise increases. Adjust valve

clearance if necessary.

Evaporative Emissions Control Vapor

Lines* (gasoline engine only):

Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten

connections or replace parts as necessary.

Fuel Filter (diesel engine only):

Replace the fuel filter and drain the water at the

specified intervals.

Fuel Lines*:

Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for

leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten con-

nections or replace parts as necessary.

CHASSIS AND BODY

MAINTENANCE:

Brake Lines and Cables:

Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for

chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs of leak-

ing. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts

immediately.

Brake Pads, Rotors, Drums, & Linings:

Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks.

Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts im-

mediately.

Exhaust System:

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and

hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and dam-

age. Tighten connections or replace parts as

necessary.

In-Cabin Microfilter:

Replace at specified intervals. When driving for

prolonged periods in dusty conditions, replace

the filter more frequently.

Propeller Shaft(s):

Check for damage, looseness, and grease leak-

age. (4WD/AWD/RWD).

Steering Gear and Linkage, Axle and Sus-

pension Parts, Drive Shaft Boots:

Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil

or grease. Under severe driving conditions, in-

spect more frequently.

Tire Rotation:

Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles

(8,000 km) according to the instructions under

“General maintenance” in this section. When ro-

tating tires, check for damage and uneven wear.

Replace if necessary.

Transmission Fluid/Oil, Differential Oil,

Transfer Case Oil:

Visually inspect for signs of leakage at specified

intervals.

Replace automatic transmission fluid at specified

intervals. (For diesel engine models)

If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top

carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads:

●Replace the differential oil every

20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.

●Replace the automatic transmission fluid

ever 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or

24 months. (For gasoline engine models)

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

Off-Road Maintenance:

Check the following items frequently whenever

you drive off-road through deep sand, mud or

water:

●Brake pads and rotors

●Brake linings and drums

●Brake lines and hoses

●Differential, transmission and transfer case

oil

●Steering linkage

●Propeller shaft(s) and front drive shafts

●Engine air filter

●Clutch housing drain (4WD only)

To help ensure smooth, safe and economical

driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance

schedules that may be used, depending upon the

conditions in which you usually drive. These

schedules contain both distance and time inter-

vals, up to 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months. For most people, the

odometer reading will indicate when service is

needed. However, if you drive very little, your

vehicle should be serviced at the regular time

intervals shown in the schedule.

After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months, continue main-

tenance at the same mileage/time inter-

vals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

FOR SEVERE OPERATING

CONDITIONS

Additional maintenance items for severe

operating conditions should be performed on

vehicles that are driven under especially de-

manding conditions. Additional maintenance

items should be performed if you primarily oper-

ate your vehicle under the following conditions:

●Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles in

normal temperatures or less than 10 miles in

freezing temperatures.

●Stop-and-go traffic in hot weather or low

speed driving for long distances.

●Driving in dusty conditions or on rough,

muddy or salt-spread roads.

●Towing a trailer, or using a camper or car-top

carrier.

OIL CHANGE MONITOR (diesel

engine only)

This vehicle is equipped with oil change monitor.

It calculates engine oil and filter change interval

base on driving conditions. Driving in severe con-

ditions will shorten the engine oil and filter

change interval. When the Engine Oil – Service

Due Now warning appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display, the engine oil and filter need to be

replaced.

NOTE:

For vehicles operated in Canada, both

standard and severe maintenance items

should be performed at every interval.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

The following tables show the standard mainte-

nance schedule. Depending upon weather and

atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces,

individual driving habits and vehicle usage, addi-

tional or more frequent maintenance may be re-

quired. Maintenance beyond the last period

on the tables requires similar maintenance.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace, D = Drain water

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine coolant See NOTE (4)(5)

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Spark plugs (Iridium - tipped type) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances See NOTE (6)

GASOLINE STANDARD

MAINTENANCE

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine coolant See NOTE (4)(5)

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Spark plugs (Iridium - tipped type) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances See NOTE (6)

NOTE:

(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found

damaged.

(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.

(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km)

or 60 months.

(5) It is recommended that you use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ration of

50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce

the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant.

(6) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.

* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such

maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are

required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever

comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Brake lines and cables I I I I I I

Brake pads and rotors 夝II I II I

Brake fluid 夝RRR

Automatic transmission fluid See NOTE (1)

Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts 夝III

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) 夝II I II I

Exhaust system 夝III

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

NISSAN Intelligent key® battery R R R R

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,

whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Brake lines and cables I I I I I I

Brake pads and rotors 夝IIIIII

Brake fluid 夝RRR

Automatic transmission fluid See NOTE (1)

Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts

夝

III

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) 夝IIIIII

Exhaust system 夝III

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance Under Severe Driving Conditions”.

(1) Periodic maintenance is not required under normal driving condition. If using under the severe condition such as towing a trailer, using

a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. NISSAN

recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S automatic transmission fluid. Using automatic transmission fluid that is not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN Matic S may damage the transmission or impact transmission durability. Damage caused by the use of fluid other than

as recommended is not covered under the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every

20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.

(3) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “GENERAL MAINTENANCE” heading earlier in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

The maintenance intervals shown on the preced-

ing pages are for normal operating conditions. If

the vehicle is mainly operated under severe driv-

ing conditions as shown below, more frequent

maintenance must be performed on the following

items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

●Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

●Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles

(16 km) with outside temperatures remain-

ing below freezing.

●Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go

“rush hour” traffic.

●Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for

long distance, such as police, taxi or door-

to-door delivery use.

●Driving in dusty conditions.

●Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

●Towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top

carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval

Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months

Brake pads and rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

GASOLINE MAINTENANCE UNDER

SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

The following tables show the standard mainte-

nance schedule. Depending upon weather and

atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces,

individual driving habits and vehicle usage, addi-

tional or more frequent maintenance may be re-

quired. Maintenance beyond the last period

on the tables requires similar maintenance.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace, D = Drain water

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

Engine oil See NOTE (3) R R R R R R

Engine oil filter See NOTE (4) R R R R R R

Engine coolant Replace every 45,000 miles or 36 months

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTES (5) R/D R/D R/D R/D R/D R/D

DIESEL STANDARD MAINTENANCE

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

Engine oil See NOTE (3) R R R R R R

Engine oil filter See NOTE (4) R R R R R R

Engine coolant Replace every 45,000 miles or 36 months

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (5) R/D R/D R/D R/D R/D R/D

NOTE:

(1) Replace the drive belts if found damaged.

(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

(3) If operating on biodiesel blends between 6% and 10% (B6 and B10), the oil should be changed at least every 8,000 miles (12,875 km)

or 6 months, whichever comes first.

(4) If operating on biodiesel blends between 6% and 10% (B6 and B10), the oil filter should be changed at least every 8,000 miles

(12,875 km) or 6 months, whichever comes first.

(5) Both Stage I and Stage II fuel filters.

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever

comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Brake lines and cables I I I I I I

Brake pads and rotors 夝II I II I

Brake fluid 夝RRR

Automatic transmission fluid I R I R I R

Differential gear oil See NOTE (1) I I I I I I

Transfer fluid II I II I

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts 夝III

Tire rotation See NOTE (2)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) 夝II I II I

Exhaust system 夝II I II I

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

NISSAN Intelligent key® battery R R R R

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, which-

ever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Brake lines and cables IIIIII

Brake pads and rotors 夝IIIIII

Brake fluid 夝RRR

Automatic transmission fluid I R I R I R

Differential gear oil See NOTE (1) IIIIII

Transfer fluid IIIIII

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts 夝III

Tire rotation See NOTE (2)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) 夝IIIIII

Exhaust system 夝IIIIII

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance Under Severe Driving Conditions”.

(1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every

20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.

(2) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “GENERAL MAINTENANCE” heading earlier in this section.

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

The maintenance intervals shown on the preced-

ing pages are for normal operating conditions. If

the vehicle is mainly operated under severe driv-

ing conditions as shown below, more frequent

maintenance must be performed on the following

items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

●Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

●Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles

(16 km) with outside temperatures remain-

ing below freezing.

●Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go

“rush hour” traffic.

●Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for

long distance, such as police, taxi or door-

to-door delivery use.

●Driving in dusty conditions.

●Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

●Towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top

carrier.

OIL CHANGE MONITOR

This vehicle is equipped with oil change monitor.

It calculates engine oil and filter change interval

base on driving conditions. Driving in severe con-

ditions will shorten the engine oil and filter

change interval. When the Engine Oil – Service

Due Now warning appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display, the engine oil and filter need to be

replaced.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval

Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months

Brake pads and rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Engine oil and filter Replace Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or when the Engine Oil –

Service Due Now warning appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display

DIESEL MAINTENANCE UNDER

SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS

Maintenance and schedules 9-17

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

MAINTENANCE LOG

9-18 Maintenance and schedules

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-19

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 120

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

9-20 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities ......10-2

Fuel recommendation ..........................10-5

Engine oil and oil filter recommendations

(for gas engine only) ...........................10-7

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil

recommendations .............................10-8

Specifications....................................10-9

Engine .......................................10-9

Wheels and tires .............................10-10

Dimensions and weights ......................10-11

When traveling or registering in another country.....10-13

Vehicle identification .............................10-13

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate ........10-13

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) .............................10-13

Engine serial number..........................10-14

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-14

Emission control information label ..............10-15

Tire and loading information label...............10-15

Air conditioner specification label...............10-16

Installing front license plate .......................10-16

Vehicle loading information .......................10-17

Terms .......................................10-17

Vehicle load capacity .........................10-18

Securing the load.............................10-20

Utili-track™ channel system (if so equipped) .....10-21

Loading tips .................................10-29

Truck-camper loading information .................10-29

Crew cab models.............................10-29

Location for center of gravity...................10-30

Vehicle load weight capacity ...................10-30

Measurement of weights ......................10-30

Towing a trailer ..................................10-31

Maximum load limits ..........................10-31

Towing load/specification......................10-34

Towing safety ................................10-37

Flat towing for 2-Wheel Drive (2WD) vehicle

(if so equipped) ..............................10-52

Flat towing for 4-Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicle

(if so equipped) ..............................10-53

Snow plow .....................................10-53

Uniform tire quality grading .......................10-54

Emission control system warranty .................10-55

Reporting safety defects .........................10-55

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test

(gas engine only) ................................10-56

Event Data Recorders (EDR)......................10-57

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . .10-57

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure

described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric Measure US Measure Imperial Measure

Fuel

VK56VD 98.4 L 26 gal 21-5/8 gal • For additional information, refer to “Fuel Recommenda-

tion” in this section of the “Owner’s Manual”.

Cummins 5.0 L — — —

• For additional information, refer to “Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities” chart of the “Titan Diesel

Owner’s Manual”.

Engine oil *1

Drain and refill

*1 For additional

information, refer to

“Changing engine oil”

in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this

manual.

VK56VD

With oil

filter

change

6.5 L 6-7/8 qt 5-3/4 qt

(Gasoline Engine)

• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is

recommended.

• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent

motor oil that matches the above grade and viscosity. For

additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter

recommendations” in this section.

Without oil

filter

change

6.2 L 6-1/2 qt 5-1/2 qt

Cummins 5.0 L — — —

(Diesel Engine)

• For additional information, refer to “Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities” chart of the “Titan Diesel

Owner’s Manual”.

Engine coolant

VK56VD 14.8 L 3-7/8 gal 3-1/4 gal • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) or equivalent

Cummins 5.0 L — — —

• For additional information, refer to “Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities” chart of the “Titan Diesel

Owner’s Manual”.

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid type Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric Measure US Measure Imperial Measure

Automatic transmis-

sion fluid (ATF)

6-speed (Diesel engine

only)

—— —

• Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF

• Using automatic transmission fluid that is not equivalent

to Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF may damage the trans-

mission or impact transmission durability. Damage

caused by the use of fluid other than as recommended is

not covered under the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

7-speed (Gasoline en-

gine only)

• Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S

ATF ONLY in NISSAN automatic transmissions. Do not

mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent

to Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF may damage the auto-

matic transmission. Damage caused by the use of fluid

other than as recommended is not covered under the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Front differential gear

oil Non-XD Model 1.25 L 2-5/8 pt 2-1/4 pt

• API GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-90

Rear differential gear

oil Non-XD Model 2.3 L 4-7/8 pt 4 pt

Front differential gear

oil XD Model 1.51 L 3-1/4 pt 2-5/8 pt

• API GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-90

Rear differential gear

oil XD Model 2.6 L 5-1/2 pt 4-5/8 pt

Technical and consumer information 10-3

Fluid type Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric Measure US Measure Imperial Measure

Transfer fluid

Non-XD Model 1.5 L 1-5/8 qt 1-3/8 qt

• Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M

• Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M may

cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability,

and may damage the transfer case. Damage caused by

fluids other than as recommended is not covered by the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

XD Model 1.8 L 1-7/8 qt 1-5/8 qt

• Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M

• Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M may

cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability,

and may damage the transfer case. Damage caused by

fluids other than as recommended is not covered by the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Power steering fluid (PSF) — — — • Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

• DEXRON™ VI type ATF may also be used.

Brake fluid — — —

• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *2 or

equivalent DOT 3.

*2 Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —

• HFC-134a (R-134a)

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner sys-

tem refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Air conditioning system oil — — —

• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or

equivalent

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner sys-

tem refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Windshield-washer fluid 4.5 L 1-1/4 gal 1 gal • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate

Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Gas engine only

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-

ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to

run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or

E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically

designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-

versely affect the emission control de-

vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-

age caused by such fuel is not covered

by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

●Do not use fuel that contains the octane

booster methylcyclopentadienyl man-

ganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel

containing MMT may adversely affect

vehicle performance and vehicle emis-

sions. Not all fuel dispensers are la-

beled to indicate MMT content, so you

may have to consult your gasoline re-

tailer for more details. Note that Fed-

eral and California laws prohibit the use

of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

●U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-

fied by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbrevia-

tion or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

Diesel engine only

For additional information, refer to “Fuel recom-

mendation” in the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets

the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-

cations where it is available. Many of the automo-

bile manufacturers developed this specification

to improve emission control system and vehicle

performance. Ask your service station manager if

the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-

lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially

designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-

gests that you use reformulated gasoline when

available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-

genates such as ethanol, Methyl Tert-butyl Ether

(MTBE) and methanol with or without advertising

their presence. NISSAN does not recommend

the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content

and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-

not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your

service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take

the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems

and/or fuel system damage.

●The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

●If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should con-

tain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

●E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-

genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle and should not be

used. Damage caused by such fuel is

not covered by the NISSAN New Ve-

hicle Limited Warranty.

●If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable amount

of appropriate cosolvents and corro-

sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-

lated with appropriate cosolvents and

corrosion inhibitors, such methanol

blends may cause fuel system damage

and/or vehicle performance problems.

At this time, sufficient data is not avail-

able to ensure that all methanol blends

are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-

hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-

ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after

using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately

change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a

low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-

eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can

cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel

ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can

only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15

fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. gov-

ernment regulations require fuel ethanol dispens-

ing pumps to be identified with small, square,

orange and black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage for that

region.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel

ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can

only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do

not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government

regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange

and black label with the common abbreviation or

the appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tri-

carbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN

does not recommend the use of fuel containing

MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle per-

formance, including the emissions control sys-

tem. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT

content, not all do, so you may have to consult

your gasoline retailer for more details.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-

tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit

removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.

Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish

or deposit removal may contain active solvents or

similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel

system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can cause

persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark

knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-

vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you

detect a persistent heavy spark knock even

when using gasoline of the stated octane

rating, or if you hear steady spark knock

while holding a steady speed on level

10-6 Technical and consumer information

roads, it is recommended that you have a

NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Fail-

ure to correct the condition is misuse of the

vehicle, for which NISSAN is not respon-

sible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark

knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may

cause excessive fuel consumption or engine

damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-

countered, have your vehicle checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

servicing.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS (for gas

engine only)

For diesel engine oil and oil filter recommenda-

tions, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommen-

dations” section of the “Titan Diesel Owner’s

Manual”.

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality

and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory

engine life and performance. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants

and capacities” in this section. NISSAN recom-

mends the use of an energy conserving oil in

order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-

tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-

cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-

tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which

do not have the specified quality label should not

be used as they could cause engine damage.

LTI2051

Technical and consumer information 10-7

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-

sary when the proper oil type is used and main-

tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been

previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is important

to select the engine oil viscosity based on the

temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-

ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil

viscosity other than that recommended could

cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its

equivalent for the reason described in “Change

intervals.”

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters

that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding

recommended oil and filter change intervals

could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine

caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not

covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine

oil when it was built. You do not have to change

the oil before the first recommended change

interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend

upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may

require more frequent oil and filter changes:

●repeated short distance driving at cold out-

side temperatures

●driving in dusty conditions

●extensive idling

●towing a trailer

●stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the “Mainte-

nance and schedules” section of this manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle must be charged with the refriger-

ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C

system oil Type S (DH-PS) or the exact

equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil may

cause severe damage to the air condition-

ing system and may require the replace-

ment of all air conditioner system

components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the

earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-

tions require the recovery and recycling of any

refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-

tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained

technicians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-

ant.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

when servicing your air conditioner system.

10-8 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE

Gas engine only

Model VK56VD

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 338.78 (5,552)

Firing order 1–8–7–3–6–5–4–2

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.

A/T (in “N” position)

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle

speed)

CO%atidle

Spark plug DIKAR7B11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

Diesel engine only

For additional information, refer to “Engine” in the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

SPECIFICATIONS

Technical and consumer information 10-9

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel Type Offset in (mm) Size

Steel 1.73 (44) 17 x 7.5 J

0.98 (25) 18 x 8.0 J

Alloy

0.98 (25) 18 x 8.0 J

0.91 (23) 18 x 8.0 J

1.63 (41.5) 18 x 7.5 J

0.91 (23) 20 x 8.0 J

1.63 (41.5) 20 x 7.5 J

Tire type Performance type Size

Passenger

All season 265/70R18

All season P265/70R18

All season P275/60R20

All terrain P275/70/R18

Light truck

All season LT245/75R17

All terrain LT275/65R18

All season LT265/60R20

Spare wheel type Performance type Size

Full size (Non Matching)

Steel

- 265/70R18

- P265/70R18

- LT245/75R17

Full size (Non Matching)

Alloy

- P275/60/R20

- LT275/65R18

Full size (Matching) Alloy

- P275/70R18

- P275/60R20

- LT275/60R20

10-10 Technical and consumer information

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Non-XD models

Models Units: in (mm)

Overall Length:

S, SV, SL and Platinum 228.1 (5,794.2)

Pro-4X 228.5 (5,804.1)

Overall width:

Tow mirrors extended 102.6 (2607.19)

Without overfenders S, SV and SL 79.5 (2,020)

With overfenders Pro-4X and Platinum 80.7 (2,049.6)

Overall height:

2WD S/SV 75.4 (1,915.1)

4WD S/SV 76.0 (1,929.7)

2WD SL/Platinum 75.6 (1,920.4)

4WD Pro-4X 77.2 (1,960.3)

4WD SL/Platinum 77.2 (1,959.7)

Front Track:

S and SV 67.9 (1,725)

SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.1 (1,729)

Rear Track:

S and SV 67.9 (1,725)

SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.1 (1,729)

Wheelbase: 139.8 (3,550)

Gross vehicle weight rating:

Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on the

center pillar between the driver’s side front and rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating:

Front:

Rear:

Technical and consumer information 10-11

XD models

Models Units: in (mm)

Overall Length:

Without front license plate bracket S, SV, SL and Platinum 242.7 (6,165.7)

Without front license plate bracket Pro-4X 243.6 (6,187.1)

With front license plate bracket S, SV, SL and Platinum 243.0 (6,172.6)

With front license plate bracket Pro-4X 243.9 (6,194.6)

Overall width:

Tow mirrors non-extended 98.2 (2,494)

Tow mirrors extended 103.9 (2,640)

Without overfenders S, SV and SL 79.5 (2,019.9)

With overfenders Pro-4X and Platinum 80.7 (2,048.9)

Overall height:

2WD/4WD S/SV 78.0 (1980)

4WD Pro-4X 78.3 (1,990)

2WD/4WD SL/Platinum 78.7 (2,000)

Front Track:

S 68.4 (1,738)

SV, SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.6 (1,743)

Rear Track:

S 68.3 (1,737)

SV, SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.6 (1,742)

Wheelbase: 151.6 (3,850)

Gross vehicle weight rating:

Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on the

center pillar between the driver’s side front and rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating:

Front:

Rear:

10-12 Technical and consumer information

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first find

out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-

cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low

may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-

fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where

appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-

sion control and safety standards vary according

to the country, state, province or district; there-

fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district and

registered, its modifications, transporta-

tion and registration are the responsibility

of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for

any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is

attached as shown. This number is the identifica-

tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle

registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located as

shown.

LTI2195 LTI0086

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

Technical and consumer information 10-13

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The engine serial number is stamped on the

engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-

bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-

able vehicle information, such as: (GVWR),

(GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN),

etc. Review it carefully.

VK56VD

WTI0095

Cummins 5.0L

LTI2155 LTI2194

10-14 Technical and consumer information

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is at-

tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information Label. The label is located as

shown.

XD models

LTI2197

Except XD models

LTI2242 LTI2196

Technical and consumer information 10-15

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed to

the underside of the hood as shown.

Use the following steps to mount the front license

plate:

1. Attach the license plate bracket on the skid

plate at the location marked (small dimple)

using self-tapping screws.

XD models

LTI2198

Except XD models

LTI2243

Pro-4X

LTI2230

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

10-16 Technical and consumer information

Use the following steps to mount the front license

plate:

1. Install two grommets 䊊

Ainto the square

holes in the front bumper.

2. Install the license plate bracket to the front

bumper with two tapping screws 䊊

WARNING

●It is extremely dangerous to ride

in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In

a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any

area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and seat

belts.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with

the following terms before loading your

vehicle:

●Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:

standard and optional equipment, flu-

ids, emergency tools, and spare tire

assembly. This weight does not in-

clude passengers and cargo.

Except Pro-4x

LTI2225

Except Pro-4x

LTI2226

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 10-17

●GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of

passengers and cargo.

●GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-

sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer

tongue load and any other optional

equipment. This information is lo-

cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

●GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit specified

for the front or rear axle. This informa-

tion is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

●GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

rating) - The maximum total weight

rating of the vehicle, passengers,

cargo, and trailer.

●Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum total

weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the ve-

hicle. This is the maximum combined

weight of occupants and cargo that

can be loaded into the vehicle. If the

vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the

trailer tongue weight must be in-

cluded as part of the cargo load. This

information is located on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

●Cargo capacity - permissible weight

of cargo, the subtracted weight of

occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

Both the GVWR and GAWR are located

on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label. For additional information, refer to

“Measurement of weights” in this section.

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-

hicle shown as “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo” on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do not exceed

the number of occupants shown as

“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-

ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo”, add the weight of all

occupants, then add the total luggage

weight. Examples are shown in the follow-

ing illustration.

10-18 Technical and consumer information

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX

kg” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX lbs

or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the

XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lb. passengers

in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)

= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

Example

LTI0152

Technical and consumer information 10-19

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo and

luggage load capacity calculated in

step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be trans-

ferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this re-

duces the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “Mea-

surement of weights” in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. For additional information, refer to

the “Tire and loading information label” in

this section.

SECURING THE LOAD

For your convenience, tie down hooks are placed

at each corner of the truck box. These may be

used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck

box.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●Do not load your vehicle any heavier

than the GVWR or the maximum front

and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage could

occur, or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal injury.

LTI2206

10-20 Technical and consumer information

UTILI-TRACK™ CHANNEL SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

1. Side channels

2. Header channel

3. Channel sections

4. Floor channels

WARNING

●Properly install and tighten the tie-

down cleats into the Utili-track™ chan-

nel system. Also, do not attach any rope

or straps directly to the channel. Failure

to properly install the tie-down cleats or

attaching ropes or straps directly to the

channel can cause the cargo to become

unsecured. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause personal

injury.

NOTE:

If the bed liner storage bins (if so equipped)

are installed on the vehicle, use type B

cleats in the side channel locations. The

use of type A cleats in the side channel

locations with the bed liner storage bins

installed will interfere with bed liner stor-

age bin lid operation. For additional infor-

mation on bed liner storage bins, refer to

“Storage” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

The Utili-track™ channel system allows you to

move tie-down clamps in the bed to the best

location to secure a load.

The tie-down cleats must be installed so the

clamp is properly seated in the notches in the rail.

If the tie-down cleat is not seated in the notches,

it will not be flush with the rail and cannot be

properly tightened. The bolt in the center of the

cleat must be tightened hand tight (20 – 40 in-

lbs)

Check the tightness of the tie-down cleat peri-

odically during a trip to make sure the center bolt

has not become loose.

Install the tie-down cleat as follows:

1. Remove the channel protectors by sliding

them out the back of the truck bed. Properly

store the channel protectors.

2. Loosen the center bolt completely.

LTI0107

Technical and consumer information 10-21

3. Insert the cleat into the channel perpendicu-

lar to the channel as shown. Then rotate the

cleat clockwise 90° and slide it to the de-

sired location.

4. Position the cleat so the nubs on the bottom

fully seat into the channel detents.

Type A cleat (if so equipped)

LTI2185

Type B cleat (if so equipped)

LTI0103

Type A cleat (if so equipped)

LTI2186

10-22 Technical and consumer information

5. There should be no gap between the bottom

of the cleat and the top of the channel.

Tighten the center bolt hand tight (20-40 in-

lbs ).

Type B cleat (if so equipped)

LTI0104

Type A cleat (if so equipped)

LTI2187

Technical and consumer information 10-23

Type B cleat (if so equipped)

WTI0124

10-24 Technical and consumer information

Type A cleat (if so equipped)

LTI2188

Technical and consumer information 10-25

CAUTION

●Install only one cleat per section of

channel.

●Applying loads at angles to the cleats

greater then 45° or loads greater than

150 lbs. (header and floor channels) or

200 lbs. (side channels) may cause dam-

age to the channel or bed.

Type B cleat (if so equipped)

LTI0106

10-26 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

Do not install accessories over the gap

between the front and rear side channels.

Doing this could affect the rear structure

in certain rear impacts, which could result

in serious injury.

Type A cleat (if so equipped) 1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installation

LTI2189

Technical and consumer information 10-27

CAUTION

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to prevent it from sliding or shifting.

Use the channel end stoppers to help se-

cure items in the channels from sliding off

the end of the truck bed.

Channel end stoppers

The channel end stoppers should be used to help

prevent accessories installed in the channels

from sliding or shifting off the end of the truck

bed.

They must be installed so they are properly

seated in the detents in the channel.

Type B cleat (if so equipped) 1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installation

LTI0123 WTI0119

10-28 Technical and consumer information

Install the channels end stoppers as follows:

1. Remove the channel protectors by sliding

them out the back of the truck bed. Properly

store the channel protectors.

2. Loosen the bolt on the center of the end

stopper with the provided wrench and insert

it into the channel.

3. Position the end stopper to the desired lo-

cation on the channel so the nubs on the

bottom of the end stopper fully seat into the

channel detents.

4. Tighten the bolt on the center of the end

stopper with the provided wrench.

LOADING TIPS

●The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

●Do not load the front and rear axle to

the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

●Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear GAWRs.

If you do, parts of your vehicle can

break, tire damage could occur,

or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could result

in loss of control and cause per-

sonal injury.

●Overloading not only can shorten

the life of your vehicle and the

tire, but can also cause unsafe

vehicle handling and longer brak-

ing distances. This may cause a

premature tire failure which

could result in a serious accident

and personal injury. Failures

caused by overloading are not

covered by the vehicle’s warranty.

CREW CAB MODELS

Crew Cab short wheel base models should

not be used to carry a slide-in camper.

TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING

INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 10-29

LOCATION FOR CENTER OF

GRAVITY

The illustration indicates the recommended

cargo center of gravity location.

Crew Cab long wheel base:

L1 (diesel engine only) = 39.4 in (1,000 mm)

L1 (gasoline engine only) = 47.2 in (1,200 mm)

WARNING

Improper loading may be dangerous. If a

load is too far back, it can affect handling

characteristics. If a load is too far forward,

the front axle may be overloaded.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading can ad-

versely affect vehicle handling, braking

and performance and may lead to

accidents.

VEHICLE LOAD WEIGHT CAPACITY

The vehicle payload weight capacity shown on

the Tire and Loading Information label, refer to

“Tire and Loading Information label” in this sec-

tion, indicates the maximum total weight of pas-

sengers, optional equipment (air conditioning,

trailer hitch, etc) and cargo that your vehicle is

designed to carry.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you

do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR for your

vehicle. Refer to ’’Vehicle Loading Information’’ in

this section for details.

Also check tires for proper inflation pressures.

Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of your

vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive

to a scale and weigh the front and the rear

wheels separately to determine axle

loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-

ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads

should not exceed the gross vehicle

weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are

given on the vehicle certification label. If

weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-

move items to bring all weights below the

ratings.

WTI0195

10-30 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a

trailer and its cargo can adversely affect

vehicle handling, braking and perfor-

mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

●Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load

for the first 500 miles (805 km). Your

engine, axle or other parts could be

damaged.

●For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you

tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full

throttle. This helps the engine and other

parts of your vehicle wear in at the

heavier load.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-

marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember

that towing a trailer places additional loads on

your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-

ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available

on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This

guide includes information on trailer towing ca-

pability and the special equipment required for

proper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the

value specified in the “Towing

Load/Specification” chart found in this section.

The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its

cargo weight.

●When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.

(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake

system MUST be used.

The maximum GCWR should not exceed the

value specified in the following “Towing

Load/Specification” chart.

The GCWR equals the combined weight of the

towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)

plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater

than these or using improper towing equipment

could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking

and performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not

only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also

the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-

priate for level highway driving may have to be

reduced for low traction situations (for example,

on slippery boat ramps).

LTI0161

TOWING A TRAILER

Technical and consumer information 10-31

Temperature conditions can also affect towing.

For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside

temperatures on graded roads can affect engine

performance and cause overheating. The engine

protection mode, which helps reduce the chance

of engine damage, could activate and automati-

cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may

decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully

to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather

and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced engine

power and vehicle speed. The reduced

speed may be lower than other traffic,

which could increase the chance of a col-

lision. Be especially careful when driving.

If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-

ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a

safe area. Allow the engine to cool and

return to normal operation. For additional

information, refer to “If your vehicle over-

heats” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from improper

towing procedures is not covered by

NISSAN warranties.

Tongue load

When using a weight carrying or a weight distrib-

uting hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 -

15% of the total trailer load or use the trailer

tongue load specified by the trailer manufacturer.

The tongue load must be within the maximum

tongue load limits shown in the following “Towing

Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-

comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for

proper tongue load.

King pin load

When using a 5th wheel hitch, keep the tongue

load between 15 - 25% of the total trailer load

within the maximum king pin load limits shown in

the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart.

If the king pin load becomes excessive, rearrange

cargo to allow for proper king pin load.

WTI0160

10-32 Technical and consumer information

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight

(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed

the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label. The GVW equals the combined weight of

the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,

hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must

not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

Towing with Weight Distributing Class 4

Hitch

The Class 4 towing capacities shown in the

towing load specification charts are calculated

per the SAE J2807 standards. Additional pas-

sengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such

as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle

and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing ca-

pacity and trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to

confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front

GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight

Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured

using platform type scales commonly found at

truck stops, highway weigh stations, building

supply centers or salvage yards.

Towing with Gooseneck Hitch

The gooseneck towing capacities are calculated

assuming a base vehicle with driver and any

options required to achieve the rating. Additional

passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment,

such as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the

vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum tow-

ing capacity and trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to

confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front

GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight

Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured

using platform type scales commonly found at

truck stops, highway weigh stations, building

supply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity for

tongue/king pin load, use the following proce-

dure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of

the passengers and cargo that are normally

in the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the

GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-

able maximum tongue/king pin load.

To determine the available towing capacity, use

the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the

⬙Towing Load/Specification⬙chart found in

this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the

GCWR. The remaining amount is the avail-

able maximum towing capacity.

CA0036

Technical and consumer information 10-33

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh

your trailer on a scale with all equipment and

cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is

towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not

more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown

on the trailer and is not more than the calculated

available maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to

make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear

Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front

Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight

on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to

be moved or removed to meet the specified rat-

ings.

Example:

●Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed

on a scale - including passengers, cargo and

hitch - 7,804 lb. (3,540 kg).

●Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -

7,804 lb. (3,540 kg).

●Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)

from “Towing Load/Specification⬙chart -

19,450 lb. (8,822 kg).

●Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow-

ing Load/Specification⬙chart - 9,200 lb.

(4,173 kg).

8,990 lb. (4,078 kg) GVWR

– 7,804 lb. (3,540 kg) GVW

= 1,186 lb. (538 kg) Available for tongue/king

pin weight

19,450 lb. (8,822 kg) GCWR

– 7,804 lb. (3,540 kg) GVW

= 11,644 lb. (5,282 kg) Capacity available for tow-

ing

1,186 lb. (538 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 11,644 lb. (5,282 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less than

the maximum towing capacity due to the passen-

ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-

tween 10% of the trailer weight or within the

trailer tongue load specification recommended

by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load

becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-

tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the

maximum tongue weight specification shown in

the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the

calculated available tongue weight is greater

than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less

than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to

match the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are within

the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

WARNING

The towing capacities provided in this

manual are for general reference only. The

safe towing capacity of your truck is af-

fected by dealer and factory installed op-

tions and passenger and cargo loads. You

must weigh the vehicle and trailer as de-

scribed in this manual to determine the

actual vehicle towing capacity. Do not ex-

ceed the published maximum towing ca-

pacity or the GCWR or the GVWR shown

on the FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so

can result in an accident causing serious

personal injury or property damage.

NOTE:

The SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4

Hitch specifications are based on S and SV

grade models . The Gooseneck Hitch speci-

fications are based on SV grade models.

10-34 Technical and consumer information

Non-XD models — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 1,590 lb (721.2 kg) 1,610 lb (730.3 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 9,270 lb (4,204.8 kg) 9,230 lb (4,186.7 kg)

Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 927 lb (420.5 kg) 923 lb (418.7 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 15,300 lb (6,940 kg) 15,300 lb (6,940 kg)

XD models — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 2,080 lb (943.5 kg) 2,000 lb (907.2 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 12,310 lb (5,583.7 kg) 12,030 lb (5,456.7 kg)

Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 1,231 lb (558.4 kg) 1,203 lb (545.7 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 19,450 lb (8,822 kg) 19,450 lb (8,822 kg)

XD models — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 1,930 lb (875.4 kg) 1,840 lb (834.6 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 11,900 lb (5,397.7 kg) 11,330 lb (5,139.2 kg)

Maximum King pin load *2, *3 1,785 lb (809.7 kg) 1,700 lb (770.9 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 19,450 lb (8,822 kg) 19,450 lb (8,822 kg)

Technical and consumer information 10-35

XD models — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 2,590 lb (1,174.8 kg) 2,520 lb (1,143.1 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 11,260 lb (5,107.5 kg) 10,990 lb (4,985 kg)

Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 1,126 lb (510.7 kg) 1,099 lb (498.5 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating *4 17,700 lb (8,029 kg) 17,700 lb (8,029 kg)

XD models — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WD

Maximum Payload 2,440 lb (1,106.8 kg) 2,310 lb (1,047.8 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 11,390 lb (5,166.4 kg) 11,120 lb (5,043.9 kg)

Maximum King pin load *2, *3 1,709 lb (775 kg) 1,668 lb (756.6 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating *4 17,700 lb (8,029 kg) 17,700 lb (8,029 kg)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,

cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

*2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

*3: The maximum towing capacity when using the Genuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) and 500 lb. (227 kg) tongue load.

*4: The maximum gross combined weight rating for XD gasoline engine vehicles equipped with 20 inch wheels is 16,900 lbs (7,666 kg).

10-36 Technical and consumer information

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional

trailer tow package. The trailer tow package in-

cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This

hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of

this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is

used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball

that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine

NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available

at a NISSAN dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional

trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of

your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame

mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your

vehicle and trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer

hitch is available at a NISSAN dealer. Make sure

the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle

to help avoid personal injury or property damage

due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road

surfaces or passing trucks.

A hitch used for towing 5th wheel and gooseneck

trailers can also be installed on your vehicle.

Contact a professional supplier of towing equip-

ment to purchase and have a 5th wheel or goose-

neck hitch installed.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specific

weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-

pable of towing a trailer heavier than the

weight rating of the hitch components.

Never exceed the weight rating of the

hitch components. Doing so can cause

serious personal injury or property

damage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight

rating for your trailer:

●The required hitch ball size is stamped on

most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also

have the size printed on the top of the ball.

●Choose the proper class hitch ball based on

the trailer weight.

●The diameter of the threaded shank of the

hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount

hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should

be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole

in the ball mount.

●The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be

long enough to be properly secured to the

ball mount. There should be at least 2

threads showing beyond the lock washer

and nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and

the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.

Choose a proper class ball mount based on the

trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should

be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the

ground.

Technical and consumer information 10-37

Bumper towing

The Genuine NISSAN step bumper has provi-

sions to install a trailer hitch ball and is designed

to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb

(2,268 kg).

NOTE:

The tailer hitch ball can not be installed on

the step bumper if the receiver-type frame

mounted hitch is installed on the vehicle.

To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circle in the

center of the step bumper 䊊

A, then remove it to

install the trailer hitch ball.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount is

one that is designed to carry the whole amount of

tongue weight and gross weight directly on the

ball mount and on the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch

This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling”or

“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball

mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue

weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many ve-

hicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a given

trailer, and need some of the tongue weight

transferred through the frame and pushing down

on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow

vehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is

recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a

maximum weight over 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).

Check with the trailer and towing equipment

manufacturers to determine if they recommend

the use of a weight-distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may af-

fect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If

you are considering use of a weight-

distributing hitch system with a surge

brake-equipped trailer, check with the

surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer

to determine if and how this can be done.

Follow the instructions provided by the manufac-

turer for installing and using the weight-

distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.

With the ignition on and the doors closed,

allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes

so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point on

the front and rear bumpers at the center of

the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust

the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper

height is within0-.5inches (0 – 13 mm) of

the reference height measured in step 2. The

rear bumper should be no higher than the

reference height measured in step 2.

LTI2227

10-38 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributing

hitch so the rear of the bumper is no

higher than the measured reference

height when the trailer is attached. If the

rear bumper is higher than the measured

reference height when loaded, the vehicle

may handle unpredictably which could

cause a loss of vehicle control and cause

serious personal injury or property

damage.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting

caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-

dling. Sway control devices may be used to help

control these affects. If you choose to use one,

contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make

sure the sway control device will work with the

vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-

tem. Follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer for installing and using the sway

control device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg).

Class II hitch

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,587 kg).

Class III hitch

Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg).

Class IV hitch

Class IV hitches are weight carrying (WC) and

weight distributing (WD) hitches depending on

the vehicle and hitch specifications. Not all Class

IV hitches are rated to be both. See the specific

hitch for that information. Class IV trailer hitch

equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball)

used as weight carrying are rated up to 10,000 lb

(4,535 kg) gross trailer weight (GTW) with a

maximum trailer tongue weight (TW) of 1000 lb

(453 kg). Class IV hitches used for weight dis-

tributing are rated up to 14,000 lb (6,350 kg)

gross trailer weight (GTW) with a maximum trailer

tongue weight (TW) of 1400 lb (635 kg). A Class

IV hitch usually has a 2⬙square receiver opening.

A higher class drawbar does not increase the

towing capacity of the hitch. To use this class of

hitch for weight distribution requires a weight

distribution system. Class IV hitches attach to the

vehicle frame only. A weight distributing hitch

should be used to tow trailers that weigh over

5,000 lb (2,268 kg).

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV

weigh distributing trailer hitch that has a

14,000 lb (6,350 kg) maximum weight rating, but

your vehicle is only capable of towing the maxi-

mum trailer weights shown in the “Towing

Load/Specification” chart in this section.

5th wheel/gooseneck

A 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer can be towed by

installing a 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer hitch.

These types of hitches are mounted in the bed of

the pick-up. A professional trailer equipment sup-

plier should install these hitches as it is very

important to mount the hitch correctly to distrib-

ute the king pin weight for the proper load carry-

ing and sway control performance.

The king pin weight should be 15% of the fully

loaded trailer. Make sure the king pin weight does

not cause the gross vehicle weight to exceed the

Gross Maximum Weight Rating or the rear axle

weight to exceed the Rear Gross Axle Weight

rating. For additional information, refer to “Maxi-

mum load limits” in this section.

Technical and consumer information 10-39

The weight of the trailer should not exceed the

maximum towing capacity for the vehicle. For

additional information, refer to “Towing

Load/Specification” chart in this section.

Make sure the trailer design allows for the correct

vehicle to trailer clearances before purchasing a

5th wheel trailer.

WARNING

●The hitch should not be attached to or

affect the operation of the impact-

absorbing bumper.

●Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

●Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-

tem, brake system, etc. to install a

trailer hitch.

●To reduce the possibility of additional

damage if your vehicle is struck from

the rear, where practical, remove the

receiver when not in use.

●Regularly check that all trailer hitch

mounting bolts are securely mounted.

●When towing with the hitch ball

mounted to the rear bumper, do not

make sharp turns. The trailer may con-

tact the bumper and cause damage to

the bumper or trailer.

●When towing a 5th wheel trailer, do not

make sharp turns while driving or back-

ing. The trailer may contact the vehicle

and cause damage to both the trailer

and vehicle.

CAUTION

●A 5th wheel hitch adapter is necessary

to use an aftermarket 5th wheel hitch. A

Genuine NISSAN 5th wheel hitch

adapter (as shown) may be available at

a NISSAN dealer.

●Ensure kit components are properly

stored when not in use. Improperly

stowed components could result in se-

rious personal injury during a collision

or sudden stop.

LTI2204

10-40 Technical and consumer information

Gooseneck hitch ball and safety chain an-

chor attachment installation

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Remove the gooseneck hitch ball and safety

chain anchor attachments from the storage

pouch.

3. Remove the center and both of the rear caps

from the puck plugs.

●Once removed, place the pucks in the

storage pouch for future use.

4. Lift the handle from the center of the hitch

ball and rotate 90° from the resting position.

LTI2209 LTI2160

Technical and consumer information 10-41

5. Position the ball bearings to the sides of the

truck bed and Insert the gooseneck hitch

ball into the center receiver tube of the truck

bed.

6. Rotate the handle 90° seat the handle back

to the original resting position. If the handle

does not seat fully, rotate the hitch ball until

the handle drops into the original resting

position.

7. Place the safety chain anchor attachments

into the q-turn pucks.

LTI2210 LTI2164 LTI2211

10-42 Technical and consumer information

8. Rotate the safety chain anchor attachments

90° until the center of the anchor seats into

place.

NOTE:

Removal of the gooseneck hitch ball and

safety chain anchor attachments are in the

reverse order of installation. To remove

safety chain anchor attachment, lift the

center䊊

1, rotate 90°, and lift safety chain

anchor attachment away.

Tire pressures

●When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-

hicle tires to the recommended cold

tire pressure indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

●Trailer tire condition, size, load rating

and proper inflation pressure should

be in accordance with the trailer and

tire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between your

vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should

be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,

not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety

chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch

ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave

enough slack in the chains to permit turning

corners.

LTI2212 LTI2192

Technical and consumer information 10-43

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical

system, a commercially available power-

type module/converter must be used to

provide power for all trailer lighting. This

unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct

power source for all trailer lights while

using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and

turn signal circuits as a signal source. The

module/converter must draw no more that

15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp

circuits. Using a module/converter that

exceeds these power requirements may

damage the vehicle’s electrical system.

See a reputable trailer retailer to obtain

the proper equipment and to have it

installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or

local regulations. For assistance in hooking up

trailer lights, it is recommended that you contact a

NISSAN dealer or reputable trailer retailer. Ve-

hicles equipped with the optional trailer tow

package are equipped with a 7-pin trailer har-

ness connector. If your trailer is equipped with a

flat 4-pin connector, an adapter will be needed to

connect the trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters

are available at auto parts stores and hitch retail-

ers.

Trailer brakes (if so equipped)

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,

make sure it conforms to federal and/or local

regulations and that it is properly installed.

Vehicles equipped with a 7–pin trailer harness

connector are pre-wired for a trailer brake con-

troller. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for a trailer brake adapter harness.

When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.

(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake

system MUST be used. However, most states

require a separate braking system on trailers with

a loaded weight above a specific amount. Make

sure the trailer meets the local regulations and

the regulations where you plan to tow.

WARNING

The Gross Combined Weight Rating

(GCWR) must never exceed the vehicle

manufacturers recommendation.

Several types of braking systems are available.

Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is

mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line

running to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes are

activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch

ball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic

surge brakes are common on rental trailers and

some boat trailers. In this type of system, there is

no hydraulic or electric connection for brake op-

eration between the tow vehicle and the trailer.

CAUTION

Your factory trailer brake control unit will

not activate surge-style trailer brakes

Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking sys-

tems are activated by an electronic signal sent

from a trailer brake controller (special brake-

sensing module). If electric trailer brakes are

used, refer to “Electric trailer brake controller⬙in

this section.

Have a professional supplier of towing equip-

ment make sure the trailer brakes are properly

installed and demonstrate proper brake function

testing.

WARNING

The NISSAN trailer brake controller has

been verified to be compatible with trail-

ers having electric actuated drum brakes

(one to four axles) and electric-over-

hydraulic brakes. It will not activate hy-

draulic surge-style trailer brakes

10-44 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-

rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Electric trailer brake controller

Trailers equipped with electric brakes may re-

quire the installation of an aftermarket trailer

brake controller.

Your vehicle is equipped with a connector and

jumper harness that is specifically designed to be

used when installing an aftermarket brake con-

troller.

To install the electric trailer brake controller

jumper harness, perform the following proce-

dure:

1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to the

rearmost position.

example

LTI0117

Technical and consumer information 10-45

2. Apply the parking brake to access the

jumper harness connector.

3. Locate the jumper harness connector under

the lower portion of the instrument panel.

The connector is taped to the wiring harness

䊊

Aas indicated.

Wire color designation for electric trailer brake

controller jumper harness.

WIRE COLOR NOTE

RED/GREEN Vehicle stop lamp switch

to trailer brake controller.

BLACK Brake controller ground

(-).

BROWN/WHITE Trailer brake controller

switched output.

RED/BLUE Trailer brake controller

illumination.

RED Fused trailer brake con-

troller battery feed (B+).

LTI0122 LTI2228

10-46 Technical and consumer information

4. Peel off the tape and connect the jumper

harness to the connector 䊊

5. Release the parking brake.

6. Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake

controller according to the manufacturer’s

instructions.

1. Gain –

2. Gain +

3. Manual control lever

4. Boost

Trailer brake controller unit (if so

equipped)

The Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU), located

on the lower instrument panel, is a device that

assists the vehicle in having effective and smooth

braking while towing a trailer.

Operating modes:

●Automatic mode: This is the normal op-

eration of the TBCU depending on the gain

and boost settings adjusted by the cus-

tomer. This mode will activate when vehicle

brake pedal is pressed.

●Manual mode: This mode is initiated by

adjusting the manual control lever from rest-

ing position. This mode will provide output

power to trailer brakes without applying the

vehicle brake pedal.

To determine the output operation of the system:

●Gain + and Gain - : Used to increase or

decrease the braking force supplied to the

trailer brakes. To adjust the gain, press Gain

+ or Gain - to the desired point (0-10). For

example: gain setting 6.0 is a typical starting

point for heavy loads.

●Boost: Used to adjust the feel of the auto-

matic brake event that occurs when the ve-

hicle brake pedal is applied. To set up boost,

press Boost button once to display for cur-

rent boost setting (display for 3 seconds).

Keep pressing to increase boost level until

the desired level (0-3) is achieved.

LTI2229 LTI2157

Technical and consumer information 10-47

●Manual Control Lever: Provides brake

output power to trailer brakes without apply-

ing the vehicle brake pedal. The amount of

brake output supplied corresponds to the

amount of pinch pressure applied to the

manual control lever.

Prodigy® P2 initial screen at start up (15 seconds*) Boost off

Power to Prodigy® P2 with trailer connected and boost feature not engaged Boost level 1

Power to Prodigy® P2 with trailer connected and boost feature not engaged Boost level 2

Power to Prodigy® P2, trailer not connected Boost level 3

Gain feature is adjustable from to by increments of

*if sustained for longer, check trailer connections or visit a dealer for service

10-48 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

Do not exceed Gross Combined Weight

Rating (GVWR). For additional informa-

tion about GVWR, refer to “Towing

Load/Specification” in this section of the

manual.

Pre-towing tips

●Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or unloaded

trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it

has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down

condition; check for improper tongue load,

overload, worn suspension or other possible

causes of either condition.

●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

●Keep the cargo load as low as possible in

the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity

low.

●Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the

trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in

the back half. Also make sure the load is

balanced side to side.

●Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-

hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and

trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a

trailer to the vehicle.

This graphic shows the suggested boost levels for different trailer sizes relative to the

vehicle size.

LTI2156

Technical and consumer information 10-49

●Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to

all federal, state or local regulations. If not,

install any mirrors required for towing before

driving the vehicle.

●Determine the overall height of the vehicle

and trailer so the required clearance is

known.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the

vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,

stopping and backing up in an area which is free

from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-

mance will be somewhat different than under

normal driving conditions.

●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

●Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or

lock to prevent the coupler from inadver-

tently becoming unlatched.

●Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

●Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

●Always drive your vehicle at a moderate

speed.

●When backing up, hold the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand. Move your

hand in the direction in which you want the

trailer to go. Make small corrections and

back up slowly. If possible, have someone

guide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle and

trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not

recommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector to the P

(Park) position before blocking the

wheels and applying the parking brake,

transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill

side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly

release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-

sorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Make sure the indicator light (if so

equipped) indicates the transfer case is in

4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is off. If

the indicator light is flashing, or the

ATP light is ON, make sure the transmission

is in P (Park) (A/T) and turn the 4WD switch

to 2WD or 4H. For additional information,

refer to “Automatic transmission park warn-

ing light” in the “Instruments and controls”

section and “Using 4-wheel drive (4WD)” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

7. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are

clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

10-50 Technical and consumer information

●While going downhill, the weight of the

trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de-

crease overall stability. Therefore, to main-

tain adequate control, reduce your speed

and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or

repeated use of the brakes when descend-

ing a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness

and could cause overheating. Shifting to a

lower gear instead provides “engine brak-

ing” and reduces the need to brake as fre-

quently.

●If the engine coolant temperature rises to a

high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this owner’s manual.

●Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal

circumstances.

●Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first

500 miles (805 km).

●For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do

tow, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h).

●Have your vehicle serviced more often than

at intervals specified. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Maintenance schedules” in the

“Maintenance and schedule” section of this

manual.

●When making a turn, your trailer wheels will

be closer to the inside of the turn than your

vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,

make a larger than normal turning radius

during the turn.

●Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely

affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-

ing vehicle sway. When being passed by

larger vehicles, be prepared for possible

changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-

hicle handling.

Trailer Sway Assist:

To minimize trailer sway, your vehicle may apply

braking to individual wheels based on input from

your vehicle sensors and vehicle speed. Trailer

sway control is a function of the Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system and is active when the

VDC function is enabled.

CAUTION

If the VDC-OFF switch is on (meaning VDC

system OFF), the Trailer Sway Assist is

also disabled

When Trailer Sway Assist is in operation, the

VDC warning light blinks. When vehicle control is

regained, VDC warning light will turn OFF.

For additional information about the VDC system,

refer to “VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH” and Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system” sections of this manual.

If Trailer Sway Assist activates, do the fol-

lowing:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to

allow the vehicle to coast and steer as

straight ahead as the road conditions allow.

This combination will help stabilize the ve-

hicle

CAUTION

Do not try to correct trailer sway by steer-

ing or applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the

brakes and pull to the side of the road in a

safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-

anced as described earlier in this section.

Technical and consumer information 10-51

NOTE:

Trailer Sway Assist cannot reduce trailer

sway in all situations.

●Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires con-

siderably more distance than normal pass-

ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must

also pass the other vehicle before you can

safely change lanes.

●Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-

mission to a lower gear for engine braking

when driving down steep or long hills. This

will help slow the vehicle without applying

the brakes.

●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the

brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced

braking efficiency.

●Increase your following distance to allow for

greater stopping distances while towing a

trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

●NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-

trol (if so equipped) not be used while tow-

ing a trailer.

●Some states or provinces have specific

regulations and speed limits for vehicles that

are towing trailers. Obey the local speed

limits.

●Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-

nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after

50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

●When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-

ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or

rear bumper.

●Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights

before backing the trailer into the water or

the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil

should be replaced and transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information, refer to

the “Do-it-yourself” section in this manual.

Tow mode

Using tow mode is recommended when pulling a

heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Press the

TOW MODE switch to activate tow mode. The

indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illumi-

nates when tow mode is selected. Press the

TOW MODE switch again to turn tow mode off.

Tow mode is automatically canceled when the

ignition switch is turned off.

Tow mode includes the following features:

●Grade logic — Adjusts transmission shifts

when pulling a trailer or hauling a load up a

grade.

●Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — automati-

cally downshifts when driving down a grade

with a trailer or heavy load to help control

vehicle speed.

Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no

trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause

any damage. However, fuel economy may be

reduced and the transmission/engine driving

characteristics may feel unusual.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil

should be replaced and transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information, refer to

the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR 2-WHEEL

DRIVE (2WD) VEHICLE (if so

equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle

behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor

home.

10-52 Technical and consumer information

CAUTION

●Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

●Never flat tow your 2WD vehicle.

●Never tow your 2WD vehicle with the

rear wheels on the ground. Doing so

may cause serious and expensive dam-

age to the powertrain.

●DO NOT tow your 2WD vehicle with all

four wheels on the ground (flat towing).

Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal trans-

mission parts due to lack of transmis-

sion lubrication.

●For emergency towing procedures refer

to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”

in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR 4-WHEEL

DRIVE (4WD) VEHICLE (if so

equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle

behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor

home.

CAUTION

●Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

●Never flat tow your 4WD vehicle.

●DO NOT tow your 4WD vehicle with any

wheels on the ground. Doing so may

cause serious and expensive damage to

the powertrain.

●For emergency towing procedures refer

to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”

in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

Automatic Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic

transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST

be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive

wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s

recommendations when using their product.

NISSAN does not make a snowplow for TITAN

and has not evaluated the suitability of its trucks

for use as snowplow platforms. Instead, the

snowplow manufacturers establish minimum ve-

hicle requirements for their various plow prod-

ucts and they make the determination as to which

vehicle platforms are suitable, based on their

individual product specifications. Consult the

snowplow manufacturers and sellers concerning

the fitness of the TITAN for use with their prod-

ucts. NISSAN advises caution whenever install-

ing aftermarket parts and accessories because

these products have not been tested or certified

by NISSAN.

WARNING

●Installing a snowplow may affect ve-

hicle handling. This may cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle and

could result in vehicle damage, serious

injury, or death.

●A snowplow attached may affect the

operation of the air bags. Use extreme

caution while driving and plowing to

avoid vehicle damage, serious injury, or

death.

SNOW PLOW

Technical and consumer information 10-53

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on

the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times

as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from the norm due to

variations in driving habits, service practices and

differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-

sured under controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and con-

crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause the material of the

tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-

sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-

mance which all passenger car tires must meet

under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.

109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated

and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-

ther separately or in combination, can

cause heat build-up and possible tire

failure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

10-54 Technical and consumer information

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following

emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other

vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.

If you did not receive a Warranty Information

Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-

ment by writing to:

●Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other

vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.

If you did not receive a Warranty Information

Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-

ment by writing to:

●Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-

tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-

come involved in individual problems be-

tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-

hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go

to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh

Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at

1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform Transport Canada in addition

to notifying NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may request that NISSAN con-

duct a recall campaign. However, Trans-

port Canada cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your

dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s De-

fect Investigations and Recalls Division toll

free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also

report safety defects online at:

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/

7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng

(English speakers) or

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Technical and consumer information 10-55

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/

7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra

(French speakers)

Additional information concerning motor

vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans-

port Canada’s Road Safety Information

Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at

www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-

ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns

please contact our Consumer Information

Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

WARNING

A vehicle equipped with Four-Wheel Drive

(4WD) should never be tested using a two

wheel dynamometer (such as the dyna-

mometers used by some states for emis-

sions testing), or similar equipment. Make

sure you inform the test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD

before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may re-

sult in transmission damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which could re-

sult in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states and

Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-

quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-

tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of

the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it

is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,

the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary

usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or

the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be

reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the

I/M test, check the vehicle’s

inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-

tion. Place the ignition switch in the ON position

without starting the engine. If the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 sec-

onds and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test

condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink

after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is

“ready”. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or to

prepare the vehicle for testing.

diesel engine only

For additional information, refer to the “Titan Die-

sel Owner’s Manual”.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (gas

engine only)

10-56 Technical and consumer information

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-

corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-

tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-

ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR

is designed to record data related to vehicle

dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this

vehicle is designed to record such data as:

●How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

●Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

●How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

●How fast the vehicle was traveling.

●Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-

ing of the circumstances in which crashes and

injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by

your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal data

(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR data with

the type of personally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-

ment is required and access to the vehicle or the

EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-

facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have ac-

cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only

be accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-

mitted by law.

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model

year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine

NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of

service and repair information for your vehicle.

This manual is the same one used by the factory-

trained technicians working at NISSAN dealer-

ships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can

also be purchased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Ser-

vice Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model

year and prior, please contact your nearest

NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and loca-

tion of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the

NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122

and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist

you.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 10-57

MEMO

10-58 Technical and consumer information

11 Index

4WD.......................5-44

4WDwarninglight...............2-22

4-Wheel Drive .................5-44

Aiming control, headlights ...........2-55

Air bag (See supplemental restraint

system).....................1-45

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact air bag

system)................1-52,1-67

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-72

Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-73, 2-28

Air bag warning light, supplemental . .1-73, 2-28

Aircleaner....................8-17

Air cleaner housing filter ............8-17

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation ..........4-37

Air conditioner specification label . . . .10-16

Air conditioner system refrigerant and

oil recommendations ............10-8

Air conditioner system refrigerant

recommendations..............10-8

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)

(if so equipped) ...............4-42

Heater and air conditioner controls ....4-43

Servicing air conditioner ..........4-45

Airflowcharts..................4-38

Anchor point locations .............1-30

Antenna .....................4-83

Antifreeze ....................5-64

Anti-lock brake warning light..........2-22

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)........5-55

Apps .......................4-84

Around View® Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16

Audible reminders ...............2-31

Audio system ..................4-46

AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46

Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . .4-79, 4-80

Bluetooth® streaming audio . . . .4-79, 4-80

Compact disc (CD) player . .4-56, 4-62, 4-69

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player....................4-54

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player.................4-58,4-64

FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46

iPod® Player .............4-74,4-76

iPod® player operation .......4-74,4-76

Radio ....................4-46

Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-82

USB interface ............4-70,4-72

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection

Port .....................4-72

Autolight switch.................2-54

Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . . . . .3-36, 3-38

Automatic power window switch .....2-82

Driving with automatic transmission ....5-17

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-27, 3-28

Automatic door locks ..............3-7

Automatic drive positioner .......3-36,3-38

Automatic transmission fluid temperature

gauge......................2-11

AUXjack ....................4-70

Back button....................4-7

Battery ..................5-64, 8-13

Charge warning light ............2-24

Battery replacement ..............8-24

Keyfob ...................8-24

NISSAN Intelligent Key®..........8-24

Before starting the engine ...........5-14

Belt (See drive belt) ..............8-15

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) warning

system......................5-22

Block heater

Engine ....................5-66

Bluetooth® audio ............4-79,4-80

Bluetooth® hands-free phone

system.................4-115, 4-128

Boosterseats..................1-42

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)......5-55

Brake fluid ..................8-11

Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-28

Brake system ................5-54

Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-31, 8-19

Parking brake operation ..........5-22

Self-adjusting brakes ............8-19

Brake assist ...................5-56

Brake fluid ....................8-11

Brakes ......................

-19

Brake system ..................5-54

Break-inschedule ...............5-42

Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9

Brightness control

Instrument panel ...............2-56

Bulb check/instrument panel ..........2-22

Bulb replacement ................8-28

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants ..................10-2

Cargolightswitch................2-58

Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .10-17

Car phone or CB radio.............4-114

CD care and cleaning ..............4-81

CD player (See audio system) . .4-56, 4-62, 4-69

Check tire pressure ...............2-42

Child restraints . . . . . . .1-23, 1-24, 1-26, 1-28

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) System ..............1-28

Precautions on child

restraints. . . . . . . . .1-26, 1-32, 1-38, 1-42

Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-30

Child safety rear door lock ............3-7

Chimes, audible reminders ...........2-31

Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . .7-2, 7-4

Climate control seat switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-58

Clock setting

(models with Navigation System) ........4-7

Clock setting

(models without Navigation System) . .4-55, 4-59

C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-14

Cold weather driving...............5-64

Compact disc (CD) player . . . .4-56, 4-62, 4-69

Compass .....................2-18

Connect phone .................4-84

Console light ...................2-86

Control panel buttons ...............4-4

Back button ..................4-7

Brightness/contrast button ..........4-9

Enterbutton..................4-4

With navigation system ............4-4

Controls

Audio controls (steering wheel).......4-82

Heater and air conditioner controls.....4-43

Heater and air conditioner controls

(manual) ...................4-33

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants ................10-2

Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

Checking engine coolant level ........8-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-9

Corrosion protection ...............7-7

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . .5-40, 5-40, 5-41

Cupholders...................2-78

Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . . .1-69

Daytime Running Light System . . . . .2-56, 8-27

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)..........8-10

Digital video disc DVD..............4-89

Dimensions and weights. . . . . . . . . . . .10-11

Dimmer switch for instrument panel ......2-56

Display......................2-32

Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-4

Door locks .....................3-5

Door open warning light.............2-25

Doors........................3-5

Drive belt .....................8-15

Drive positioner, Automatic........3-36,3-38

Driving

Cold weather driving.............5-64

Driving with automatic transmission ....5-17

Precautions when starting and

driving...................5-2,5-8

Driving the vehicle ................5-16

Eco Drive Report.................5-52

Economy-fuel..................5-43

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system ......................5-51

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system switch ..................2-65

Emergency engine shutoff .........5-13,6-2

Emission control information label ......10-15

Emission control system warranty.......10-55

Engine

Before starting the engine..........5-14

Blockheater.................5-66

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Changing engine coolant ...........8-5

Changingengineoil..............8-7

Changing engine oil filter ...........8-8

Checking engine coolant level ........8-5

Checking engine oil level ...........8-6

Engine compartment check locations ....8-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-9

Engine cooling system ............8-4

Engineoil ...................8-6

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .10-7

Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . .2-11, 2-12

11-2

Engine oil pressure warning light ......2-25

Engine oil viscosity..............10-8

Engine serial number............10-14

Engine specifications ............10-9

Engine coolant temperature gauge .......2-9

Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-12

Enterbutton....................4-4

Event Data recorders .............10-57

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .........5-2

Explanation of maintenance items ........9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . .9-5

Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . .6-2

Flat tire .......................6-3

Floor mat positioning aid .............7-5

Fluid

Brake fluid ..................8-11

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants ................10-2

Engine coolant.................8-4

Engine oil ...................8-6

Power steering fluid .............8-11

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . .8-12

F.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........10-14

Foglightswitch.................2-57

Four-Wheel Drive ................5-44

Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint

system) ..................1-52,1-67

Front and rear sonar system ..........5-60

Front power seat adjustment ...........1-5

Frontseats.....................1-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants ................10-2

Fuel economy ................5-43

Fuel gauge ..................2-10

Fuel octane rating ..............10-6

Fuel recommendation ............10-5

Loose fuel cap warning ...........2-45

Fuel Cell Vehicle (FCV) System

Tirepressure.................8-31

Fuel efficient driving tips.............5-42

Fuel-filler door ..................3-22

Fuelgauge....................2-10

Fuses.......................8-20

Fusiblelinks...................8-22

Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver . . . . . . . . .2-87, 2-89, 2-89, 2-90

Gauge

Automatic transmission fluid temperature

gauge.....................2-11

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-9

Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . .2-11, 2-12

Fuel gauge ..................2-10

Odometer ...................2-8

Speedometer .................2-8

Tachometer ..................2-9

Trip computer ................2-13

Trip odometer .................2-8

Voltmeter...................2-12

General maintenance ...............9-2

Glovebox.....................2-75

Grocery hooks ..................2-80

Hands-free phone system,

Bluetooth®...............4-115, 4-128

Hazard warning flasher switch ..........6-2

Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55

Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-53

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53

Headlights....................8-26

Headlights, aiming control............2-55

Head restraints..................1-10

Heated rear seats ................2-61

Heated seats ...................2-60

Heated seat switches ..............4-85

Heated steering wheel switch .........2-62

Heater

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)

(if so equipped) ...............4-42

Heater and air conditioner controls.....4-43

Heater operation ...........4-35,4-44

Heater and air conditioner (automatic) .....4-42

Hill descent control switch ...........2-63

Hill descent control system ...........5-59

Hill start assist system..............5-59

HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver . . . . . . . . .2-87, 2-89, 2-89, 2-90

Hood.......................3-21

Horn .......................2-58

Ignition Switch

Push-Button Ignition Switch ........5-10

Immobilizer system ............2-48,5-14

11-3

Important vehicle information label ......10-14

In-cabin microfilter ................8-17

Increasing fuel economy.............5-43

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders).................2-22,2-28

Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . .3-27, 3-28

Instrument brightness control ..........2-56

Instrument panel ...............0-6,2-4

Instrument panel dimmer switch ........2-56

Intelligent Key system

Key operating range..............3-9

Key operation ................3-10

Mechanicalkey................3-4

Remote keyless entry operation.......3-13

Troubleshooting guide............3-17

Warning signals ...............3-17

Interiorlight....................2-85

iPod®Player...............4-74,4-76

ISOFIX child restraints .............1-28

Jump starting ...............6-10,8-14

Key.........................3-2

Key fob battery replacement ..........8-24

Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system).........3-13

Keys

NISSAN Intelligent Key® ........3-2,3-8

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. .3-4

Labels

Air conditioner specification label .....10-16

C.M.V.S.S. certification label .......10-14

Emission control information label . . . .10-15

Engine serial number............10-14

F.M.V.S.S. certification label ........10-14

Tire and Loading Information label . . . .10-15

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-13

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.....................10-13

Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-72

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

System ......................1-28

License plate

Installing the license plate .........10-16

Light

Air bag warning light .........1-73,2-28

Brake light (See stop light) .........8-28

Bulb check/instrument panel ........2-22

Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

Charge warning light ............2-24

Consolelight.................2-86

Exterior and Interior lights ..........8-28

Foglights...................8-26

Foglightswitch...............2-57

Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-53

Headlight control switch ..........2-53

Headlights..................8-26

Interiorlight..................2-85

Lightbulbs..................8-26

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-25

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light......................2-43

Passenger air bag and status light .....1-54

Personal lights ................2-86

Security indicator light............2-30

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...............2-22,2-28

Lights.......................8-26

Maplights ..................2-86

Lock

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7

Door locks ...................3-5

Power door locks ............3-6,3-7

Loose fuel cap warning .............

-45

Low fuel warning light . . .2-25, 2-27, 2-41, 2-42

Low tire pressure warning light .........2-25

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-43

Luggage (See vehicle loading information). .10-17

Maintenance

General maintenance .............9-2

Insidethevehicle...............9-3

Maintenance precautions ...........8-2

Outside the vehicle ..............9-2

Seat belt maintenance............1-23

Under the hood and vehicle .........9-4

Maintenancelog.................9-18

Maintenance requirements ............9-2

Maintenance schedules..............9-7

Malfunction indicator light ........2-27,2-30

Manual front seat adjustment...........1-4

11-4

Maplights ....................2-86

Map pocket....................2-72

Memory Seat ...............3-36,3-38

Meters and gauges.............2-6,2-11

Instrument brightness control ........2-56

Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . .3-27, 3-28

Outside mirrors ...............3-28

Rearview ...................3-27

Vanity mirror .................3-26

Mirrors ......................3-27

Mobileapps...................4-84

Moving Object Detection (MOD) ........4-28

NissanConnect

................4-84

NissanConnect

Services...........4-85

NISSAN Intelligent Key® ..........3-2,3-8

NISSAN mobile entertainment system

(MES).......................4-89

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . .2-48, 5-14

NISSAN voice recognition system ......4-137

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .10-6

Odometer .....................2-8

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants ................10-2

Changing engine oil ..............8-7

Changing engine oil filter ...........8-8

Checking engine oil level ...........8-6

Engine oil ...................8-6

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .10-7

Engine oil viscosity..............10-8

Oneshotcall .........4-118, 4-118, 4-130

Outside mirrors .................3-28

Overheat

If your vehicle overheats...........6-12

Owner’s manual order form ..........10-57

Owner’s manual/service manual order

information ...................10-57

Parking

Parking brake operation ...........5-22

Parking/parking on hills ...........5-54

Parking brake...................5-22

Personallights..................2-86

Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free

system .................4-115, 4-128

Power

Front seat adjustment .............1-5

Power door locks ............3-6,3-7

Power outlet ..........2-69,2-69,2-70

Power rear windows .............2-82

Power steering fluid .............8-11

Power steering system ...........5-54

Power windows ...............2-81

Rear power windows ............2-82

Power inverter switch ..............2-66

Power outlet ............2-69,2-69,2-70

Power steering ..................5-54

Power steering fluid ...............8-11

Precautions

Maintenance precautions ...........8-2

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions ..................5-6

Precautions on booster

seats . . . . . . . . . . .1-26, 1-32, 1-38, 1-42

Precautions on child

restraints. . . . . . . . .1-26, 1-32, 1-38, 1-42

Precautions on seat belt usage .......1-15

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system .................1-45,1-60

Precautions when starting and driving .5-2, 5-8

Push starting ...................6-12

Radio

Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . .4-114

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player .....................4-54

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player .................4-58,4-64

Steering wheel audio control switch . . . .4-82

Rainsensor....................2-51

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)

test .......................10-56

Rear power windows ..............2-82

Rearseat......................1-4

Rear sliding window ...............2-84

Rear sonar system off switch ..........

-67

Rearview mirror .................3-27

RearView Monitor ................4-10

Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster

switch.......................2-52

Recommended Fluids ..............10-2

Recorders

EventData.................10-57

11-5

Refrigerant recommendation ..........10-8

Registering a vehicle in another country . . .10-13

Remote Start ...............3-19,5-15

Reporting safety defects (US only) ......10-55

Safety

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7

Child seat belts . . . . .1-26, 1-32, 1-38, 1-42

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-55

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment ........1-4

Front power seat adjustment .........1-5

Seatback pockets ................2-73

Seat belt

Childsafety..................1-23

Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-24

Injured Person ................1-18

Largerchildren................1-24

Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-15

Pregnant women...............1-18

Seat belt extenders .............1-23

Seat belt maintenance............1-23

Seat belts ................1-15,7-6

Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-22

Three-point type with retractor .......1-18

Seat belt extenders ...............1-23

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-18, 2-25

Seats

Adjustment...................1-2

Automatic drive positioner . . . . . .3-36, 3-38

Frontseats...................1-2

Heatedseats.................2-60

Manual front seat adjustment.........1-4

Rearseat....................1-4

Security indicator light..............2-30

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), engine start ...........2-48,5-14

Security systems

Vehicle security system ...........2-47

Security systems (see theft warning) ......2-47

Self-adjusting brakes ..............8-19

Service manual order form...........10-57

Servicing air conditioner.............4-45

Shifting

Automatic transmission ...........5-18

Shoulder belt height adjustment ........1-22

Side air bag system (See supplemental side air

bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems) . . .1-69

Siri® Eyes-Free .................4-85

Smartphone connectivity ............4-84

Snow plow ...................10-53

Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16

Sparkplugs ...................8-16

Specifications ..................10-9

Speedometer ...................2-8

Speedometer and odometer ...........2-7

SRSwarninglabel................1-72

Stability control .................5-56

Standard maintenance ..............9-8

Starting

Before starting the engine..........5-14

Jump starting .............6-10,8-14

Precautions when starting and

driving...................5-2,5-8

Push starting .................6-12

Starting the engine (diesel only) ........5-16

Starting the engine (gasoline engine only) . . .5-14

Steering

Power steering fluid .............8-11

Power steering system ...........5-54

Steering wheel ..................3-24

Steering wheel audio control switch ......4-82

Stoplight.....................8-28

Storage......................2-72

Storage tray ...................

2-75

Sunglasses case.................2-77

Sunglasses holder ................2-77

Sun visors ....................3-26

Supplemental air bag warning labels ......1-72

Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-73, 2-28

Supplemental front impact air bag

system ...................1-52,1-67

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels .......1-72

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system .................1-45,1-60

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system) .........1-45

Switch

Autolightswitch...............2-54

Automatic power window switch ......2-82

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system switch ................2-65

Fog light switch ...............2-57

Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2

Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . . . .2-55

Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-53

Headlight control switch ..........2-53

Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . .2-63

Instrument brightness control ........2-56

Power door lock switch .........3-6,3-7

Power inverter switch ............2-66

Rear sonar system off switch ........2-67

Tow mode switch ..............2-68

Turnsignalswitch..............2-57

11-6

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch.....................2-63

Tachometer ....................2-9

Tailgate ..................3-32,3-32

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-9

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

engine start ................2-48,5-14

Three-way catalyst ................5-2

Tie down hooks .................3-36

Tire

Flat tire .....................6-3

Spare tire ...................6-4

Tire and Loading Information label . . . .10-15

Tire chains ..................8-38

Tirepressure.................8-31

Tire rotation..................8-38

Tires of 4-wheel drive ............8-41

Types of tires .................8-37

Uniform tire quality grading ........10-54

Wheels and tires ..........8-31,10-10

Wheel/tire size ...............10-10

Tirepressure...................8-31

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-25

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) ....................5-3,6-3

Towing

2-wheel drive models ............6-14

4-wheel drive models ............6-15

Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-52, 10-53

Towing load/specification .........10-34

Trailer towing ................10-31

Towing a trailer .................10-31

Towingyourvehicle...............6-13

Tow mode switch ................2-68

Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU) ......2-68

Transceiver

HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver . . . . . . .2-87, 2-89, 2-89, 2-90

Transfer case ...................5-45

Transmission

Driving with automatic transmission ....5-17

Travel (See registering a vehicle in another

country) .....................10-13

Trip computer ..................2-13

Trip odometer ...................2-8

Troubleshooting guide

(NISSAN voice recognition system) .....4-141

Truckbox.................3-32,3-32

Truck - camper loading ............10-29

Turn signal switch ................2-57

Under seat storage bin ..........2-74,2-77

Uniform tire quality grading ..........10-54

USB interface ..................4-72

Audio file operation ..........4-71,4-73

Using four wheel drive (4WD) .........5-44

Vanity mirror ...................3-26

Variable voltage control system .........8-15

Vehicle dimensions and weights .......10-11

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-63

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system.....5-56

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . .5-56

Vehicle identification ..............10-13

Vehicle identification number (VIN) ......10-13

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number) ...............10-13

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . .10-13

Vehicle immobilizer system ........2-48,5-14

Vehicle Information Display ...........2-32

Vehicle loading information ..........10-17

Vehicle recovery .................6-15

Vehicle security system .............2-47

Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System), engine start . . . .2-48, 5-14

Vents.......................4-32

Visors.......................3-26

Voice Prompt Interrupt ........4-118, 4-130

Voice recognition system ...........4-137

Voltmeter.....................2-12

Warning

4WD warning light..............2-22

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-73, 2-28

Anti-lock brake warning light ........2-22

Battery charge warning light ........2-24

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) warning

light......................5-22

Brake warning light .............2-24

Door open warning light...........2-25

Engine oil pressure warning light ......2-25

Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2

Loose fuel cap warning ...........2-45

Low fuel warning light .2-25, 2-27, 2-41, 2-42

11-7

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-25

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light......................2-43

Passenger air bag and status light .....1-54

Passenger’s seat belt warning light and

chime.....................2-28

Seat belt warning light ........1-18,2-25

Supplemental air bag warning light .1-73, 2-28

Vehicle security system ...........2-47

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...............2-22,2-28

Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-72

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders .................2-22,2-28

Audible reminders ..........2-22,2-28

Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22, 2-28

Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22, 2-28

Warninglights...............2-22,2-28

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders.....................2-21

Warning systems switch ............2-62

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . .10-11

Wheels and tires ............8-31,10-10

Wheel/tire size .................10-10

When traveling or registering in another

country .....................10-13

Windows .....................2-81

Locking passengers’ windows .......2-82

Power rear windows .............2-82

Power windows ...............2-81

Rear power windows ............2-82

Rear sliding window .............2-84

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Windshield wiper blades ............8-18

Wiper

Wiperblades.................8-18

Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

11-8

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Gas engine only

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-

ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to

run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or

E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically

designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-

versely affect the emission control de-

vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-

age caused by such fuel is not covered

by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

●Do not use fuel that contains the octane

booster methylcyclopentadienyl man-

ganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel

containing MMT may adversely affect

vehicle performance and vehicle emis-

sions. Not all fuel dispensers are la-

beled to indicate MMT content, so you

may have to consult your gasoline re-

tailer for more details. Note that Fed-

eral and California laws prohibit the use

of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

●U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-

fied by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbrevia-

tion or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

the “Owner’s Manual”.

Diesel engine only

For additional information, refer to “Fuel recom-

mendation” in the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

Gas engine only

●Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN”

For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and

oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

Diesel engine only

For additional information, refer to “Engine oil

recommendation” in the “Titan Diesel Owner’s

Manual”.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

Refer to the Tire and loading information label.

The label is typically located on the driver side

center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional

information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

2017 Nissan Titan And XD | Owner's Manual USA

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation